: 
 
 « 
 
 lawwaiyKiiiMi n i wfxin i iinnnn . viiiapuioi>"VMinwi>ii ii> > uv >»i>i w 
 1 )t>o<im«io«a»oo<r-x»«wy»:o«uw»otK. )nouiiinooMuiiw»o«: 
 
 AND THORNDI 
 
 K. 
 
 I OOWWWOOWWOOMHMWWIWOgaWI W I UMM I UUUIWMM I V M W I MWK i m illllliailOOt^aiMtCOV 
 
 '^11^52-^™*^^SS^ 
 
 
 n«m«H«rtMft1»Vi*rtfffl>«i»«W»««H»«»»<»'»«S>«»W' •
 
 •^k is i 
 S^l Nor 
 
 STATS KORrvj^r <:,rTrr^r
 
 EVEKYDAY ENGLISH 
 
 BOOK ONE
 
 rhj^^^^o 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 NEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGO 
 DALLAS • SAN FRANCISCO 
 
 MACMILLAN & CO., Limited 
 
 LONDON • BOMBAY • CALCLTTA 
 MELBOURNE 
 
 THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd. 
 
 TORONTO 
 
 pO'. 
 
 J ol
 
 EVERYDAY ENGLISH 
 
 BOOK ONE 
 
 BY 
 
 2- <oOO ^ 
 
 FRANKLIN T. BAKER 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH IN TEACHERS COLLEGE 
 
 AND SUPERVISOR OF ENGLISH IN THE 
 
 HORACE MANN SCHOOL 
 
 AND 
 
 ASHLEY H. THORNDTKE 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH IN COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 1913 
 
 All rujhU reserved
 
 Copyright, 1912, 
 By the MACMILLAN COMPANY. 
 
 Set up and electrotyped. Published May, 1912. Reprinted 
 May, 1913. 
 
 Nortooot) IPrrsa 
 
 J. S. Cashing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co. 
 
 Norwood, Mass., U.S.A.
 
 V' 
 
 E 
 
 > A Q 
 
 r 
 
 ' 7 
 
 o 
 
 V ■. 
 
 1 
 
 r~ 
 
 g 
 
 PREFACE 
 
 The study of English has become the basis of our eckica- 
 tional system. From the Kindergarten, through the Uni- 
 versity, the study of our language and literature is the main 
 element of unity and continuity that binds together the varied 
 discipline of our schools. This has been brought about by 
 changes so rapid that few have fully realized their importance ; 
 but every teacher of English has felt both the burden and the 
 opportunity which its preeminence imposes. 
 
 The teaching of English must give training in the knowledge 
 and use of the language, and of all parts of education surely 
 none can be more fundamental, or practical, or effective in 
 exercising the power to think. It must also open the door not 
 only to English literature, but to the great world of books, to 
 the accumulated culture of the race. While it trains the pupil 
 in efficient use of the mother tongue, it must widen his horizon 
 and render him susceptible to those refinements of feeling and 
 enlargements of sympathy essential to true culture. 
 
 Nowhere is this double service more important than in the 
 elementary schools. To the union and promotion of both serv- 
 ices, Everyday English is dedicated. 
 
 Book One is built up on a few general principles : 
 
 1. Language is primarily oral. 
 
 2. Constant practice and review are necessary for skill in 
 language, as in any art.
 
 vi Preface 
 
 3. Attention to the forms and principles of language may 
 make for efficiency in its use. 
 
 4. The study of English should lead to an interest in good 
 reading in prose and poetry. 
 
 5. This interest should be stimulated in many directions 
 and made the basis of the child's practice in expression. 
 
 6. Training in art and good taste should begin with sim- 
 plicity and attractiveness in the textbook. 
 
 We all know that the spoken words are the living lan- 
 guage, of which the written is only a symbol. The spoken 
 word precedes the written in the history of the race and in the 
 development of the child, and, in the child's life, occupies a 
 much larger place than in that of the educated adult. 
 
 A full third of the lessons in this book are oral, and much 
 of the work in the other lessons involves oral expression. 
 Grammar is connected with actual speech; special care is given 
 to drill in clear enunciation in speaking ; and oral expression 
 is integrated with the child's natural interest in games, dia- 
 logs, and dramas. Oral expression receives first attention not 
 merely for its own value, but because written expression is 
 freer and better if prepared for by full oral discussion. The 
 difficulties of written composition are thus divided, taken one 
 step at a time, and in the normal order. The reluctance to 
 write will be lessened, if the writing has been prepared for by 
 spontaneous and intelligent talk in the class. 
 
 In the selection of material for oral and written lessons, the 
 choice has been determined partly by the cultural value of the 
 ideas introduced, and partly by the suitability of the material 
 as a basis for practice in composition. In all selections the 
 interests of the children, as known to experienced teachers, 
 have been kept in view. Expression is impossible unless the 
 pupils have ideas to convey, and it is meager and artificial
 
 Preface vii 
 
 unless it is interesting to the children themselves. But their 
 interest is directed to many subjects. There seems no reason 
 why English should be kept as a handmaid to any single sub- 
 ject: nature stud}^, myths, moral lessons, or practical informa- 
 tion. These are all useful, but there is no gain in confining 
 the child to any one of them. A first book in English is the 
 place to engage the child's interest in many subjects, and to 
 stimulate by poetry and pictures, by fable, story and biography, 
 and by many other means, his intelligence and imagination. 
 
 The plan of Book Oxe offers an integration of its practical 
 and cultural aims through a method approved by the experi- 
 ence of many teachers : First, Oral Expression ; Second, Writ- 
 ten Expression based on the oral discussion ; Third, Language 
 Drill and Study connected closely with the oral and Avritten 
 composition, and supplied with many reviews. This arrange- 
 ment will, of course, often be varied by teachers, who will sup- 
 plement, or omit, or rearrange, to suit the needs and attain- 
 ments of their classes. It is not stiff and mechanical, but 
 normal and flexible. It should cultivate the lively interchange 
 of ideas between teacher and pupils and among the pupils 
 themselves. It should make corrections of mistakes the work 
 of the class, rather than that of the teacher. It should hold 
 theory and practice harnessed together. It should keep gram- 
 mar from being considered a formal affair unfit for pleasant 
 intercourse ; it should make grammar the natural accompani- 
 ment and aid of good expression. Teachers will note that the 
 matter of the Oral Lessons is intended to be merely sugges- 
 tive, and that the grammar is limited to the simple sentence. 
 
 Every effort has been made to secure a book attractive to 
 the eye, a particular in which language books have been far 
 behind readers and geographies. The clear, open page, with 
 its simple typography will, it is believed, win attention with-
 
 viii Preface 
 
 out straining the eyes ; and the illustrations should further the 
 purpose of the book by their fitness to the subject matter, and 
 by their own attractiveness. The authors desire to express 
 their debt to Miss Clements for the charm with which her 
 pictures present children's life to children. 
 
 The authors desire to acknowledge their great indebtedness 
 to the many teachers in both public and private schools from 
 whom they have learned more than they can specify ; and, 
 especially, to Miss Lillian Rogers, of the Horace Mann School^ 
 and Miss Grace Day, of the educational department of the 
 University of Nevada, who have given valuable criticism on 
 the manuscript of this book. 
 
 The authors express their thanks to the following publishers 
 for their courtesy in allowing the use of copyright material : 
 to Frederick Warne and Company for the use of the picture by 
 Kate Greenaway ; to Ginn and Company for the picture from 
 Kern's Among Country Schools; to Little, Brown, and Company 
 for the extract from Louisa May Alcott's Little Women, and 
 for Helen Hunt Jackson's " October's Bright Blue Weather " ; 
 to the Century Company for the extract from Mary Mapes 
 Dodge's The Land of Pluck; to Harper Brothers for the selec- 
 tion from Hamlin Garland's 3fain Travelled Roads; to the 
 Bobbs-Merrill Company for the selection from Armazindy, by 
 James Whitcomb Riley, copyright 1894 ; to Houghton Mifflin 
 Company for E. C. Stedman's " What the Winds Bring," and 
 the selection from John Burroughs' Pcpacton; and to Charles 
 Scribner's Sons for the lines from Sidney Lanier's " Tampa 
 Robins."
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 PART ONE 
 
 LESSON 
 
 1. Oral. Little Teacher. Colored Picture . 
 
 Written. Sentences 
 
 Language. Sentences : Declarative and Interrogative 
 Oral. The Hurdy-Gurdy. Full Page Picture . 
 Written. A Story about the Picture 
 Language. Dictation : Sentences, Capitals, Periods . 
 Oral. Poem : Singing, R. L. Stevenson, Illustrated 
 Written. Copying Verses and Sentences . 
 Language. and I. Making Sentences. Homonyms 
 Oral. A Rainy Day. Pull Page Picture . 
 Written. Sentences about the Picture 
 
 Language. Capitals. Imperative and Exclamatory Sentences 
 Oral. A Fable : The Danger of Talking Too Much 
 Written. Story of the Fable. Titles 
 Language. The Four Kinds of Sentences . 
 Oral. Story : Alice Asleep in the Wagon . 
 Written. Reproducing Story ..... 
 Language. Making Sentences. The Hyphen . 
 Oral. Poem : ^Miat the Witids Bring, E. C. Stedman, Illus- 
 trated ......... 
 
 Written. Writing the Poem 
 
 Language. Writing Names ..... 
 Oral. The Balloon Man. Colored Picture 
 Written. Description of Picture .... 
 Language. Dictation : Names and Abbreviations 
 Oral. A Game. The Picnic. Full Page Picture . 
 
 Written. Story of the Picture 
 
 Language. Correction of Compositions . 
 Oral. Fable : The Frog and the Ox, Dramatized 
 Written. Words, Correct Usage .... 
 Language. On the Use of a Dictionary 
 Oral. Poem : Thanksgiving Bay, Lydia Child, Illustrated 
 
 ix 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 IL 
 12. 
 13. 
 14. 
 15. 
 16, 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 21. 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 27. 
 28. 
 29. 
 30. 
 31. 
 
 PAGE 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 8< 
 
 8 
 
   10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 17 
 18 
 18 
 19 
 19 
 20 
 22 
 22 
 22 
 23 
 24 
 24
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 LESSON 
 
 32. Written. 
 
 33. 
 
 34. 
 
 35. 
 
 36. 
 
 37. 
 
 38. 
 
 89. 
 
 40. 
 
 41. 
 
 42. 
 
 43. 
 
 44. 
 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 
 48. 
 
 49. 
 
 50. 
 
 51. 
 
 52. 
 
 53. 
 
 54. 
 
 55. 
 
 56. 
 
 57. 
 
 58. 
 
 59. 
 
 60. 
 
 61. 
 
 62. 
 
 63. 
 
 64. 
 
 65. 
 
 G6. 
 
 07. 
 
 68. 
 
 69. 
 
 70. 
 
 71. 
 
 72. 
 
 Composition : How I Spent Thanksgiving Day 
 
 Language. Plurals of Nouns 
 
 Oral. A Dialog : Two Dogs, Illustrated . 
 Written. Dialog between Two Dogs .... 
 Language. Paragraphs, Oral or Written . 
 Oral. Fable : Tlie Larks and the Farmer 
 
 Written. A Story 
 
 Language. Paragraphing. Paragraphs in Conversations 
 Oral. A Nickel to Spend. Colored Picture 
 
 Written. Story of the Picture 
 
 Language. 7s and Are 
 
 Oral. An Account of George Washington, Illustrated 
 
 Written. Sentences, Corrected by Class . 
 
 Language. Capitals and Punctuation 
 
 Oral. Poem : The Land of Counterpane, R. L. Stevenson 
 
 Written. Transcription of Poem 
 
 Language. Names of Days and Months . 
 
 Oral. A True Story, Illustrated 
 
 Written. Story of Jocko .... 
 
 Language. Dictation, Abbreviations, Dates 
 
 Oral. A Picture by Kate Greenaway 
 
 Written. Completing Sentences 
 
 Language. Was and Were ; Has and Have 
 
 Oral. The Fire Engine. Full Page Picture .^ 
 
 Written. A Story 
 
 Language. Criticism of Compositions 
 
 Oral. The Circus. Colored Picture . 
 
 Written. A Description .... 
 
 Language. Plurals in -s, -x, -z, -sh, and -ch 
 
 Oral. Drama: Mercury and the Woodmaji 
 
 Written. Dialog 
 
 Language. Plurals in -os and -oes 
 
 Oral. A Talk about Language . 
 
 Written. New Words 
 
 Language. Contractions , 
 
 Oral. Poem : Suppose, Phoebe Gary 
 
 Written. Exercise on Contractions 
 
 Contractions 
 
 Language. Possessives. The Apostrophe 
 Oral. Story : Turning the Grindstone, Benjamin Frankl 
 Written. Story. Corrections by the Class 
 Language. Contractions ...... 
 
 pAaB 
 26 
 27 
 28 
 30 
 30 
 31 
 32 
 32 
 33 
 34 
 34 
 35 
 37 
 37 
 38 
 39 
 39 
 40 
 42 
 42 
 43 
 44 
 44 
 47 
 48 
 48 
 48 
 49 
 49 
 50 
 51 
 51 
 52 
 53 
 53 
 54 
 56 
 56 
 57 
 59 
 59
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 XI 
 
 LESSON 
 
 73. Oral 
 
 A Letter by Tliomas Hood, Illus- 
 
 75. 
 76. 
 -^77. 
 '' 78. 
 79. 
 80. 
 81. 
 82. 
 8.3. 
 84. 
 85. 
 86. 
 87. 
 88. 
 89. 
 90. 
 91. 
 92. 
 93. 
 94. 
 95. 
 96. 
 97. 
 98. 
 99. 
 100. 
 
 etc. 
 
 W. Longfellow 
 
 A Talk on Letters. 
 
 trated 
 
 Written. Writing a Letter ; Heading, Salutation 
 Language. Writing Dates. Salutations . 
 Oral. An Old-Fashioned School, Illnstrated . 
 Written. Letter on a Day at School 
 
 Language. Quotation Marks 
 
 Oral. A Northern Myth : Sips Golden Hair, Emilie K 
 Written. Divided Quotations ..... 
 Language. Quotation Marks ..... 
 Oral. Coasting. Full Page Picture 
 
 Written. A Letter 
 
 Language. Plurals in -ies ; is and are ; ivas and loere 
 Oral. Poem : The Children's Hour, H 
 Written. Choice of Words .... 
 Language. Synonyms and Homonyms . 
 Oral. Pilgrims Going to Church, Illustrated . 
 Written. About the Picture .... 
 Language. Choice of Words .... 
 Oral. The Town in which You Live 
 Written. Dictation : Selection from Little Women 
 Language. Plurals in -ves .... 
 Oral. The Town in Which You Live (Continued) 
 
 Written. A Letter 
 
 Language. Plural Possessives .... 
 Oral. Review of Part One .... 
 Written, lleview. Dictation .... 
 Language. Review : Plurals, Possessives, Correct Usage 
 Review. Capitals and Punctuation 
 
 Baker 
 
 PART TWO 
 
 101. Oral. Sentences. Subject and Predicate 
 
 102. Written. Building Sentences .... 
 
 103. Language. The Complete Subject and Predicate 
 
 104. Oral. A Mute Appeal. Picture Study . 
 106. Written. A Paragraph ..... 
 
 106. Language. Order of Subject and Predicate . 
 
 107. Oral. The Groivth of a Plant, IWustv&ted 
 
 108. Written. Dictation, Plurals .... 
 
 109. Language. Nouns
 
 Xll 
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 LKS80N 
 
 110. Oral. 
 
 ^ "111. 
 
 112. 
 
 113. 
 
 114. 
 
 115. 
 
 116. 
 
 117. 
 
 118. 
 
 119. 
 
 120. 
 
 121. 
 
 122. 
 
 12:j. 
 
 124. 
 ■\125. 
 -«vl26. 
 
 127. 
 
 128. 
 
 129. 
 
 180. 
 
 131. 
 
 132. 
 133. 
 134. 
 135. 
 130. 
 137. 
 1.38. 
 139. 
 140. 
 141. 
 142. 
 143. 
 144. 
 145. 
 -^46. 
 147. 
 148. 
 149. 
 
 A Drill in the Right Way of Saying Things 
 
 Written. A Letter to be Answered. 
 
 Language. Pronouns 
 
 Oral. Poem .• The Barefoot Hoy, J. G. Whittier 
 
 Written. A Composition of Several Paragraphs 
 
 Language. A, an, the. Homonyms. Synonyms 
 
 Oral. Waiting for Mistress. Picture and Dialog 
 
 Written. A Dialog 
 
 Language. Verbs and Verb Groups 
 
 Oral. Story : A PrHty Thief, Illustrated 
 
 Written. Reproduction of Story 
 
 Language. Verbs and Verb Groups 
 
 Oral. The Old Garden. Colored Picture 
 
 Written. A Description .... 
 
 Language. Verbs : Number and Tense . 
 
 Oral. Planning a Letter .... 
 
 Written. Writing a Letter 
 Language. Criticism of the Letter . 
 
 Oral, reading the Letters 
 
 Written. Re-writing the Letter 
 
 Language. Two Troublesome Verbs : See, Do 
 
 Oral. Poem : October's Bright Blue Weather, H. H. Jackson 
 
 Illustrated 
 
 Written. Dictation 
 
 Language. Prefixes and Suffixes 
 Oral. Abraham Lincoln, Illu.strated 
 Written. Composition, with Outline 
 Language. Double Negatives . 
 Oral. A Picture Story, Illustrated . 
 
 Written. A Story 
 
 Language. Review of Nouns, Pronouns, and Verbs 
 
 Oral. The Bird Shop. Colored Picture . 
 
 Written. A Story Suggested by the Picture 
 
 Language. I'unctuation .... 
 
 Oral. Proverbs ..... 
 
 Written. A Story about a Proverb . 
 
 Language. Simple Subject, Simple Predicate, Modifiers 
 
 Oral. Poem : Daffodils, William Wordsworth 
 
 Written. Composition, with Outline 
 
 Language. Analysis of Sentences . 
 
 Oral. Your State 
 
 PAGE 
 
 98 
 99 
 99 
 101 
 102 
 102 
 104 
 104 
 105 
 106 
 109 
 109 
 110 
 110 
 
 111 
 111 
 
 112 
 112 
 113 
 113 
 113 
 
 115 
 
 118 
 
 119 
 
 120 
 
 122 
 
 122 
 
 124 
 
 126 
 
 126 . 
 
 126 
 
 127 
 
 127 
 
 129 
 
 130 
 
 130 
 
 131 
 
 132 
 
 132 
 
 133
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 xni 
 
 LESSON 
 
 150. Written. Composition, with Outline 
 
 Language. Modifiers 
 
 Oral. The States, Illustrated .... 
 Written. Composition of Several Paragraphs . 
 Language. Criticism of Compositions 
 
 Oral. Corn, Illustrated 
 
 Written. Sentence Building .... 
 
 Language. Adjectives 
 
 Oral. Robert E. Lee 
 
 Written. A Generous Action .... 
 
 Language. Sit or Set. Verb Groups 
 
 Oral. Poem: Old Ironsides, O. W. Homes, Illustrated 
 
 151. 
 152. 
 153. 
 154. 
 
 155. 
 156. 
 157. 
 158. 
 159. 
 100. 
 161. 
 162. 
 163. 
 164. 
 165. 
 166. 
 167. 
 168. 
 169. 
 170. 
 171. 
 172. 
 173. 
 174. 
 175. 
 176. 
 177. 
 178. 
 179. 
 180. 
 181. 
 182. 
 183. 
 184. 
 185. 
 186. 
 187. 
 188. 
 189. 
 190. 
 
 Written. Sentence Building .... 
 Language. Lie or Lay ..... 
 Oral. An Unfinished Story. Poem, J. W. Riley 
 Written. Completing the Story 
 Language. Criticism of Compositions 
 (.)ral. Lion Family. A Picture Study 
 Written. An Exercise in .Description 
 Language. Review Exercises .... 
 Oral. Business Letters. Topics 
 Written. Writing a Business Letter 
 Language. Shall, Will. Verb Groups . 
 Oral. Business Letters. Protests . 
 
 Written. Telegrams 
 
 Language. Adverbs 
 
 Clear Enunciation ...... 
 
 Written. Various Topics. Outlines 
 Language. Sentence Building. Adverbs 
 Oral. Wheat, Illustrated .... 
 
 Written. Dictation : A Threshing Scene, Hamlin Garland 
 
 Language. Sentence Analysis 
 
 Oral. A Drama : Tlie Colonists 
 
 Written. A Story, with Quotations 
 
 Language. Common and Proper Nouns . 
 
 Oral. Poem : Robert of Lincoln, W. C. Bryant 
 
 Written. Sentence Building .... 
 
 Language. Number : Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs 
 Oral. Irarns. An Unfinished Story 
 Written. Completing the Story 
 Language. 
 
 Criticism of Compositions
 
 XIV 
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 LEBSOI< 
 
 191. Oral. Enunciation .... 
 
 192. Written. Sentence Building . 
 
 193. Language. Compound Subjects 
 
 194. Oral. Apple Picking. Colored Picture 
 
 195. Written. Topics for Compositions . 
 
 196. Language. The Elements of a Sentence 
 
 197. Oral. Review : Sentences, Subject, Predicate, Parts of Speech 
 
 198. Written. Review : A Telegram and a Letter . 
 
 199. Language. Review. Exercises on Pronouns and Verbs 
 
 200. Review. Capitals and Punctuation .... 
 
 PAGE 
 
 172 
 
 173 
 174 
 175 
 175 
 175 
 176 
 177 
 177 
 178 
 
 Pepacton, 
 
 John Bur 
 
 PART THREE 
 
 201. Oral. Enunciation. Selections 
 
 202. Written. A Vacation Incident 
 
 203. Language. The Parts of Speech 
 
 204. Oral. Aurora. A Picture Study 
 
 205. Written. Compositions, with Outlines 
 200. Language. Nouns. Review . 
 
 207. Oral. Bees, Illustrated . 
 
 208. Written. A Paragraph for Study : from 
 
 roughs ...... 
 
 209. Language. Pronouns : Personal 
 
 210. Oral. A Game with Words 
 
 211. Written. Words Misspelled or Misused 
 
 212. Language. Verbs and Verb Groups 
 
 213. Oral. Greek Stories, Illustrated 
 
 214. Written. Building Sentences . 
 
 215. Language. Adjectives : Comparison 
 
 216. Oral. The Windmills of Holland, M. M. Dodge 
 
 Picture 
 
 217. Written. A Description . 
 
 218. Language. Adverbs 
 
 219. Oral. Heroes of the North. Full Page Picture. Poem: Ode 
 
 to the Brave, Collins . 
 
 220. Written. A Narrative 
 
 221. Language. Phrases and Prepositions 
 
 222. Oral. An Unfinished Story : Hoeing and Fishing, 
 
 223. Written. Building Sentences .... 
 
 224. Language. Conjunctions. Interjections 
 
 225. Oral. Poem : ITie Concord Hymn, Illustrated 
 
 Colored 
 
 Illustrated 
 
 179 
 180 
 181 
 182 
 183 
 184 
 184 
 
 186 
 187 
 188 
 188 
 188 
 189 
 191 
 191 
 
 193 
 
 194 
 194 
 
 195 
 
 198 
 199 
 200 
 202 
 202 
 203
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 XV 
 
 I.E8S0N 
 
 226. Written. The Choice of Words 
 
 Language. The Parts of Speech Reviewed 
 Oral. Stories of Adventure ... 
 Written. A Narrative .... 
 Language. Criticism of Compositions 
 Oral. The Dangerous House Fly, Illustrated , 
 Written. A Business Letter . . . . 
 
 227. 
 228. 
 229. 
 230. 
 23L 
 232. 
 233. 
 234. 
 235. 
 236. 
 237. 
 238. 
 239. 
 240. 
 24L 
 242. 
 243. 
 244. 
 245. 
 246. 
 247. 
 248. 
 249. 
 250. 
 
 Language. Transitive Verbs 
 
 Oral. The Pestilent Mosquito 
 
 Written. Letters of Invitation .... 
 Language. Transitive Verbs and Objects 
 
 Oral. On Explaining Things 
 
 Written. Explanations 
 
 Language. Case ....... 
 
 Oral. A Drama : A Midsummer-Night'' s Dream, Illustrated 
 
 Written. Building Sentences 
 
 Language. The Objective Case (Continued) . 
 
 Oral. In Many Worlds 
 
 Written. A Letter 
 
 Language. The Verb Be 
 
 Language. Objects and Complements. Indirect Object 
 Language. Case ....•■• 
 
 Reviev?. The Parts of Speech 
 
 Revievs'. Sentence Analysis 
 
 Review. Capitals. Abbreviations. Punctuation . 
 
 Books for Boys and (iirls in Grades Four, Five, and Six 
 
 Indicx 
 
 PAliE 
 
 206 
 205 
 206 
 207 
 207 
 208 
 209 
 210 
 211 
 214 
 214 
 215 
 216 
 217 
 218 
 224 
 224 
 226 
 227 
 227 
 229 
 229 
 230 
 231 
 232 
 
 234 
 
 237
 
 
 V-t. RVN 
 
 LITTLE TEACHER
 
 EVERYDAY EJ^GLISII 
 BOOI^ ONE 
 
 PART ONE 
 
 1. ORAL LESSON 
 
 LITTLE TEACHER 
 
 Look at the picture on the opposite page. Why is it 
 called " Little Teacher " ? How many children do you see ? 
 About how old do you think each one is? Are they in 
 school or at home? Tell what each one is doing. Which 
 one is playing teacher? Which is the youngest? What is 
 he doing ? What toys are there in the room ? Which toys 
 are placed as if they were in the play? What is the cat 
 doing ? Is she in the game ? What else do you see in the 
 picture ? 
 
 Let us answer each of these questions again, putting each 
 answer into a good sentence. Let one pupil answer the first 
 question, another the second, and so on. These answers will 
 give the story of the picture. 
 
 Let several pupils tell the whole story. Let other pupils 
 tell how they have played school at home. In telling these 
 stories, stand erect, hold the head up, face the class, and speak 
 distinctly. 
 
 B 1
 
 2 Everyday Eiiglisli 
 
 2. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 This is to be a written exercise about the picture in 
 Lesson 1. 
 
 In writing, always leave a margin of one inch on the left 
 side of the sheet. Write your name in full in the upper 
 right-hand corner, use only one side of the sheet, and write 
 as plainly as you can. 
 
 Let each pupil write a sentence about the picture. Let 
 these be read "aloud. When each is read, decide whether it 
 is a sentence or not. Put a few of the sentences on the 
 board. Then let each pupil write five sentences about the 
 picture. Begin each with a capital. Let some of them be 
 read aloud, and decide whicli are sentences. 
 
 Your written page should look like this : 

 
 Sentences 3 
 
 3. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 A sentence is a group of words making complete sense. 
 
 Some groups of words make only incomplete sense. The 
 following are not sentences : 
 
 1. In the picture 
 
 2. When the dog plays 
 
 3. After a while 
 
 4. Reading to the dog 
 
 When the sense is completed, each one becomes a sentence. 
 
 1. In the picture are a dog and a boy. 
 
 2. When the dog plays he runs and barks. 
 
 3. After a while we'll go and play. 
 
 4. Reading to the dog will not teach him anything. 
 
 Make sentences of the following : 
 
 1. Yesterday morning 
 
 2. When the lesson was over 
 
 3. Words making complete sense 
 
 4. With a capital letter 
 
 5. The dog in the chair 
 
 6. A margin on the left side of the page 
 
 7. About the picture 
 
 8. When will the boy 
 
 9. What kind of book 
 
 10. The book in the boy's hand 
 
 We have been using two kinds of sentences, questions and 
 answers. A question asks something ; an answer tells some- 
 thing. Write the following sentences from dictation : 
 
 A sentence that asks a question is an interrogative sentence. 
 A sentence that tells something is a declarative sentence.
 
 ■iV 5>^^v^^4. Qu 
 
 THE HURDY-GURDY.
 
 Study of a Picture 5 
 
 4. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE HURDY-GURDY 
 
 Make sentences in answering these questions. 
 
 How many children are there in the picture ? How many 
 boys? How many girls? Have they been to school? 
 What time of year is it ? What time of year do hurdy- 
 gurdies come around ? How is the man dressed ? What is 
 his wife doing? What does the monkey wear? What is 
 the monkey doing ? Is his hat for any other use except 
 to wear? What will he do with the pennies? Can the 
 monkey in the picture do any tricks ? What do you suppose 
 they are ? What will he have to eat ? Where do he and 
 his master live ? How mach money do you think they earn 
 in a day ? Have you ever seen monkeys ? Where did you 
 see them ? Were they all alike ? Were they of different 
 sizes ? Tell how they looked. 
 
 If your teacher is willing, make a game of answering these 
 questions. Let one pupil ask a question about the picture 
 and another answer it. Did each use a sentence ? Let 
 other questions be asked and answered in the same way. 
 Are the questions and answers all sentences ? Let several 
 pupils now tell about the picture, speaking distinctly and 
 using good sentences. 
 
 5. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write as much as you can about the picture. Follow the 
 directions in Lesson 2. Some of these compositions are to 
 be read aloud in the class. Which are the most interesting ? 
 Do they make good sense ? Are the sentences correct ? 
 
 Perhaps your teacher will prefer to have another oral 
 lesson about the picture instead of this written lesson.
 
 6 Evervdav Eno-lish 
 
 G. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Dictation hy the teacher: 
 
 Every sentence should begin with a capital. 
 How did you write Every ? With a capital E ? How 
 many put a period after the word capital ? 
 
 Dictation hy the teacher : 
 
 Every sentence that tells something should end with a 
 period. 
 
 Every sentence that asks a question should end with a 
 question mark. 
 
 Did you remember the capitals and the periods ? 
 
 In the following sentences which are declarative ? Which 
 are interrogative ? Put the proper marks at the end of 
 each. 
 
 1. George and May are brother and sister 
 
 2. Mr. Lawrence, their father, is a doctor 
 
 3. How old do you suppose they are 
 
 4. What is your age 
 
 5. You are just the same age as May 
 
 6. AVould you like to know something more about George 
 and May 
 
 7. If you read the book, you will hear about them from time 
 to time 
 
 8. How old is George 
 
 9. He is two years older than May 
 
 10. Where do they live 
 
 11. Perhaps you will find out in another lesson 
 
 12. Can you remember their names and ages 
 
 Turn back to Lesson 1 and tell which of the sentences are 
 declarative and which interrogative.
 
 Study of a Poem 7 
 
 7. ORAL LESSON 
 
 SINGING 
 
 Of speckled eggs the birdie sings, 
 
 And nests among the trees. 
 The sailor sings of ropes and things 
 
 In ships upon the seas. 
 
 The children sing in far Japan, 
 
 The children sing in Spain, 
 The organ with the organ man 
 
 Is singing in the rain. 
 
 — Robert Louis Stevexson. 
 
 Read the poem aloud. Commit it to memory, noticing 
 that it tells first of the birds, second of sailors, third of the 
 children in far countries, and fourth of the organ with the 
 organ man. They are all singing. What does each sing 
 about ? Do you know any other poem by Stevenson ?
 
 8 Everyday English 
 
 8. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Copy the poem in Lesson 7. Are your capitals and periods 
 correct ? Is your writing neat and distinct ? 
 
 Copy the following sentences : 
 
 James and I are going on a picnic. 
 0, I wish you were going with us ! 
 
 There are three words in our language that contain only 
 a single letter. What are they ? Two of them are always 
 written with a capital. What are they ? Write other sen- 
 tences containing" and /. 
 
 'to 
 
 9. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Dictation hy the teacher : 
 
 Every line of a poem should begin with a capital. 
 
 The words and / should always be capitals. 
 
 Make five sentences by telling something about the fol- 
 lowing : farmer, conductor, policeman, organ grinder, sailor. 
 
 Write five interrogative sentences, each containing one 
 of these words : sing, play, beg, climb, dance. 
 
 Some words sound alike, but differ in spelling and meaning : 
 as to, too, tioo, or, ivrite, wright, right. For the following words, 
 write others pronounced the same but spelled differently, 
 no wood our son ate 
 
 meat sent new bough flour 
 
 10. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A RAINY DAY 
 
 Study the picture carefully, until you can make questions 
 or answers. Ask the teacher to divide the class into two
 
 A Rainv Day 
 
 9 
 
 S^yiv«.v \ C\-tTrw*'»^^V~^ 
 
 A KAINV DAY,
 
 1(J Everyday English 
 
 sides. Each pupil on one side must ask a question, each 
 question must be answered by a pupil on the other side. 
 Are the questions and answers good sentences? If any 
 question or answer is not a sentence, it counts a point for 
 the other side. Some of the class may tell the whole story 
 of the picture. 
 
 11. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 In the last lesson you talked about the children in the 
 picture. Can you think of five or six sentences to write 
 about one of the children? Give the child a name; tell 
 what costume he wears, and what he is doing. What else 
 can you tell about him? What you write will make a 
 story. Follow the directions in Lesson 2 as to margin, and 
 be careful to use capitals and periods correctly. 
 
 Some of these stories are to be read in the class. Sen- 
 tences from the stories will be rewritten on the board. 
 
 Look at the names. How are the names written? 
 
 12. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 All words referring to God, as Lord, Our Lord, Jehovah, 
 begin with capitals. 
 
 Names of persons, places, countries, and cities begin with 
 capitals. 
 
 James W. Thompson, Albany, New York, United States. 
 
 The name of the boy dressed as a pirate is Harry Brown, 
 and he lives in Cleveland, Ohio. Imagine a name for each 
 of the children and a city in which they live. Write these 
 names correctly with capitals. Notice how the comma (,) 
 is used in the example above.
 
 Study of a Fable 11 
 
 An imperative sentence makes a command or request. 
 
 Give me the book. 
 Please shut the door. 
 
 An exclamatory sentence expresses surprise or other strong / 
 emotion. An exclamatory sentence ends with an exclamation 
 mark. 
 
 Oh, mother, it is snowing ! 
 What fun we'll have coastina; ! 
 
 A declarative sentence makes a statement. 
 An interrogative sentence asks a question. 
 
 13. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ' THE DANGER OF TALKING TOO MUCH. A FABLE 
 
 There was once a turtle who wished to fly. So he asked some 
 wild geese to teach him. They told him that he could not learn 
 because he had no wings. But they offered to carry him through 
 the air, so that he might see what it was like. 
 
 Taking a stick, they told him to hold firmly to it with his 
 mouth, and on no account to speak a word. Then two of the 
 geese took the ends of the stick in their bills, and rose high in 
 the air, carrying the turtle between them. As they were pass- 
 ing over a village, one of the people saw the strange sight, and 
 cried out, " Well, did you ever see such a thing ? There is a tur- 
 tle flying with two geese. Look ! Look ! " Other people cried 
 out in surprise at the sight, until the turtle could contain himself 
 no longer. 
 
 " Well," he started to say, " why shouldn't I — ," and was 
 presently dashed to pieces on the street below.
 
 12 Everyday English 
 
 Read the story silently. Answer these questions : What 
 did the turtle wish / Why ? VV^hat couiniand did the geese 
 give him? Why? How did they carry him? Who saw 
 them in the air ? What did they say ? What did the turtle 
 attempt to answer ? Why did he not finish what he wanted 
 to say ? Has the fable any meaning for us ? 
 
 Tell the story to the class, remembering to stand erect, 
 face the class, and speak clearly. 
 
 14. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of the turtle. After you have written 
 your name in the upper right-hand corner, write the title of 
 the story on the first line of the page. The principal words 
 of a title should begin with capitals. 
 
 The Turtle Who Talked Too Much 
 
 Begin your story on the second line. Begin your first 
 word one inch to the right of the margin. See Lesson 2. 
 
 Some of the stories are to be read aloud, and the class is to 
 decide whether they are told in a clear and interesting way. 
 One story is to be written on the board. Are the sentences 
 right ? Are capitals used properly ? Correct the sentences 
 and capitals in your own composition. Perhaps your teacher 
 will send some of the best written stories to the second or 
 third grade, to be used for their reading lesson. 
 
 15. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Select from the fable in Lesson 13 the declarative sen- 
 tences and the interrogative sejitences. Are there any ex- 
 clamatory sentences? Any imperative sentences? 
 
 Imagine tliree exclamatory sentences which might liave 
 occurred in the story.
 
 A Story 13 
 
 Imagine three imperative sentences which might have been 
 spoken in the conversation between the geese and the turtle. 
 
 Change the following declarative sentences to interroga- 
 tive sentences. 
 
 The turtle wished to fly. 
 
 He asked the wild geese to teach him. 
 
 It was in the morning. 
 
 He was told not to speak. 
 
 He never finished his remark. 
 
 In writing these sentences, be careful in using capitals and 
 the three punctuation marks (. ? !). 
 
 16. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A STORY 
 
 Alice was four years old ; a chubby, rosy little girl, whose play 
 was of the quiet sort. She could spend hours with her doll and 
 her kitten. Her favorite nook was under the great pine trees 
 down by the pond before the house ; and her greatest pleasure 
 was to ride with her father when he drove into the village. If 
 the day was warm she would curl up under the seat of the wagon, 
 on the clean straw, and would often fall asleep there. 
 
 At dinner one day her father said : 
 
 " I am going to town this afternoon. Alice may go along if 
 
 she likes." 
 
 " And may I bring dollie and the kitten ? " said Alice. 
 
 '' Certainly," said her father. 
 
 A little later, when he drove the wagon up before the door, 
 Alice did not appear. Thinking she had changed her mind, her 
 father drove off to town. 
 
 An hour or two later, her mother began to wonder where Alice 
 was. She went to the door and called; but no one answered.
 
 14 Everyday English 
 
 She looked through the house ; Alice was not there. Neither was 
 she in the pine grove by the pond, nor in the barn, nor in any of 
 the places where she was accustomed to play. No answer came 
 to her mother's repeated calls. Beginning now to be thoroughly 
 alarmed, her mother searched and called again through every part 
 of the house and grounds. But she had no glimpse of Alice's 
 sunny head and blue frock ; she heard no sound of Alice's clear 
 voice. When her father returned, he left the horse and wagon 
 standing by the door and at once joined in the search. At last 
 they began to think they must send for help and drag the pond 
 for her body. 
 
 Just as her father went to the telephone to call in some of the 
 neighbors, Alice came walking in, her dolly in one arm, her 
 kitten in the other. Her hair was tousled, and her eyes were 
 dreamy. Her mother ran to her and seized her in her arms. 
 " Alice, Alice, where have you been, my dear ? " 
 
 "Asleep in the wagon, under the seat," said Alice. 
 
 What kind of child was Alice ? How old ? How did she 
 amuse herself ? What was her favorite place to play ? What 
 did she like to do with her father? Where was she when 
 her father started for the village? Why did he not see 
 her ? Where had she been while they were seeking her ? 
 
 Several pupils may tell the story aloud. Use short sen- 
 tences, and do not use the word and too often. 
 
 17. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of Lesson 16 in your own words. Choose 
 a title as in Lesson 14. Be careful about spelling, capitals, 
 periods, and question marks. Write carefully and plainly. 
 
 In writing or printing it is sometimes necessary to divide 
 a word, putting part of the word at the end of one line and
 
 Making Sentences 15 
 
 part at the beginning of the next line. The hyphen (-) is 
 used to mark the division, and is placed only after a syllable. 
 Many of the Written Lessons in this book may require 
 two or three recitations. The first draft of the story can be 
 made on the first day, and it can be corrected and rewritten 
 on the other days. 
 
 18. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 In the following groups of words, which are sentences 
 and which are not sentences ? Complete those that are not 
 sentences so that they make good sense. 
 
 1. Alice went to town in the wagon. 
 
 2. Under the seat in the straw " 
 
 3. Her kitten and her doll in her arms 
 
 4. Her mother sought her everywhere. 
 
 5. Alice, where have you been ? 
 
 6. In the wagon asleep all this time 
 
 7. Such a sleepy-headed little girl 
 
 8. Why did you get under the seat ? 
 
 9. A very wann day 
 
 10. We were dreadfully frightened. 
 
 11. Alice, Alice, please answer ! 
 
 12. Come, get ready for supper. 
 
 Which of these sentences make statements? Which ask 
 questions? Which make requests or commands? Which 
 express strong emotion? Which of these sentences are de- 
 clarative? interrogative? imperative? exclamatory? 
 
 Write four sentences, each with the name of some person 
 or place in it. 
 
 Where is the hyphen used in Lesson 13? Give the rule 
 for using the hyphen.
 
 16 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 19. ORAL LESSON 
 
 WHAT THE WINDS BRING 
 
 Which is the Wind that brings the cokl ? 
 
 The North-Wind, Freddy, and all the snow ; 
 And the sheep will scamper into the fold 
 
 When the North begins to blow. 
 
 Which is the Wind that brings the heat? 
 
 The Soiith-Wind, Katy ; and corn will grow, 
 And peaches redden for you to eat. 
 
 When the South begins to blow. 
 
 Which is the Wind that brings the rain? 
 
 The East- Wind, Arty ; and farmers know 
 The cows come shivering up the lane. 
 
 When the East begins to blow.
 
 What the Winds Bring; 17 
 
 Which is the Wind that brings the flowers ? 
 
 The West-Wind, Bessy ; and soft and low 
 The birdies sing in the summer hours, 
 
 When the West begins to blow. 
 
 — Edmund Clarence Stedman. 
 
 What is the title of the poem ? Is it a good title ? Why ? 
 Tell what the north wind brings. When does the north 
 wind blow ? What do the sheep do? When does the south 
 wind blow? What does it bring? 
 
 What does the east wind bring? Do men and animals 
 like it? Which wind brings the flowers? Which winds do 
 the birds and animals like best? 
 
 Commit the poem to memory. Notice what each stanza 
 describes. Recite the poem to the class. 
 
 A stanza is a group of lines forming part of a poem. This 
 poem has four stanzas. How are the lines of each stanza 
 connected? What lines rhyme in each stanza? How many 
 stanzas in the poem in Lesson 7? 
 
 Do you know any other poems about the winds? There 
 is one by Christina G. Rossetti, that begins, " Who has seen 
 the wind?", another by Robert Louis Stevenson beginning: 
 " I saw you toss the kites on high." 
 
 20. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the poem from memory. Let several pupils write 
 it on the blackboard. Have they written the poem cor- 
 rectly? Does every line begin with a capital? What 
 periods and question marks are used? What children's 
 names are in the poem? How must they be written? 
 After your poem is correctly written, take it home as a 
 specimen of your best work.
 
 18 Everyday English 
 
 21. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 WRITING NAMES 
 
 Write your own name in full ; the names of your father 
 and mother. 
 
 The name of Mr. John Henry Newman might be written 
 Mr. John H. Newman, or Mr. J. H. Newman. Mr. is an 
 abbreviation for Mister. The first letter of a person's name 
 is called an initial. The initial is always a capital, and, 
 like other abbreviations, is followed by a period. 
 
 The abbreviation Mrs. now stands for the word Mis-ez, 
 which is never written out. The old form of the word was 
 Mistress. Miss is not followed by a period. How are Mrs. 
 and Miss used? 
 
 Write the names of five people you know, using Mr., Mrs., 
 or Miss, and at least one initial in each name. 
 
 Write the names of the two children mentioned in Les- 
 son 6. Write the names of their father and mother. 
 
 22. ORAL LESSON 
 
 What do you see in the picture on the opposite page? 
 What time of year is it? How can you tell? Is it warm 
 or cold? AVhere is the scene? Is it in a city park? Wliat 
 are the children doing? What have they in their hands? 
 How much does a balloon cost? What has the balloon man 
 for sale besides balloons? What has he in his basket? How 
 many persons are there in the picture? How many children? 
 Is the first girl on roller skates going to buy a balloon or 
 a pin wheel? Have you ever skated on roller skates, 
 holding a pin wheel? Have you ever had a toy balloon? 
 What happened to it? Wliy does a balloon float in the air? 
 Have you ever seen fire balloons on the Fourth of July?
 
 
 "W-iTVx -'^**\ « '^ -'* '^^•-^^ ^-'^ 
 
 THE BALLOON MAN
 
 Names and Abbreviations 19 
 
 Have you ever seen a great balloon big enough to carry men 
 as passengers? How are the passengers carried? What is 
 an aeroplane? Pronounce a-e-ro-plane, not a-r-e-o-plane. 
 Have you seen one? What is the difference between a 
 balloon and an aeroplane? What is an aviator? Avis is 
 the Latin word meaning bird. An aviator is a bird-man 
 or a flier. Let one pupil tell everything he can see in the 
 picture. Another may tell what the children will do with 
 their balloons and pin wheels. Another may tell all he can 
 about balloons, great and small. 
 
 23. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Describe what you see in the picture. Tell (1) where 
 the scene is, (2) the time of year, (3) something about the 
 balloon man, and (4) something about the children. Select 
 a title for your description and write it on the first line of 
 your sheet, as in Lesson 14. 
 
 You should now be able to write much more correctly than 
 in the earlier lessons. Be sure to write nothing wrong. 
 When necessary, ask the teacher for lielp in regard to spell- 
 ing, capitals, or punctuation. So far as there is time, read 
 the stories aloud and criticise them for the following points : 
 Is the story well told? Is anything important omitted? 
 Would you change anything in the story? Which stories 
 are told best? 
 
 24. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Write the names of Robert Louis Stevenson, Edmund 
 Clarence Stedman, Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, Jolm 
 Greenleaf Whittier, William Cullen Bryant. Rewrite their 
 names, using initials for the first two names of each.
 
 20 Everyday J'higlish 
 
 These abbreviations are in common use : 
 
 Mr., Mrs., Rev. for Reverend; Dr., for Doctor; St., for Street; 
 Ave., for Avenue ; R.R., for Railroad ; Jr., for Junior. 
 
 What abbreviation is used fur the name of your state ? 
 
 Write the following sentences from dictation : 
 
 Mrs. James H. Brown called this afternoon. 
 
 The Rev. H. R. Colton will preach next Sunday. 
 
 Tell Dr. Foster that Miss Lucy is not feeling well. 
 
 Return these books to Mrs. Greene, 135 Main St. 
 
 The Boston and Maine R.R. has a large station in Boston. 
 
 25. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE PICNIC 
 
 This picture looks as if it had a story. What is the 
 story? Ask your teacher to divide the class into two sides. 
 The first pupil on one side must ask a fair and sensible 
 question about the picture, and the first pupil on the other 
 side must give an answer, and so on, all round the class. 
 If a sill}^ question is asked, it counts one against the side 
 that asks it, but a good question counts one for the side. 
 In the same way a good answer adds one to the score of the 
 other side, and a poor answer subtracts one. The teacher 
 is the umpire. After every one has had a chance for a ques- 
 tion or answer, the score will be counted and you can see 
 wliich side has won. But while you are playing the game, 
 do not forget the story. Have you learned all that you can 
 about it from the picture? The side that has the low score 
 might have another chance. Can any of them tell anything 
 more about the picture? After they have finished, several 
 pupils may tell the story in turn. Each should tell it from 
 beginning to end without hesitating or stammering.
 
 21
 
 22 Everyday English 
 
 26. W MITTEN LESSON 
 
 Think over carefully a story about the picture in Lesson 
 25. Never mind if your idea of the story is different from 
 that told in the class. But be sure that you know your 
 story, — how it is to begin, what is to come in the middle, 
 and how it is to end. What is the title of your story ? 
 How and where should it be written ? Write the storv care- 
 fully. Several of the stories are to be read aloud in the class. 
 Which are the most interesting ? 
 
 In some schools they have a class story book in wliicli the 
 best stories written by pupils are kept to show to visitors. 
 Are any of your stories about the picnic good enough to be 
 fded in such a book? 
 
 27. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 The compositions written in Lesson 26 are to be criticised 
 aloud by the teacher for mistakes in spelling, capitals, punc- 
 tuation, and sentences. Every bad sentence that she reads 
 is to be written correctly by the class. Are these new sen- 
 tences correct ? If not, they must be rewritten correctly on 
 the board. 
 
 28. ORAL LESSON 
 
 FABLE OF THE FROG AND THE OX 
 
 ScKNE : Two frogs, a big and a little one, are sitting on the bank of a pool. 
 An ox is grazing in the meadow near by. 
 
 Tlu' Little Frog. O father, father. I've just seen such a terrible 
 
 creature. 
 The Big Frog. Where, my son ? 
 Little Frog. Over there in the meadow.
 
 The Frog and the Ox 23 
 
 Big Frog, What did it look like ? 
 
 Little Frog. It was red, it stood on four legs, it had big eyes, and 
 two curved sticks standing out on its head. And, 
 oh! it was so big. 
 
 Big Frog. Tut, tut ! how big ? As big as I ? 
 
 Little Frog. 0, bigger, much bigger. 
 
 Big Frog. That cannot be. But I can make myself bigger. 
 {Puffs himself iip.) Was it as big as this ? 
 
 Little Frog. yes, much bigger. 
 
 Big Frog. {Puffing himself up still more.) Pooh ! I don't be- 
 lieve it. Was he as big as this ? 
 
 Little Frog. yes, bigger, bigger ! 
 
 Big Frog. {Puffing himself still more.) As big as this ? 
 
 Little Frog. Yes, yes, very much bigger. 
 
 Big Frog. {Puffs a little more, and then ff.ies into pieces, ivith a 
 noise like a x)op-gun.) 
 
 Little Frog. Oh ! father ! 
 
 This drama is to be read aloud, one pupil taking the part 
 of the Little Frog, another that of the Big Frog. It may 
 be read several times, and the reading criticised for expres- 
 sion and dramatic interest. 
 
 Let the class dramatize the fable, " The Danger of Talking 
 Too Much" (Lesson 13). The parts to be taken by the 
 pupils are: (1) The Turtle; (2) The First Wild Goose; 
 (3) The Second Wild Goose : (4) The People in the Vil- 
 lage. This should be repeated, with different children tak- 
 ing the parts, until the little play is well acted. 
 
 29. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 The teacher will dictate a list of words that have been 
 misspelled or used incorrectly by the class. The pupils will 
 write sentences using and spelling these words correctly.
 
 24 Everyday Englisli 
 
 80. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ON THE USE OF A DICTIONARY 
 
 The dictionaiy is very necessary in learning to use our 
 language correctly. No one knows all the words in our 
 lansfuasre : there are about two hundred thousand of them. 
 So we are all likely to hear or see words we do not under- 
 stand. The dictionary will tell us what they mean. We 
 often see words in print that we cannot pronounce. The 
 dictionary will tell us how to say them. If we are in doubt 
 about the spelling of a word, again we go to the dictionary. 
 
 Exercise : Find out from the dictionary the meaning and 
 pronunciation of the following Avords. Ask your teacher to 
 explain to you, if you do not know, how to find the words, and 
 about the accents and the diacritical marks. Make a point 
 of spelling correctly whenever you write. Don't allow your- 
 self to form any bad habits in spelling. Perhaps your teacher 
 will choose the words that you have misspelled for your les- 
 son in spelling. 
 
 chimpanzee fable zigzag 
 
 hyphen apostrophe dialog 
 
 turret dictionary masquerade 
 
 Use each word in a sentence. . 
 
 81. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THANKSGIVING DAY 
 
 Over the river and through the wood, 
 To grandfather's house we go; 
 
 The horse knows the way 
 
 To carry the sleigh 
 Through the white and drifted snow.
 
 Tlianksp-iviiiM- Day 25 
 
 Over the river and through the wood — 
 Oh, how the wind does blow ! 
 
 It stings the toes 
 
 And bites the nose, 
 As over the ground we go. 
 
 Over the river and through the wood, 
 To have a first-rate play. 
 
 Hear the bells ring, 
 
 " Ting-a-ling-ding I " 
 Hurrah for Thanksgiving Day ! 
 
 Over the river and through the wood 
 Trot fast, my dapple gray ! 
 
 Spring over the ground, 
 
 Like a hunting hound ! 
 For this is Thanksgiving Day. 
 
 Over the river and through the wood, 
 And straight through the barnyard gate. 
 
 We seem to go 
 
 Extremely slow, — 
 It is so hard to wait ! 
 
 Over the river and through the wood — 
 Now grandmother's cap I spy ! 
 Hurrah for the fun ! 
 Is the pudding done ? 
 Hurrah for the pumpkin pie ! 
 
 — Lydia Maria Child. 
 
 Who is supposed to be speaking in the poem ? What day 
 is it? Where are they going? What will they do there? 
 Why does the horse " know the way " ? What is meant by
 
 26 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 "carry the sleigh"? Do they say this in your part of the 
 country ? What is the weatlier like ? How do you know ? 
 What bells are meant in the third stanza? What is a 
 "dapple gray"? Whom do the children see first at grand- 
 father's house ? How will they spend the day ? 
 
 Where was Thanksgiving Day first observed? How did 
 it come to be observed ? At what time of year is it now 
 held; on wliich day of which month? Who appoints the 
 day every year ? 
 
 Read the poem aloud. Read it as if you were yourself in 
 the Thanksgiving party. 
 
 32. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Tell how you spend Thanksgiving Day, and what makes 
 it interesting for you ; with whom you spend it ; where you 
 spend it ; what things you do. Select a title for your com- 
 position. Write the title on the first line of your sheet. 
 The principal words of a title begin with capitals. AVrite 
 carefull}^, and try to make your account interesting. Let 
 some of the class read the compositions aloud. Whose is most 
 interesting? Which shall go into the chiss story book? 
 
 Your teacher may prefer to make this an oral lesson. 

 
 Plural of Nouns 27 
 
 33. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURALS OF NOUNS 
 
 bed 
 
 toy 
 
 hour 
 
 day 
 
 soldier 
 
 beds 
 
 toys 
 
 lio\irs 
 
 days 
 
 soldiers 
 
 Which of these words name single things only ? Which 
 name more than one thing ? What letter do you add to bed 
 so as to make it mean more than one ? Plow do we change 
 names that mean one thing so that they will mean more than 
 one? 
 
 A word that names only a single thing is singular. 
 
 A word that names more than one is plural. 
 
 These name-words are called nouns. 
 
 Singular nouns are made plural by adding s. 
 
 Spell the plurals of the following nouns: 
 
 uniform drill ship house pillow 
 
 plain land horse tree giaut 
 
 Give the plural forms of the singular nouns in the follow 
 ing selection : 
 
 There's tempest in you horned moon 
 
 And lightning in yon cloud. 
 But hark the music, mariners ! 
 
 The wind is piping loud ; 
 The wind is piping loud, my boys, 
 
 The lightning flashes free — 
 While the hollow oak our palace is, 
 
 Our heritage the sea. 
 
 Some plural nouns do not end in s. What are the plurals 
 for man, woman, child, mouse, ox, sheep, foot, tooth ?
 
 28 
 
 K\eryday Eiiulisli 
 
 34. ORAL LESSON 
 
 TWO DOGS 
 
 Scene : A Roadside. 
 Enter two dogs, Bover and Tyke. 
 
 Rover Good morning, Tyke. Where are you going ? 
 TyTvC. Oh, anywhere. I'm running about looking for fun. 
 Rover. Come, let's sit down and talk a bit. 
 Tyke. Very well. How are you getting along ? 
 Rover. Oh, well enough. But life gets a little tiresome, some- 
 times. 
 TyTce. Why, I thought a rich man's dog never could be un- 
 happy. 
 Rover. You'd think differently if you were in my place. This 
 fine collar on my neck is a great bother. It's too 
 heavy, and it often chafes. When I dig a hole for mice 
 or moles, the collar is in the way. When I go for a 
 walk with Master in the park, he fastens a chain to 
 
 it and leads me. It is very 
 tiresome to have to trot along 
 in the walks by his side, 
 when the air is full of in- 
 teresting smells that 1 want 
 to find out about. 
 Tyke. But when I go into the 
 park the boys throw stones at 
 me because there's no one to 
 take care of me. My master 
 is away at work all day ; if he 
 could go with me the boys 
 would not dare molest me.
 
 rn 
 
 Two _DoL>'s 29 
 
 'to 
 
 Mover. I think I shouklivt mind the boys and the stones, if 
 only I could run free. I'd show my teeth and growl, 
 and that would settle the boys. 
 
 Tyke. Yes, and you'd have the policemen after you, or, worse 
 still, the dog-catcher. Did you ever hear what the 
 dog-catcher does with _^^ 
 
 stray dogs that lose / ^ > 
 their tempers ? "] ^-^^ 
 
 Rover. No, what is it ? 
 
 Tyke. Well, they tell me that 
 he takes you to a place 
 where they shut you 
 into a cage with other 
 dogs that nobody owns. Then they put you into a 
 close room and turn on an evil smelling stuff, and 
 you get sleepy and sick, and then you don't know 
 anything more, — and then they bury you. 
 
 Rover. That is awful. 
 
 Tyke. And then we poor dogs are often hungry and cold. 
 Sometimes we have to find our food in ash-barrels and 
 gutters. In cold weather we have no warm nest, like 
 yours, to sleep in. We shiver until, — but what's that 
 smell ? 
 
 Rover. A mole, I do believe ! Come, come. [Exeunt. 
 
 This dialosf is to be read aloud several times with dif- 
 ferent children taking the parts of Rover and Tyke. 
 
 Extend the dialog by adding another conversation be- 
 tween the dogs as they sit down to rest again. Did they 
 catch the mole? Imagine that they talk about their masters 
 and their homes. The class may decide what is to go into 
 the dialog. The dialog should be repeated several times. 
 
 Perhaps the teacher will read to you Burns's "Twa Dogs."
 
 30 Everyday English 
 
 35. writtp:n lesson 
 
 Write a part of the dialog between Rover and Tyke that 
 you made in Lesson 34. Follow the models in Lessons 28 
 and 34. 
 
 36. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PARAGRAPHS 
 
 A group of sentences about a single subject or topic makes 
 a paragraph. If you made a number of sentences describ- 
 ing the picture in Lesson 1, these sentences would form a 
 paragraph. In order to make a good paragraph, the sen- 
 tences must be arranged carefully so that the listener or 
 reader can follow from one to the other. Often the first 
 sentence tells what the paragr<aph is to be about. At the 
 close of Lesson 10, some children were asked to tell the whole 
 story of the picture. This story might make a single oral 
 paragraph. When it was written in Lesson 11, it would 
 make a single written paragraph. If a story is a long one, 
 several paragraphs may be needed ; but if the sentences are 
 about a single subject, they may be put in one paragraph. 
 
 Make oral paragraphs on the following topics, remember- 
 ing (1) that all the sentences must be about one topic, and 
 (2) that they must be carefully arranged in order. Each 
 topic is to be tried by several children, and the paragraphs 
 criticised by the teacher. 
 
 1. The Picture, Little Teacher^ Lesson 1. 
 
 2. The Picture, Children Masquerading^ Lesson 10. 
 
 3. The Poem, What the Winds Bring, Lesson 19. 
 
 4. Tlie Picnic Party, Lesson 25. 
 
 5. How to Use a Dictionary, Lesson 30. 
 
 How is a paragraph indicated in printing, or in writing?
 
 The Larks and the Fanner 31 
 
 37. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE LARKS AND THE FARMER 
 
 Down in Mr. Brown's meadow, near the brook, the lark had 
 found a quiet place for her nest. Out of the speckled eggs had 
 come four downy little larks. The mother was kept busy all 
 day finding worms and insects enough to satisfy their appetites. 
 
 One day, on her return to the nest, the little ones said, " 0, 
 Mother, we must move away at once. Mr. Brown is going to cut 
 the grass in the meadow to-morrow." 
 
 " How do you know ? " said the mother-lark. 
 
 "We heard him ask his son to go to his neighbor, Mr. White, 
 and have him come to help cut the grass to-morrow." 
 
 " In that case," said the mother, " we need not move. There 
 is time enough yet." 
 
 • The next day when she returned to the nest, the little larks 
 cried out eagerly : 
 
 " Mother, Mother, we must move." 
 
 '' Why ? " said she. 
 
 " Because we heard Mr. Brown send his son over to his brother, 
 to ask him to help cut the hay." 
 
 " Then," said the old lark, " we need not hurry." 
 
 On the third day the little larks said to their mother: 
 
 "Don't you think we had better move away ?" 
 
 " What have you heard ? " said she. 
 
 " We heard Mr. Brown say to his son that since his neighbors 
 and his relatives would not help cut the hay, he and his son must 
 begin at once and cut it themselves." 
 
 " Then," said the wise old lark, " it is high time to move." 
 
 Where was the lark's nest ? On whose land ? Wh}^ did 
 the young larks want to move? Whom did Mr. Brown ask 
 to help him ? Why did the old lark sa}^ tliey need not
 
 32 Everyday Eng'lish 
 
 move? When did the old lark decide to move? Why? 
 What does this fable mean ? Can you invent another title 
 for it? 
 
 Let several pupils tell the story aloud, and have the class 
 decide whether anything important has been left out, and 
 who has told the story best. Who used the fewest ands? 
 
 38. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Think the story through carefully. Then write it in your 
 own words. So far as there is time, the stories will be read 
 aloud and criticised for the following points : Is the story 
 well told? Is anything important omitted? Are things 
 told in the right order? Would you change anything in 
 the story? Which stories are told best? 
 
 39. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 A paragraph is a division that gives one part of the story, 
 or one of the speeches made by the characters. 
 
 The first word of a paragraph begins a little to the right 
 of the margin. In writing begin the first word of a para- 
 graph about one inch to the right of the margin. This is 
 called Indention. 
 
 How many paragraphs are there in the story in Lesson 
 13 ? What is each paragraph about ? 
 
 Look up the stories in Lessons 16 and 37 and tell what 
 the paragraphs in them are about. 
 
 Select all the plurals that occur in the story in Lesson 37. 
 What is the singular of each ? Give the plural for every 
 singular noun in the story.
 
 A NICKEL TO SPKND
 
 A Picture with a Story 33 
 
 40. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A NICKEL TO SPEND 
 
 Study carefully the picture on the opposite page, "A 
 Nickel to Spend." What does it represent ? What kind of 
 store is shown? What is in the window? How many 
 different things can you count? What are the children 
 doing? How old are they? Which is the older of the 
 two ? How are they dressed ? Where is the nickel ? 
 
 Let us try to make a story about these children. What 
 are their names ? Are they related ? Brother and sister ? 
 Who has the nickel ? Do they often have money to spend ? 
 Is a nickel a good deal of money for them ? Where do they 
 live ? Have they many toys? What toys would they like ? 
 How did they get the nickel ? Did some one give it to the 
 boy ? Or did he find it ? Do you suppose there are any 
 toys in the shop that cost only a nickel ? What can the 
 boy buy ? What is the little girl looking at ? What does 
 she want to buy ? Can she buy it with a nickel ? Will the 
 nickel buy something for both of them ? If the boy buys 
 what he wants for himself, how will his sister feel ? If he 
 buys what she wants, how will he feel ? If you were the 
 boy, what would you buy ? 
 
 After the picture and the story have been talked over in 
 the class, let each pupil think the whole story over for 
 himself and decide just how he would tell it. In telling 
 the story, be careful about the beginning, and make plain 
 who the children are, how they got the nickel, and what 
 each wishes to huj. Four or five pupils may now tell the 
 story, each in his own way.
 
 34 Everyday Eno;lish 
 
 41. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story which you made about "A Nic'kel to 
 Spend." Some of the stories are to be read in the class. 
 Listen to them carefully and decide which has the best be- 
 ginning. Which is the most real ? Which has the best 
 ending ? This work may occupy two recitations. 
 
 42. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 IS AND ARE 
 
 1. Study the following sentences, and then tell why are 
 is used and why is is used. 
 
 The children are small. The boy is larger than the girl. 
 
 The toys are pretty. Is summer here ? 
 
 There are live pennies. There is only one cent. 
 
 Is is used with singular words. Are is used with plurals. 
 
 2. Of these words, which stand for one only ? Which for 
 more than one ? Which are singular and which plural ? 
 
 nickel we he it somebody nothing 
 
 children they she bushes doors nobody 
 
 3. Eill the blanks with is or are : 
 
 1. The rose — red. - 6. — they ready ? 
 
 2. Her cheeks — red. 7. — we going ? 
 
 3. There — a rose for you. 8. — there nobody else ? 
 
 4. There — no roses. 9. There — nothing more. 
 
 5. — he ready ? 10. — the door shut ? 
 
 11. Mrs. Dickson — not at home. 
 
 12. Mr. and Mrs. Dickson — not at home. 
 
 13. George — May's brother. 
 
 14. George and May — playing hide and seek.
 
 George Wasliiiigton 
 
 35 
 
 43. ORAL LESSON 
 
 George Washington is called the father of his country. When 
 he was a young man, there was no nation of the United States. 
 The people in this country were 
 under the government of Eng- 
 land. After a time they refused 
 to obey the King of England and 
 determined to make a new nation 
 and have their own government. 
 The King of England sent ships 
 and soldiers in order to force the 
 Americans to obey him. The 
 Americans gathered an army to 
 fight for their independence, and 
 chose George Washington as gen- 
 eral. The war was a long one, 
 and many times the Americans Avere discouraged and in great 
 trouble. If it had not been for the courage and ability of Wash- 
 ington, it is doubtful if there ever would have been an American 
 nation. Finally the King of England gave up the fight, the 
 British army sailed away, and the American people were free and 
 independent. 
 
 The army was disbanded. Washington said farewell to his 
 soldiers and officers, and returned to his home, Mount Vernon, in 
 Virginia. Within a few years the country needed him again. 
 He was elected the first president of the new nation, the United 
 States of America. Courage and ability were required to govern 
 wisely in peace as well as in war. Both as general and president, 
 Washington was unselfish, seeking not his own pleasure or gain, 
 but seeking the good of the nation. It was said of him that he 
 was " first in peace, first in war, and first in the hearts of his 
 countrymen."
 
 36 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 What else can you tell about Washington ? Can you tell 
 of anything that happened to him when a boy? When he 
 was a young man ? Do you know anything about the Rev- 
 olutionary War in which he fought ? Can you tell about 
 the surrender of Yorktown? On this page is a picture of 
 Washington crossing the Delaware. Describe it. Do you 
 
 WASHINGTON CROSSING THE DELAWARE. 
 
 know the names of any of the men who fought with him ? 
 How long ago did he live ? Who is president now ? Can 
 you name any other presidents ? Have you read any book 
 about Washington ? Give its title and author. Two of the 
 best books on Washington for young people are Horace 
 Scudder's Life of Washington (Houghton Mifflin Co.), and 
 Norman Hapgood's George Washington (The Macmillan Co.). 
 Explain the meaning of : Nation, Government, Independ- 
 ence, President.
 
 Capitals and Punctuation 37 
 
 44. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write five sentences. In the first, tell where Washington 
 lived. In the second, tell something about him as general. 
 In the third, name some battle in which he fought. In the 
 fourth, tell something about him as president. In the fifth, 
 tell why he is called the father of his country. 
 
 Exchange papers, and correct for mistakes in spelling, 
 capitals, and periods, marking each mistake with a small 
 cross X. Return the papers. Are the corrections right? 
 When there is a mistake, rewrite the sentence correctly. 
 
 45. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 CAPITALS AND PUNCTUATION 
 
 Names of states, towns, and streets begin with capitals. 
 
 Dr. James W. Reynolds lives on West St., in the city of Port- 
 land, Oregon. 
 
 Write sentences in answer to these questions : 
 
 1. Where do you live ? 2. On what street is the schoolhouse ? 
 3. Where does your cousin live ? 4. What city is the capital of 
 your state ? 5. Who is the governor of your state ? 
 
 Write the names (1) of five states ; (2) of five large 
 cities ; (3) of five streets or avenues. 
 
 The preceding exercises are to be corrected by the class. 
 
 Note the punctuation in these sentences. How is the 
 comma used? 
 
 1. George, will you lend me your pencil? 
 
 2. Yes, May, and I will sharpen it for you. 
 
 3. Thank you, George. 
 
 The name of the person spoken to is marked off from the rest 
 of the sentence by commas.
 
 38 Everyday English . 
 
 40. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE LAND OF COUNTERPANE 
 
 When I was sick and lay a-bed,, 
 I had two pillows at my head, 
 And all my toys beside me lay 
 To keep me happy all the day. 
 
 And sometimes for an hour or so 
 I watched my leaden soldiers go, 
 With different uniforms and drills, 
 Among the bedclothes, through the hills. 
 
 And sometimes sent my ships in fleets 
 All up and down among the sheets ; 
 Or brought my trees and houses out, 
 And planted cities all about. 
 
 I was the giant great and still 
 That sits upon the pillow-hill, 
 And sees before him, dale and plain, 
 The pleasant land of counterpane. 
 
 — Robert Louis Stevensox. 
 
 Read the poem carefully. What is the first stanza about? 
 The second tells of the toy soldiers among tlie clothes. 
 What other toys are mentioned in the third stanza? In the 
 fourth stanza the little boy playing with his toys suddenly 
 becomes a giant looking over a great land. Why does he 
 think of himself as a giant? What are the meanings of 
 these -words : uniforms, drills, fleets, dale, counterpane ? Is 
 the title of the poem good ? Commit the poem to memory. 
 
 This poem, like the one in Lesson 7, is from a book of 
 l)oems called A Child's Garden of Verses, by Robert Louis
 
 Abbreviations 39 
 
 Stevenson. These poems tell of many of his games, thoughts, 
 and dreams when he was a boy. He was a famous writer of 
 many books. Even after he was famous, he was still almost 
 as fond of play as a boy, and there were no games he liked 
 better than those played with toy soldiers. He and his 
 young stepson had a great army of lead soldiers with which 
 they made all sorts of drills, battles, and wars. Sometimes 
 one of these war games would last all day. 
 
 Recite this poem, and the poems in Lessons 7 and 19. 
 In speaking verses, remember to stand straight, hold your 
 head up, speak distinctly, and pause between the stanzas. 
 Which of the three poems do you like best ? Why ? 
 
 47. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the poem, "The Land of Counterpane," without 
 looking at your book. When the poems are written, you 
 may exchange papers. Compare the written copy with the 
 printed. Draw a line through each mistake in spelling or 
 capitals, and write the correct word or letter above. 
 
 48. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Name the months of the year and the days of the week in 
 their order. The names of the months and of the days are 
 always written with capitals. Learn to write these abbrevia- 
 tions : Jan., Feb., Mar., Apr., Aug., Sept., Oct., Nov., Dec. 
 
 Thirty days hath September, 
 April, June, and November. 
 All the rest have thirty-one, 
 Except the second month alone ; 
 To which we twenty-eight assign. 
 Till leap-year makes it twenty-nine.
 
 40 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 Write on the blackboard the name and street address of 
 the following : a minister, a physician, a teacher. 
 
 Write the name and addi-esses of the President of the 
 United States ; of the Governor of your state. 
 
 You have learned in Lesson 17 that the hyphen is used be- 
 tween syllables when a word is divided at the end of a line. 
 It is also used between the parts of many compound words, 
 as old-fashioned, thirty-one, leap-year. 
 
 49. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A TRUE STORY 
 
 Jocko was a bright little monkey and a great pet. He had 
 been given to George and May by their uncle, and the children 
 soon became very fond of him. He was so active and so like a 
 child in his ways that they never tired of watching him. How 
 he would grin and chatter ! No one could help laughing to see 
 liim. But Jocko was very mischievous. He would not stay at 
 home, but would climb the fences and run away into the neigh- 
 bors' gardens. He liked especially to get into the henyard and 
 pull the feathers out of the hens. He made so much trouble that 
 finally George's father bought an iron ball and chain and fastened 
 it to Jocko's leg. 
 
 ^
 
 A True Story 41 
 
 Now Jocko could climb no more fences. He could run about 
 the yard, dragging the ball after him ; but Avhen he tried to climb, 
 the iron ball pulled hi in back. How he hated that ball ! He 
 would scold and chatter at it for many minutes at a time. But 
 scolding did no good, and the neighbors' hens were left in peace. 
 
 In the back yard was an old well, which was no longer used. 
 Sometimes the children would pull the wooden cover back and 
 drop stones into the well so as to hear them splash in the Avater. 
 This interested Jocko very much. He would watch the children 
 and listen to the splash. He seemed to want to play the game 
 himself. 
 
 One day the well was left uncovered. There was no one in the 
 yard but Jocko. He ran to the well and peered over the edge. 
 Then he looked at the iron ball that had caused him so much 
 trouble. An idea seemed to come to him, and he talked to him- 
 self in a most excited fashion. Then he seized the iron ball in 
 his front paws, and rolled it to the edge of the well, and gave it 
 another push. 
 
 There was a great splash, and that was the end of poor Jocko. 
 
 Read the story to yourself. Who was Jocko ? To whom 
 did he belong ? What could he do ? What were his faults ? 
 Why did he have to wear an iron ball and chain ? What 
 play of the children was Jocko especially interested in ? Did 
 you ever drop stones in the water to hear them splash? 
 What idea came into Jocko's head? Was it a good idea? 
 Why did he drop the ball into the well? What was the 
 result? Did Jocko know too much for his own good? Or 
 didn't he know enough ? Which is the better, to know some- 
 thing thoroughly or to know it only by halves? Do you 
 remember the fable of the tortoise who talked too much in 
 Lesson 13, and the fable of the larks in Lesson 37? Could 
 you make a fable out of this true story of Jocko? What
 
 42 Everyday English 
 
 would be the lesson or moral of the fable ? There is a line 
 of poetry by Alexander Pope which runs : 
 
 A little knowledge is a dangerous thing. 
 
 Would this do for a moral? Or would you prefer to say, 
 "Don't half learn your lessons." 
 
 Notice that the story has five paragraphs. What is each 
 about ? Tell the story in your own words. 
 
 50. AVUITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write in your own words the story of Jocko. Divide 
 your story into several paragraphs. Remember that the first 
 word of each paragraph is to be indented. Some of these 
 stories are to be read aloud. Which is told the best ? Is it 
 good enough to go into the class story book ? 
 
 51. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Write the abbreviations of the names of the months. 
 Which three are never abbreviated? 
 
 Write from dictation: 
 
 1. Columbus discovered America on Friday, Oct. 12, 1492. 
 
 2. The battle of Bunker Hill was fought June 17, 1775. 
 
 3. The Declaration of Independence was signed July 4, 1776. 
 
 4. AVashington was made first president of the United States 
 Apr. 30, 1789. 
 
 Note that in writing dates, a comma follows the day of the 
 month ; and that a period is used after the abbreviation of 
 the name of the month, as after other abbreviations. 
 
 Copy these sentences; lill the blanks with the proper dates: 
 
 1. To-day is 2. I was born on 3. The Pilgrims 
 
 landed at Plymouth 4. Jamestown was settled
 
 Picture Lesson 
 
 43 
 
 ^i^y.^^ l ^ l -k^-j 
 
 Repmdureil from Kafe Grffnawmfs " Under If le Window.'''' 
 By permission of the publishers, Frederick Warne & Company. 
 
 62. ORAL LESSON 
 
 Kate Greenaway, who drew this picture and wrote these 
 verses, was an English artist. She was born in 1846, and 
 died in 1901. She painted many beautiful pictures, but she 
 loved best to draw children. Her pictures of children are 
 famous ; no one has better expressed in pictures the love of 
 children and the beauty and charm of childhood. 
 
 Observe this picture carefully. What are the children 
 doing? Where are they? What objects do you see in the 
 picture? How many boats? What time of day is it? Do 
 you know any other pictures by Kate Greenaway? 
 
 There are now many attractive pictures and verses made 
 for children. How do you like the pictures in this book? 
 Among the best collections of verse for children are Steven- 
 son's Child's aarden of Verses, Field's With Trumpet and 
 Drum, and Sherman's Little Folks" Lyrics.
 
 44 Evervdav Eno'lisli 
 
 53. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Complete the following sentences by saying something 
 that makes sense. 
 
 1. My town 
 
 2. Good boys and girls 
 
 3. George Washington never 
 
 4. Kate Greenaway 
 
 5. The early bird 
 
 6. When the cat's away, the mice 
 
 7. Jocko pulled 
 
 8. Thanksgiving Day 
 
 9. The balloon man 
 
 10. The public library 
 
 Insert words in the following to make complete sense. 
 
 1. make boots and shoes. 
 
 2. patrol the streets at night. 
 
 3. flows through the city. 
 
 4. is a busy street. 
 
 5. is the largest store in town. 
 
 6. was founded more than a hundred years ago. 
 
 7. sat in a corner. 
 
 9. is used for fuel. 
 
 54. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 WAS AND WERE. HAS AND HAVE 
 
 We have seen that is is used only with singular nouns, and 
 are is used only with plural nouns. (See Lesson 42.) 
 
 Was is used only with singular nouns ; were is used only 
 with plural nouns.
 
 Was and Were. Has and Have 45 
 
 Insert the proper word (was or were) in the following sen- 
 tences : 
 
 1. The apples good. 4. we to blame ? 
 
 2. John . late. 5. The winter cold. 
 
 3. I ready. 6. John and I there. 
 
 7. there many mistakes in my paper ? 
 
 8. There a great noise in the street. 
 
 9. Jocko to blame ? 
 
 10. Roger and Tyke after the mole ? 
 
 11. the big frog as big as the ox ? 
 
 12. the pudding and pie good ? 
 
 Were is always used Math you, whether you means one or 
 more than one person. Was should never be used with you. 
 
 You were alone. You were the best player. Were you the 
 last in the room ? Were you not at home ? 
 
 Always say, you were. 
 
 Has is used with singular nouns, and have with plural 
 
 nouns. 
 
 1. He time enough. 
 
 2. They no mercy. 
 
 3. The Governor a difficult position. 
 
 4. Many rivers a slow current. 
 
 5. The mountain snow on its top. 
 
 6. The cat a soft step. 
 
 7. the children learned their lessons ? 
 
 8. Where the dog taken the bone ? 
 
 Have is always used with I and you. 
 
 I have no time. You have the prize. Have I forgotten any- 
 thing ? Have 3' ou put your hat away ? 
 
 Always say, I have, you have. 
 
 Make sentences using / Aave, you have, you were.
 
 4(j
 
 The Fire Encrine 47 
 
 55. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE FIRE ENGINE 
 
 The picture shows a scene very common in the city. The 
 whistle blows sharply, and every one knows the signal for a lire. 
 In a moment there is the sound of the engine in the distance. 
 The chief of the fire department dashes by in his buggy or auto- 
 mobile. The street is quickly cleared. Carriages and wagons 
 draw up along the curb or turn into the side streets. The bells 
 of the fire engine grow louder and nearer. People rush out from 
 the shop, and passers-by stop. Every one is looking for the 
 engine. There it comes.' The three great horses are at full gal- 
 lop. The driver is shouting at them and flourishing his whip. 
 The fire is burning in the engine, the sparks are flying, and the 
 smoke is beginning to pour forth. What a splendid picture it 
 makes ! In a moment the engine has passed, and in a moment 
 more it will be at the fire. 
 
 It is not a great many years since all fire engines were worked 
 by hand. Men dragged them to the fire and pumped them by 
 hand. Now the horses do the pulling and the steam engine does 
 the pumping. Already automobiles are being used, and soon 
 there will be no more fire horses. We shall miss the sight of 
 the galloping animals struggling with all their might to aid in 
 saving life and property. Perhaps, when you are grown up, your 
 children will never have seen any fire horses, and will ask you 
 for the story of these old heroes. 
 
 Does the picture suggest a story to you? Where is the 
 fire ? What will the firemen do when they get to the fire ? 
 What is the hose for? What are the ladders for? Is any 
 one in danger? Imagine the burning house. What are the 
 firemen doing with the ladders? Imagine the story of the 
 fire as seen by Dick, the old white fire horse.
 
 48 Everyday English 
 
 50. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a short story of a fire, suggested by the picture in 
 Lesson 55 and the talk in the class. Think over carefully 
 your story, and before writing decide how you are to begin 
 and how you are to end it. 
 
 57. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 The stories written in Lesson 56 are to be read in the 
 class and criticised for (1) capitals, (2) punctuation, (3) 
 spelling, (4) plurals, and (5) sentences. 
 
 Bad sentences are to be read aloud, and the corrected sen- 
 tences written on the board. 
 
 All the words misspelled are to be written correctly on the 
 board, and will form a spelling lesson for the class. 
 
 58. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE CIRCUS 
 
 How many things there are in tliis picture ! It is like a 
 real circus ; there are so many things to see, you hardly 
 know which to look at first. There is no doubt what the 
 children in the picture are looking at. Even the littlest 
 boy will have something to tell his mother about that merry 
 clown. In another moment the clown will be off somewhere 
 else. What will the children look at next? At the big 
 elephant? Doesn't he look intelligent? Do you think he 
 is enjoying the show ? How many elephants can you see ? 
 Where do elephants come from ? Look at the girl standing 
 on the prancing horse ! Round tlie ring she goes. Now 
 she is opposite the children. Will she throw them a kiss ?
 
 THE CIKCUS
 
 Plurals of Nouns 49 
 
 Crack, crack, goes the ringmaster's whip. Where is the 
 ringmaster? How is he dressed? What does he do? Do 
 you see the clown on the edge of the ring? What is he 
 holding in his hands? What will he do with it? How 
 many horses are there in the picture? Can you see any 
 other animals besides the elephant and the horses? What 
 other performers are there besides those mentioned? How 
 many clowns are there in the picture? Do you think it is 
 much fun to be a clown? Which would you rather be, a 
 clown, a ringmaster, a bareback rider, a trapeze performer, 
 or one of the children who is going to a circus for the first 
 time? After you have studied this picture carefully, imagine 
 that you are one of the children, and see how much you 
 could tell 3^our mother when you came home from the circus. 
 Perhaps there will be time to tell several of these stories. 
 
 Tohy Tyler, by James Otis, is a story about a boy who lives 
 with a circus. It is a capital book for boys and girls. 
 
 59. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Describe the scene in the picture as fully as you can. 
 Read some of the accounts. Which are most interesting? 
 
 60. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURALS OF NOUNS 
 
 We have seen that most nouns form their plural by adding 
 8 to the singular. When the singular ends in -8, -x, -ch, 
 (except when pronounced like ^), or -s/i, it is necessary to 
 add -es to form the plural, if the plural is to be pronounced 
 differently from the singular. Note the following list. 
 
 box boxes lass lasses 
 
 moss mosses coach coaches
 
 50 Everyday English 
 
 tax taxes bush bushes 
 
 church churches gas gases 
 
 marsh marshes brush brushes 
 
 wish wishes topaz topazes 
 
 Make sentences using the singuhir or plural of each of 
 these nouns with is or are, was or were, has or have ; as in 
 the following examples. 
 The box is too large to carry. The boxes are too large to carry. 
 
 Nouns ending in -s, -x, -z, -sh, or soft -ch are made plural by 
 adding -es. 
 
 61. ORAL LESSON 
 
 MERCURY AND THE WOODMAN 
 
 Mercury, one of the Roman gods, once saw a poor woodman 
 weeping by a pool. Upon inquiry, he found that the man had 
 lost his axe in the pool. The god then made a golden axe rise to 
 the surface, and asked the man if it were his. The man said it 
 was not. Mercury then brought up a silver axe, which the poor 
 man again would not claim. Then the god brought up the man's 
 own axe, and sent him away happy with all three axes, as a re- 
 ward for his honesty. 
 
 Hearing of this good fortune, another man went to the pool, 
 threw his axe in, and sat down weeping. Mercury came, and, 
 hearing his story, brought a golden axe to the surface. The man 
 at once said that the axe was his. Whereupon Mercury threw it 
 into the pool, and angrily drove the man away. 
 
 Could this story be told in dialog ? What is the scene ? 
 What characters and what action, if any, would need to be 
 indicated in stage directions ? What would Mercury say to 
 the first man ? What would he reply ? Discuss the story 
 in this way, until you can act it.
 
 Plurals of Nouns 51 
 
 62. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write in dialog form the conversation that you talked 
 over in the last lesson. Begin with a title, and put in stage 
 directions as in Lessons 28 and 34. Give each person a 
 proper part in the dialog. 
 
 63. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURALS. Continued 
 
 Most nouns ending in -o form their plurals by adding -s. 
 A few add -es. Learn the following singulars and plurals. 
 
 hero heroes potato potatoes 
 
 echo echoes tomato tomatoes 
 
 buffalo buffaloes piano pianos 
 
 motto mottoes zero zeros 
 
 negro negroes solo solos 
 
 In the following sentences, insert is or are in the blanks. 
 
 1. We what we wish to be. 
 
 2. The robin the first bird of spring. 
 
 3. The cows in the corn. 
 
 4. Men and women only grown-up children. 
 
 In the following sentences insert either was or were. 
 
 1. Little Boy Blue sorry to find the cows in the corn. 
 
 2. The robins in the orchard, and the cat in the 
 
 garden. 
 
 In the following sentences insert has or have. 
 
 1. I a bat and a ball. 
 
 2. John a pocket full of marbles. 
 
 3. Horses thick coats of hair in winter. 
 
 4. The cat large gi*een eyes.
 
 52 Everyday English 
 
 In the following sentences, change all the singular nouns 
 to plurals. Change the verbs t8, was, has, to plurals, when 
 necessary. 
 
 1. The woman playing the piano has a topaz. 
 
 2. There is a mouse in the box. 
 
 3. The echo in the church wasn't bad. 
 
 4. Will you have a potato or a tomato ? 
 
 5. There is a song about the hero. 
 
 6. Isn't there a bush in the marsh? 
 
 7. Has the child sung a solo ? 
 
 8. The negro has an ox, a buffalo, and a sheep. 
 
 9. Here is a brush for your tooth, and a shoe for your foot. 
 10. The lass has her wish. 
 
 64. ORAL LESSON 
 
 What is language? Is it used in talking? In writing? 
 For which was it used first, talking or writing ? Do dogs, 
 or horses, or other animals have language? What is the 
 English language ? Did you ever hear of any other lan- 
 guages? What are they? What could men and women do 
 without language ? Can you think of any invention as use- 
 ful as language? Did you ever watch a baby learning to 
 talk ? What are some of the first words that he learns ? 
 How does he learn them ? How does he get along with a 
 very few words? How many words do you suppose you 
 know ? How many new words do you suppose you learn in 
 a week ? What was the first sentence that the baby made ? 
 What kind of sentences does he use at fiist? As he gets 
 older, does he use more sentences? 
 
 Do you do more talking or writing? Do you use sen- 
 tences in talking? In this talk what declarative sentences 
 have you used? What interrogative sentences? Are you
 
 Contractions 53 
 
 careful in talking to use plurals correctly? Do you notice 
 any difference in the talk of various persons whom you 
 know? Do some talk more correctly than others? What 
 are the differences that make their language more correct? 
 Are there any differences in words ? In the use of the words 
 is, are, be, was, were, has, have f What are some of the differ- 
 ences between spoken and written language ? What words 
 are shortened or contracted in talking? Are the contrac- 
 tions, isrCt, hasnt, haven't, wasn't, Fll, we're, more common in 
 talking or writing? Can you think of other contractions? 
 
 In the talk that you hear and in the books that you read, 
 watch for new words. Find out exactly what they mean. 
 
 65. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Each pupil is to give the class two new words that he has 
 found, with their meaning. Write all these words carefully, 
 numbering them. If you cannot spell a word, ask the 
 teacher. How many pupils are there in the class ? How 
 many words did they find? How many are new to you? 
 Can you tell the meaning of every one ? 
 
 66. LANGUAGE LESSONS 
 
 CONTRACTIONS 
 
 When we write we usually say: 
 
 Pred is not at school. We are not tired. She has not gone. 
 
 When we talk we often say: 
 
 Fred isn't at school. We aren't tired. She hasn't gone. 
 
 In talking we contract certain words : is not becomes isnt, 
 are not becomes arent, has not becomes hasn't. What letter 
 is omitted in each case? What is put in its place?
 
 54 Everyday English 
 
 Not is often contracted into rit and joined with the pre- 
 ceding word. The apostrophe (') shows that a letter has 
 been left out. 
 
 Write the contractions of the following. Use each con- 
 traction in an interrogative or a declarative sentence. 
 
 is not does not had not 
 
 was not do not have not 
 
 has not did not should not 
 
 Write the contractions for the following expressions : 
 
 He is, She is, I am, We are. You are, They are. 
 
 What is the difference between an abbreviation and a con- 
 traction? Which is used chiefly in talking? Which is used 
 chiefly in writing? Which contains an apostrophe? Which 
 is followed by a period? 
 
 Never say ain't. 
 
 67. ORAL LESSON 
 
 SUPPOSE 
 
 Suppose, my little lady, 
 
 Your doll should break her head, 
 Could you make it whole by crying 
 
 Till your eyes and nose are red? 
 And wouldn't it be pleasanter 
 
 To treat it as a joke. 
 And say you're glad 'twas Dolly's, 
 
 And not your head that broke? 
 
 Suppose you're dressed for walking 
 And the rain conies pouriug down, 
 
 Will it clear off any sooner 
 Because you scold and frown?
 
 Suppose 55 
 
 And wouldn't it be nicer 
 
 For you to smile than pout, 
 And so make sunshine in the house 
 
 When there is none without ? 
 
 Suppose your task, my little man, 
 
 Is very hard to get, 
 Will it make it any easier 
 
 For you to sit and fret ? 
 And wouldn't it be wiser 
 
 Than waiting like a dunce, 
 To go to work in earnest 
 
 And learn the thing at once ? 
 
 Suppose that some boys have a horse, 
 
 And some a coach and pair, 
 Will it tire you less while walking 
 
 To say, " It isn't fair " ? 
 And wouldn't it be nobler 
 
 To keep your temper sweet. 
 And in your heart be thankful 
 
 You can walk upon your feet ? 
 
 And suppose the world don't please you, 
 
 Nor the way some people do. 
 Do you think the whole creation 
 
 Will be altered just for you? 
 And isn't it, my boy or girl. 
 
 The wisest, bravest plan, 
 Whatever comes, or doesn't come, 
 
 To do the best you can ? 
 
 — Phcebe Gary.
 
 56 Everyday Eiio-lish 
 
 Read the poem silently. How many stanzas are there in 
 this poem? Which lines rhyme in each stanza? How many 
 sentences are there in each stanza? How many sentences are 
 there in the poem? How many lines in each sentence? What 
 kind of sentence is each? How many of the sentences are 
 interrogative ? How many questions are there in the poem ? 
 What is the first stanza about? To whom is it addressed? 
 To whom is the second stanza addressed? What is it about? 
 To whom are the third and fourth stanz.ls addressed? What 
 is each about? To whom is the fifth stanza addressed? 
 What troubles are mentioned in each stanza? Are they 
 serious? What lesson does the poem teach? 
 
 What contractions are used in the poem? What are the 
 full words that each contraction stands for? What do the 
 following words mean : froivn^ pout^fret^ dunce, creation^ 
 
 Read the poem aloud : imagine, as you read, that you are 
 giving this advice to some other child. Remember in read- 
 ing that all the sentences are questions. 
 
 Commit to memory the hist stanza. 
 
 68. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write in a column on the left of the sheet all the contrac- 
 tions in the poem in Lesson 67. Opposite each contraction, 
 write the word it stands for. 
 
 69. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 POSSESSIVES 
 
 Tlie girl's doll was broken. 
 The boy's [wny ran away. 
 
 In these sentences, whose doll was it ? Whose pony ran 
 away? In answering these questions you use the word ^iV^
 
 Possessives 57 
 
 and hoy^ but you add an apostrophe (') and an s to indicate 
 possession. Such words as girVs and hoy 8 are said to be 
 possessive because the}^ show ownership or possession. To 
 make a possessive with a singular noun we add an apostrophe 
 and an s. For example : father, father's hat ; boy, boy's 
 lesson; George, George's mistake; doll, doll's head; Mr. J. 
 K. Smith, Mr. J. K. Smith's house. 
 
 Make the following nouns into possessives : lady, dolly, 
 people, George Washington, teacher, neighbor. Make five 
 sentences, eacli containing one of these possessives. 
 
 Dictation : 
 
 The apostrophe is used (1) to show the omission of a let- 
 ter in contractions, (2) before s in possessives. 
 
 70. ORAL LESSON 
 
 TURNING THE GRINDSTONE 
 
 When I was a little boy, I remember, one cold winter's morn- 
 ing, I was accosted by a smiling man with an axe on his shoulder. 
 
 "My pretty boy," said he, "has your father a grindstone?" 
 
 " Yes, sir," said I. 
 
 " You are a fine little fellow," said he ; " will you let me grind 
 my axe on it?" 
 
 Pleased with the compliment of " fine little fellow," " Oh, yes, 
 sir," I answered. " It is down in the shop." 
 
 " And will you, my man," said he, patting me on the head, 
 " get me a little hot water ? " 
 
 How could I refuse ? I ran and soon brought a kettlef ul. 
 
 " How old are you ? and what's your name ?" continued he, with- 
 out waiting for a reply ; " I am sure you are one of the finest lads 
 that ever I have seen; will you just turn a few minutes for me?" 
 
 Tickled with the flattery, like a little fool, I went to work, and
 
 58 Everyday Kiiglish 
 
 bitterly did I rue the day. It was a new axe, and I toiled and 
 tugged till I was almost tired to death. The school-bell rang, and 
 I could not get away ; my hands were blistered, and the axe was 
 not half ground. At length, however, it was sharpened; and the 
 man turned to me with : 
 
 " Now, you little rascal, you've played truant ; scud to school, 
 or you'll rue it ! " 
 
 "Alas!" thought I, "it was hard enough to turn a grindstone 
 this cold day, but now to be called a rascal is too much." 
 
 This experience I have never forgotten. 
 
 — Benjamin Franklin. 
 
 This is a true story written by Benjamin Franklin about 
 himself. Franklin was a poor boy who came to be a great 
 and famous man by hard work and hard study. Have you 
 ever heard any other stories of his boyhood ? Do you know 
 in what city he was born ? In what city did he live for the 
 greater part of his life ? He lived at the same time as did 
 Washinirton, and both men did much to make tlie United 
 States an independent nation. It was through Franklin that 
 France came to the aid of the United States in the Revolu- 
 tionary War against England. Franklin was a scientist as 
 well as a statesman, and discovered that lightning and elec- 
 tricity are the same thing. He was also a very sensible and 
 wise man, and his writings are full of good sense and wisdom. 
 Some of his best writing is in his Aiifobio(/raph?/, or story of 
 his own life, from which this story of the grindstone is taken. 
 
 How many paragraphs are there in the story ? Give the 
 reason for making each new paragraph. What lesson does 
 the story teach ? What is the meaning of the expression 
 " That man has an axe to grind " ? What is the meaning of 
 accosted., compliment, flattery, rue, truant, experience? 
 
 Tell the story aloud in your own words. Remember that 
 in Franklin's story not a single sentence begins with an and.
 
 / Contractions 59 
 
 71. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of Lesson 70 in your own words. 
 
 Exchange papers and mark with a cross all mistakes : 
 
 (1) hi spelling, (2) in capitals, (3) in punctuation, (4) in 
 plurals, (5) in contractions, (6) in possessives. 
 
 Return the papers. How many mistakes did you have ? 
 Correct the mistakes on your paper. 
 
 72. LANGUAGE LESSONS 
 
 What are the contractions for I am, I have, I will, are not, 
 is not, it is, you are, you have, you will, we will? 
 
 Answer the following questions by filling the blanks with 
 suitable contractions : 
 
 1. Is it there ? No, not there. 
 
 2. Are we ready ? No, not ready yet. 
 
 3. Is he brave ? Yes, brave. 
 
 4. Will you go ? Yes, go. 
 
 5. Have you any candy ? No, I . 
 
 6. Has she any ? No, she any. 
 
 7. Have I time ? Yes, time. 
 
 8. Are you going? No, not going. 
 
 9. Where is it ? here. 
 
 10. Shall I go? No, go. 
 
 In the replies, note that there is a comma after " Yes " 
 and "No." Write out your answers. 
 
 Examine the' contractions and possessives in these sen- 
 tences : 
 
 " It's raining," said May, with a frown. " It's too bad ! " 
 "Every cloud has its silver lining," said Grandma. 
 May's frown changed to a look of surprise.
 
 (30 Everyday English 
 
 "These clouds haven't," she said. "There isn't any silver. 
 It's just gray and wet." 
 
 Grandma's eyes twinkled. "I've a new box of crayons that 
 would be nice for a little girl to play with on a rainy day." 
 
 " Oh, that's splendid ! " cried May. " Oh, what fun ! Grandma, 
 you're a darling." 
 
 " There aren't any clouds on your face now," said Grandma. 
 "It's shining like silver." 
 
 May thought for a minute. Then she said, " I'm sure I know 
 now what you meant. You meant that things aren't as bad as 
 they look. You can always find something to be glad about." 
 
 " Yes," replied Grandma, " there's always sunshine somewhere. 
 Every cloud has its silver lining." 
 
 Its is the possessive of it. It's is the contraction for it is. 
 Sometimes 'tis is used for the contraction for it is. 
 
 Make a list of all the contractions you can remember. 
 
 73. ORAL LESSON 
 
 The postman perhaps comes to your door every day, or 
 even several times a day. He carries a large bag full of 
 letters, papers, and parcels that he delivers to people on his 
 route. Thousands of other postmen all over the country 
 are doing tlie same thing. Have you ever thought how 
 many postmen and post offices there are, or how many letters 
 are handled every day? Tliere must be millions of them. 
 How do you suppose this great business is managed? 
 
 Who can be writing all these letters? .And what can 
 they all find to write about? Have you ever received any 
 letters? What about? Have you written letters? To 
 whom? What about? Why do we write letters? If you 
 were away on a visit, would you like to get a letter from 
 home? When you answered, what would you write?
 
 A Letter from a Humorist 61 
 
 The following letter was written by the famous English 
 humorist, Thomas Hood, to a little girl, the daughter of his 
 friend, Dr. Elliot. The letter is so full of jokes and non- 
 sense that you would never suspect that Thomas Hood was 
 sick and suffering at the time he wrote it. Read it over 
 carefully and make sure that you see all the jokes. 
 
 Devonshire Lodge, New Finchley Road, 
 July 1, 1844. 
 My dear May : 
 
 How do you do, and how do you like the sea ? Not much, per- 
 haps, it's " so big." But shouldn't you like a nice little ocean, 
 that you could put in a pan? Yet the sea, although it looks 
 rather ugly at first, is very useful, and if I were near it this dry 
 summer, I would carry it all home, to water the garden with at 
 Stratford. 
 
 I remember that, when I saw the sea, it used sometimes to be 
 very fussy, and fidgety, and did not always wash itself quite 
 clean ; but it was very fond of fun. Have the waves ever run 
 after you yet, and turned your little two shoes into pumps, full of 
 water ? 
 
 There are no flowers, I suppose, on the beach, or I would ask 
 you to bring me a bouquet, as you used at Stratford. But there 
 are little crabs ! If you would catch one for me, and teach it to 
 dance the polka, it would make me quite happy ; for I have not 
 had any toys or playthings for a long time. Did you ever try, 
 like a little crab, to run two ways at once ? See if you can do it, 
 for it is good fun ; never mind tumbling over yourself a little 
 first. It would be a good plan to hire a little crab, for an hour a 
 day, to teach baby to crawl, if he can't walk, and if I was his 
 mamma, I would too ! Bless him ! But I must not write on him 
 any more — he is so soft, and I have nothing but steel pens. 
 
 And now good-by. Fanny has made my tea, and I must drink it
 
 Q2 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 Ijefore it gets too Iiot, as we all were last Sunday week. They 
 say the glass was 88 in the shade, which is a great age ! The last 
 fair breeze I blew dozens of kisses for you, but the wind changed, 
 
 and I am afraid took them to Miss IT or somebody that it 
 
 shouldn't. Give my love to everybody and my compliments to 
 all the rest, and remember, I am, my dear Ma}', 
 
 Your loving friend, 
 
 Thomas Hood. 
 
 P.S. Don't forget my little crab to dance the polka, and pray 
 write to me as soon as you can, if it's only a line. 
 
 How do you know that May is by the sea? Why does 
 Hood call the sea fussy? What is the joke about turning 
 the " little two shoes " into pumps ? Why does he speak of 
 teaching a crab to dance ? How does a crab move ? What 
 is the joke about " not writing on him " because he is too 
 soft ? What was the glass that was 88 in the shade?
 
 A Holiday Letter 63 
 
 74. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A LETTER 
 
 34 Pine St., Richmond, Va., 
 Dec, 31, 1910. 
 
 Dear George : 
 
 Aunt Emma has gone out to buy some things for our Xew 
 Year's party to-morrow. She said that I might write a letter to 
 you while she was out. 
 
 I am enjoying my visit very much. Our cousins are very kind 
 and thoughtful. They have had some interesting plan for every 
 one of the five days I have been here. Yesterday we had a long 
 drive out into the country. To-morrow we are to have a mas- 
 querade party. Guess what I am going to be. I'll tell you when 
 I get home next week. 
 
 I must close now. The girls are calling me. Give my love to 
 
 Mother and Father. 
 
 Your affectionate sister, 
 
 May. 
 
 Copy the letter. "34 Pine St., Richmond, Va., Dec. 31, 
 1910" is called the heading. Note where it is placed. 
 " Dear George " is the salutation. Note wdiere it is placed. 
 
 Copy the following headings, putting each in the proper 
 place on the page: 
 
 Bloomington, Ind., Jan. 3, 1900. 
 
 Hopedale, Mass., May 1, 1905. 
 
 76 South St., Austin, Tex., Nov. 25, 1906. 
 
 Copy the following salutations, putting each in the proper 
 place on the page : 
 
 Dear May, Dear Mr. Wilson, 
 
 Dear Mother, My dear Miss Brown,
 
 64 Everyday Englisli 
 
 75. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 The salutations in letters are, as you see, not always the 
 same. We use Mr. and Mrs. or Miss when writing to stran- 
 gers, or to people whom we do not know very well, just as 
 we do when speaking to them. We address our nearest 
 friends and the members of our family without using Mr. 
 and Mrs. A letter to your father would begin. Dear Father, 
 but a letter to an acquaintance, Mr. Wilson, would begin. 
 Dear 3Ir. Wilson : or My dear Mr. Wilson : — These saluta- 
 tions are written on the left side of the page, a little lower 
 than the date. A salutation is followed by a comma (,) or 
 by a colon (:) or by a colon and dash (: — ). 
 
 Write the proper dates and salutations for letters. 
 
 1. To your sister Alice, from New York, on Christmas Day of 
 next year. 
 
 2. To your teacher, from your home, on next Saturday. 
 
 3. To a friend, ]Mr. James Pryor, from Washington, to-day. 
 
 4. To the postmaster of your town, from San Francisco, one 
 month from the present date. 
 
 5. To Santa Claus, from your home, a Aveek before Christmas. 
 
 76. ORAL LESSON 
 
 AN OLD-FASHIONED SCHOOL 
 
 " Tell us, grandfather," said May, " what your school was like, 
 and what you did there." 
 
 On this subject the old gentleman needed no coaxing. 
 
 "Ah, those were interesting times," he began. "The school- 
 house stood over in the valley, about a mile from our house. 
 It was a pleasant walk in fine weather. But in the winter, when 
 the wind blew cold and the snow was deep, that mile seemed as
 
 , An Old-Fashioned School 65 
 
 long as four. My father often took us back and forth in his 
 sleigh, and that was fine fun. 
 
 " I remember our coasting, and our sliding on the pond near the 
 schoolhouse. When the bell rang at the end of the noon recess, 
 we ran in and warmed ourselves around the great stove ; and then, 
 at a word from the master, we went to our desks and our books. 
 
 " But we liked the spring and autumn months best. We had 
 many games that you city children seldom play : prisoner's 
 base, hare-and-hounds, pussy-wants-a-corner, and other old games 
 that were brought over from England by our forefathers' children. 
 We had long rambles through the woods and fields, and we 
 learned many interesting things about the birds, the squirrels, 
 the rabbits, and other shy creatures." 
 
 " What was the schoolhouse like ? " said George. 
 
 " Not a bit like your fine, big school, my boy," said his grand- 
 father. " It was not more than thirty feet long, I should think. 
 It was very plain and simple, that old school. As you entered it, 
 you saw along each side a row of desks and benches. At the far- 
 ther end on a low platform were the teacher's desk and chair. In 
 the middle of the room stood the great round stove, and at the 
 rear, on either side of the door, were the rows of hooks where we 
 hung onr hats and coats. The boys sat on one side of the room, 
 and the girls on the other side. Our desks, made of smooth pine, 
 without paint or varnish, were wide enough for two. Thus we 
 sat, two and two, on a wide bench with a back that you children 
 would not think very comfortable. Sometimes a boy that couldn't 
 keep from whispering was made to sit among the girls. This was 
 a severe punishment for a bashful boy. 
 
 " There were about thirty of us in our little one-room school. 
 Some were tiny tots, learning their a b c's ; and some were big 
 boys studying Latin and geometry in order that they might enter 
 college ; but most of the pupils studied ' the three R's,' as they 
 were called, that is, reading, writing, and ' 'rithmetic'
 
 iS(j 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 " AVe used the old blue-back spelling book, written by Noah 
 Webster, the dictionary man, in 179.S ; and Ave learned to spell 
 from it quite as well, I think, as you and May spell now. We 
 worked hard at our arithmetic because the teacher said it would 
 Ije valuable in business ; and at our grammar, because he said it 
 would help us to speak and write better. Perhaps he was right ; 
 I am not sure. But at any rate we learned to work ; and I am 
 sure that was good for us." 
 
 *' l)ut how did one man teach so many grades?" said May. 
 '* How did you all recite in the same room ?" 
 
 "That was easy," said her grandfather. "While the teacher 
 
 heard one class recite, the rest of us sat at our seats and studied, 
 or pretended to." 
 
 " And liow did the teacher keep order ? " asked George. 
 
 " Well," said Mr. Lawrence, " there was a clump of young birch 
 trees conveniently near the schoolhouse. When a boy persisted 
 in making trouble, he was sent out to bring in a small branch 
 from one of tliose trees. Our teacher was a slender man, but he 
 had a muscular arm ; even the big boys respected him."
 
 Writing a Letter 67 
 
 " Do you mean," said May, " that he icluj^ped the boys when 
 they were bad ? " 
 
 ]Mr. Lawrence's eyes twinkled. " I have sometimes thought," 
 said he, " that our fine modern schools might be still better if 
 they could be built near a clump of birch trees. What do you 
 think about it, George ? " 
 
 Read tliis story aloud as though it were a real conversation. 
 Criticise the reading for clearness and accuracy in pronun- 
 ciation. Was the reading made interesting? Were the 
 proper words emphasized? Did the reading indicate the 
 paragraph divisions ? 
 
 Where is your schoolhouse ? How far do you live from 
 it ? How do you go to it ? How long does it take you ? 
 What time must you be there ? What is the opening exer- 
 cise of the school ? What lessons do you have ? What les- 
 sons do you like best? Which are hardest? What games 
 do you play ? When is school dismissed ? What do you do 
 then ? 
 
 77. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a letter describing a day at your school. Put in 
 the date and salutation. Have some of the letters written 
 on the blackboard. Criticise these. See that all the forms 
 of the letters are correct. Which are best ? W^hy ? Where 
 are capitals used ? 
 
 In all writing there must be a margin on the left side of 
 the page. Never begin writing at the edge of the paper. 
 Notice how the pages of this book and other books are 
 printed. When your letters are written perhaps some of 
 the best of them can be addressed to children of your grade 
 in some other school. They may like to reply, telling you 
 of their school.
 
 68 Everyday English 
 
 78. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 QUOTATION MARKS 
 
 In writing, when we give the exact words of another per- 
 son, these are inclosed by quotation marks (" "). 
 
 George had often heard his father say, " Haste makes waste." 
 
 A direct quotation begins with a capital and is inclosed in 
 quotation marks. 
 
 A quotation is usually separated from the rest of the sen- 
 tence by commas. 
 
 When his father said, " It is time for school," he hurried up- 
 stairs to get his books. 
 
 In conversations, the words of each speaker are inclosed 
 in quotation marks. Explain the use of quotation marks in 
 the following sentences : 
 
 " I had a bad tumble on the icy hill," said George. " My books 
 were scattered everywhere and my geography was torn." 
 
 " Did you strap them tightly this morning ? " asked his 
 mother. 
 
 George shook his head. " No, I was in a hurry." 
 
 *' You were in a hurry when you fell," said May. 
 
 " Haste makes waste," said Mr. Lawrence. 
 
 What is a quotation? What are quotation marks? IIow 
 are they made ? Turn to Lesson 76, and explain the use of 
 quotation marks there. Turn to Lesscui 13, and explain the 
 use of quotation marks in the fable, " The Danger of Talk- 
 ing Too Much." 
 
 Examine the quotation marks in Lesson 37. Explain 
 their use in each instance.
 
 Sif s Golden Hair 69 
 
 79. ORAL LESSON 
 
 SIF'S GOLDEN HAIR, A Northern Myth 
 
 Among the Northern gods there was one who was really unfit 
 to be a god and to live in the shining city of Asgard. This 
 rascal was small and dark and ugly, and his name was Loki. 
 Nothing could better show you how very mean Loki was than 
 the story of Sif and her golden hair. Sif was the wife of the god 
 of Thunder named Thor. She had beautiful long hair that fell 
 over her shoulders like a shower of gold, and of this she was 
 very proud. One day Sif fell asleep on the steps of Thor's 
 palace, and while she lay there sleeping Loki stole up softly be- 
 hind her and cut off her golden hair. 
 
 When Sif woke at last and saw what had happened, she began 
 to cry bitterly, for her golden hair was the pride and joy of Thor, 
 and she was afraid that he would never want to look at her again 
 now that it was gone. She got up from the steps where she was 
 sitting and went away to hide in the garden. When Thor came 
 home, he looked for her all through the palace, and garden, and 
 after a long time finally found poor Sif behind a stone, sobbing 
 bitterly. When he heard her story, he tried to comfort her the 
 best he could, but Sif continued weeping, and covered her shorn 
 head with her arm. 
 
 " I know who did this shameful thing," cried Thor, wrathfully ; 
 " it was that mischief-maker Loki, but this time he shall pay 
 dear for his wickedness." And he strode out of the palace with 
 a look so threatening that even the gods might have trembled 
 before him. Now Loki was not expecting to be caught so soon, 
 and he had not thought of seeking a hiding place ; so when Thor 
 came suddenly upon him he was too frightened to try to escape. 
 He even forgot his ready lies, and when Thor shook him and 
 threatened to kill him for his wicked act, he only begged for 
 mercy and promised to restore her hair to Sif. Thor therefore
 
 '(') Everyday English 
 
 released him after binding him by a solemn oath to inliill his 
 promise. 
 
 The real hair wliicli Loki had (uit off he had already lost, so 
 to keep his word to Thor he must find something else which 
 would resemble it closely enough to make Sif believe she had 
 indeed her own hair again. As there was only one place where 
 skillful and cunning work like this could be done, Loki crossed 
 tlie rainbow bridge that spans the gulf between Asgard and the 
 earth, and hurried to the tall mountain which hides, amid its 
 rocks, the entrance to the lower world. No one but a god or one 
 of the swarthy elves themselves could have found this hidden 
 opening, but Loki knew it well. A small passage led down into 
 the very center of the earth, and down this path Loki stumbled 
 in the darkness, until he came to the underworld. The swarthy 
 elves were busily engaged in their wonderful workshop, lighted 
 only by the fires from the forge ; but wlien they saw Loki they 
 laid down their tools and asked him how they could serve 
 liiin. 
 
 " I have brought you a task," answered Loki, " which requires 
 great skill. INIake of your gold some locks of hair as soft and 
 beautiful as the golden hair which adorns the head of Sif." 
 
 The elves, nothing daunted, set at once to work, and selecting 
 a bar of perfect gold, they pounded it very soft, then spun it into 
 threads so fine that they looked like sunbeams, and so soft that 
 they felt like silk. When the work was finished and placed in 
 Loki's hand, it exceeded in beauty anything he had ever seen, 
 and he felt sure that Thor could not complain of his gift. Then 
 he thanked the swarthy elves, and hastened with his prize back 
 to Asgard and to the palace of Thor, Avhere all the gods had 
 assembled to see the fulfillment of Loki's promise. In spite of 
 the success of his undertaking, the fear of Thor's hasty temper 
 kept Loki somewhat humbled, for the Thunderer had been known 
 to crush the object of his anger with his hammer when once his
 
 /. Divided Quotatioos 71 
 
 wrath was fully roused. His face was now dark and threatening 
 as Loki approached, and beside him stood Sif, weeping bitterly, 
 and trying to cover her head with her hands. But Loki came vip 
 boldly and placed the golden hair, which the elves had made, 
 upon her head. To the astonishment of all, it immediately grew 
 fast, and no one could have told that it was not her golden hair. 
 So Sif was proud and happy once again, and Loki was forgiven. 
 — Emilie K. Baker, Out of the Northland. 
 
 After reading the story, try the game of asking and an- 
 swering questions on it, as in Lessons 10 and 25 ; or turn the 
 story into a dialog, as in Lessons 28, 34, and 61. 
 
 80. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Some of the quotations in the story are interrupted or 
 divided. See the third paragraph and the fifth. Turn to 
 Lesson 37 and note the divided quotations in that Lesson. 
 How are the quotation marks used here ? Write three sen- 
 tences about Loki containing divided quotations. 
 
 Copy the following proverbs : 
 
 It's never too late to mend. 
 
 Don't count your chickens before they are hatched. 
 
 Where there's a will there's a way. 
 
 A stitch in time saves nine. 
 
 Make hay while the sun shines. 
 
 81. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Quotation marks are used to indicate tlie beginning and 
 the end of an exact quotation. When the quotation is in- 
 terrupted or divided, each part of the quotation is marked 
 off by commas and inclosed in quotation marks. 
 
 " I think," said George, " I shall remember next time."
 
 i'j Everyday EiioUsli 
 
 >) 
 
 Write answers to the following questions, using quotation 
 marks. 
 
 1. "Where are you going, my pretty maid?" asked the 
 man. 
 
 2. "Am I my brother's keeper?" said Cain. 
 
 3. " Where did you leave your hat ? " said May. 
 
 4. " Whose fault is it that you are late ? " said George. 
 
 5. "Why did you fall asleep?" said Little Boy Blue's 
 father. 
 
 Write the following as divided quotations : 
 
 1. "I cut it down with my hatchet," said George. 
 
 2. " It will not pay to climb the hill," said lazy Ned. 
 
 3. The fox thought, "If I can get the crow to open her 
 mouth, she will let the cheese fall." 
 
 4. " Who among you all are bold enough to go ? " asked the 
 captain. 
 
 5. " What's the use of a book without conversation or pic- 
 tures ? " said Alice. 
 
 82. ORAL LESSON 
 
 COASTING 
 
 "'Tis royal fun," said lazy Ned, 
 " To coast upon my fine new sled, 
 And beat the other boys. 
 But then I cannot bear to climb 
 The tiresome hill for every time. 
 It more and more annoys." 
 
 Stud}' tlie picture. How many children are in it? What 
 is each doing? How does the boy in front steer his sled? 
 Do you see George and May ? Can you find " lazy Ned " ?
 
 COASTING. 
 73
 
 74 Everyday English 
 
 Have you ever gone coasting ? Where ? By day or by 
 night? How deep \A^as the snow ? Is the fresli-fallen snow 
 the best for coasting ? What kind of snow is the best ? 
 How do yon steer the sled ? How long do you tliink a good 
 coasting hill ought to be ? How should the weather be ? 
 What other winter sports have you taken part in ? Which 
 do you like best ? 
 
 Where do city children have their winter sports ? What 
 is done with the snow in big cities? 
 
 83. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a letter to a friend describing either (1) the picture 
 in Lesson 82, or (2) an experience of yours in coasting, or 
 (3) some other sport you have taken part in, as fishing, or 
 swimming or something else. Put the letter in an envelope, 
 and address it, putting the name and home of your friend in 
 the places indicated by this model. 
 
 PnyiXaxUA^^nylay 
 
 Pt/TbTV.
 
 / Plurals of Nouns 75 
 
 84. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURALS OF NOUNS 
 What are the plurals of these words ? 
 
 day boy toy play donkey joy 
 
 With what letter does each of these words end ? What 
 kind of letter does the y follow ? The letters, a, e, i^ o, u, 
 and sometimes w and y, are vowels. The other letters of the 
 alphabet are consonants. 
 
 In the following words, what kind of letter precedes the 
 y : lily, fiy, lady, ntory, city ? 
 
 The plurals of these words are : lilies, Jlies, ladies, stories, 
 cities. How are these plurals formed ? 
 
 Write the plurals of these words by changing y to ies : — 
 
 pony cherry 
 
 fairy 
 
 jelly 
 
 
 reply 
 
 daisy cry 
 
 body 
 
 story 
 
 
 baby 
 
 berry enemy 
 
 lily 
 
 duty 
 
 
 penny 
 
 ferry copy 
 
 pansy 
 
 family 
 
 
 dairy 
 
 take sentences containin 
 
 g some 
 
 of these plui 
 
 ■als 
 
 \ 
 
 Most nouns are changed from singular to plural by adding s. 
 
 Nouns ending in -s, -x. -z, -sh, or soft -ch, are made plural by 
 adding -es. 
 
 A few nouns ending in -o are made plural by adding -es. 
 
 Nouns ending in -y after a consonant are made plural by 
 changing y to ies. 
 
 What are the plurals of hoy, girl, man, glass, box, mouse, 
 child, tidy, ditty ? 
 
 The plural of J is we, and of this is these. 
 What are the plurals of he, she, it, that, you ?
 
 7(^ Everyday English 
 
 85. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE CHILDREN'S HOUR 
 
 Between the dark and the daylight, 
 When tlie night is beginning to lower, 
 
 Comes a pause in the day's occupations. 
 That is known as the Children's Hour. 
 
 I hear in the chamber above me 
 
 The patter of little feet, 
 The sound of a door that is opened, 
 
 And voices soft and sweet. 
 
 From my study I see in the lamplight, 
 Descending the broad hall stair, 
 
 Grave Alice, and laughing Allegra, 
 And Edith with golden hair. 
 
 A whisper, and then a silence : 
 Yet I know by their merry eyes. 
 
 They are plotting and planning together, 
 To take me by surprise. 
 
 A sudden rush from the stairway, 
 A sudden raid from the hall ! 
 
 By three doors left unguarded 
 They enter my castle wall ! 
 
 They climb u}) into my turret 
 
 O'er the arms and back of my chair; 
 
 If I try to escape, they surround me; 
 They seem to be everywhere.
 
 The Children's Hour 77 
 
 They almost devour me with kisses, 
 
 Their arms about me entwine, 
 Till I think of the Bishop of Bingen 
 
 In his Mouse-Tower on the Rhine ! 
 
 Do you think, blue-eyed banditti, 
 
 Because you have scaled the wall, 
 Such an old mustache as I am 
 
 Is not a match for you all ! 
 
 I have you fast in my fortress, 
 
 And will not let you depart. 
 But put you down into the dungeon 
 
 In the round-tower of my heart. 
 
 And there will I keep you forever, 
 
 Yes, forever and a day, 
 Till the walls shall crumble to ruin. 
 
 And moulder in dust away ! 
 
 — Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. 
 
 At what time does the " children's hour " come ? Why 
 is it called their hour? Who are the children in the poem? 
 Where do they come from? Whom are they coming to see? 
 What will they do? What does their father say to them? 
 What other poems by Longfellow have you read? What 
 do these words mean : lower, occupation, raid, turret, entivine, 
 fortress, banditti, dungeon, round-tower ? If you do not know 
 the meaning, consult the dictionary. Do you know the story 
 of the Bishop of Bingen and the Mouse-Tower ? It is told 
 in Southey's "Bishop Hatto." 
 
 The best known of our American poets, Henry Wadsworth 
 Longfellow, was born in Portland, Maine, in 1807. He graduated 
 from Bowdoin College in 1825, in the same class with Nathaniel 
 Hawthorne, another of our most famous authors. His house,
 
 78 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 once General Washington's headquarters, is still standing, and is 
 
 one of the things that visitors tn Cambridge wish to see. 
 
 Longfellow wrote 
 poems that please 
 people of all ages. 
 But so many of them 
 have been about chil- 
 dren, and interesting 
 to children, that he is 
 sometimes called the 
 children's poet. You 
 have probably read 
 •'• Hiawatha," '' The 
 Village Blacksmith," 
 '•The Psalm of Life," 
 and others. Later 
 you will read, we 
 
 hope, " Evangeline," " The Courtship of :\Iiles Standish," " The 
 
 Skeleton in Armor," and many more. 
 
 86. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Rewrite the following sentences, expressing the same ideas 
 in a different way. 
 
 1. Their arms entwine my neck. 
 
 2. The clouds lower, and the light fails. 
 
 3. There is a pause in the day's occupations. 
 
 4. They are planning to make a raid upon me. 
 The children are descending the stair. 
 Alice is a grave little girl. 
 They have taken me by surprise. 
 They came in suddenly, and surrounded me. 
 They scaled my wall, and devoured me with kisses. 
 The old fortress is crumbling to ruin. 
 
 5. 
 
 ( . 
 
 8. 
 
 0. 
 
 10.
 
 , Synonyms, Homonyms 79 
 
 87. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 SYNONYMS, HOMONYMS 
 
 Words that mean nearly or quite the same thing are called 
 synonyms. 
 
 gay lively useless 
 
 serious sober anger 
 
 throw toss sage 
 
 utter express swiftly 
 
 futile 
 wrath 
 wise 
 rapidly 
 
 Find synonyms for as many of the following words as you 
 can. 
 
 try 
 
 active 
 
 cherish 
 
 empty 
 
 fraud 
 
 deceive 
 
 frigid 
 
 courtesy 
 
 brilliant 
 
 strive 
 
 delight 
 
 heroic 
 
 pretty 
 
 inquire 
 
 speed 
 
 grave 
 
 relate 
 
 pause 
 
 sudden 
 
 devour 
 
 scaled 
 
 Words that have the same sound but different meanings are 
 called homonyms. 
 
 See Lesson 9 for an exercise on homonyms. Here are 
 some examples of homonyms. Explain the meaning of each. 
 Make sentences using each form. ^ 
 
 led 
 
 lead 
 
 sew 
 
 so 
 
 sale 
 
 sail 
 
 see 
 
 sea 
 
 bear 
 
 bare 
 
 its 
 
 it's 
 
 I 
 
 ay 
 
 eye 
 
 blew 
 
 blue 
 
 
 sent 
 
 cent 
 
 scent 
 
 right 
 
 write 
 
 rite 
 
 great 
 
 grate 
 
 
 way 
 
 weigh 
 
 
 sole 
 
 soul 
 
 
 wood 
 
 would 

 
 80 
 
 Everyday Eiio-lish 
 
 88. ORAL LESSON 
 
 Study this picture carefully. It represents a condition 
 common in New England for more than fifty years after the 
 Pilgrims landed in 1620. 
 
 Where are these people going? How many people are in 
 the picture? Why do they go together? What are the 
 men carrying? Why? What time of the year is it? Where 
 is the church ? How large is it ? From what country had 
 these people come? Why had they come to a land so dan- 
 gerous and uncomfortable? 
 
 89. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write an account of what the picture tells you. 
 
 Be careful to express your ideas clearly, and to write and 
 spell accurately. Tell, if you can, what the inside of the 
 church is like, what kind of houses the Puritans lived in, 
 what comforts they lacked, and what sort of dangers the 
 forest held for them.
 
 Choice of Words 81 
 
 90. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 CHOICE OF WORDS 
 
 In these sentences, use different words for those in italics: 
 
 1. The Pilgrims braved many perils. 
 
 2. They were determined to hsive freedom in their religion. 
 
 3. They endured many hardships. 
 
 4. England was theiv fatherland. 
 
 5. Their neighbors were now the savage Indians. 
 
 6. They sat down to their first Thanksgiving feast with feel- 
 ings of gratitude. 
 
 7. They strove to found new homes in the forest. 
 
 8. The land was full of. pretty flowers in summer. 
 
 9. The Indians inquired why they had come. 
 
 10. Some of the colonists had deceived the Indians. 
 
 Words in series are separated by commas. 
 
 Example : On the farm are dogs, cats, horses, and cows. 
 
 Punctuate and capitalize the following sentences: 
 
 the Indians had bows arrows and spears for weapons 
 yes mary i like violets pansies roses and asters 
 the days of the week are Sunday monday tuesday Wednesday 
 thursday friday and Saturday 
 
 you poor sick shivering doggie said james i will take you home 
 o torn your coat trousers and hat are covered with mud 
 
 91. ORAL LESSON 
 
 What is the name of the city or town in which you live? 
 How is it spelled ? What is the population of your town ? In 
 what part of the state is it ? Has it a port, or water front ? 
 What are its principal streets ? What important buildings 
 has it ? Is there a public library ? a fire department ? a water 
 
 G
 
 82 Everyday English 
 
 supply ? a trolley system ? a public park ? a town hall ? 
 What churches are there ? What part of the town do you 
 consider most attractive ? 
 
 Let one member of the class step out of the room, knock at 
 the door, enter as a stranger, and say, " 1 have three days to 
 visit your town. Please tell me how to spend my time to the 
 best advantage." 
 
 Several members of the class may answer him, speaking on 
 the following topics or others that are suited to your town: 
 
 1. An account of the town for a visitor who has just arrived. 
 2. The Park. 3. The principal street. 4. The most attractive 
 part of the town. 5. What I like best about our town. 
 
 92. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 The following selection is from Little Women^ a novel by 
 Louisa ^L Alcott. Read it over carefully so that you will 
 be able to write it correctly from dictation. Notice para- 
 graphs, capitals, punctuation, and contractions. 
 
 Jo saw a big red-lieaded youth approaching her corner, and 
 fearing he meant to engage her, she slipped into a curtained re- 
 cess, intending to peep and enjoy hei'self in peace. Unfortunately, 
 another bashful person liad chosen the same refuge ; for, as the 
 curtain fell behind her, she found herself face to face with the 
 Laurence boy. 
 
 " Dear me, I didn't know any one was here ! " stammered Jo, 
 preparing to back out as speedily as she had bounced in. 
 
 Put the boy laughed, and said pleasantly, though he looked a 
 little startled, "Don't mind me; stay, if you like." 
 
 '' Shan't I disturb you ? " 
 
 "Not a bit. I only came because I don't know many people 
 and felt rather strange at lirst, you know."
 
 ,'. Plural Nouns in -ves 83 
 
 " So did I. Don't go away, please, unless you'd rather." 
 The boy sat down again and looked at his pumps, till Jo said, 
 trying to be polite and easy, " I think I've had the pleasure of 
 seeing you before. You live near us, don't you ? " 
 
 "Next door; " and he looked up and laughed outright. 
 
 93. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURAL NOUNS IN -VES 
 
 Most nouns ending in -f ox -fe form their plural by adding -s. 
 
 roof, roofs grief, griefs safe, safes 
 
 proof, proofs chief, chiefs fife, fifes 
 
 These fourteen nouns ending in -f or -fe form their plural 
 by changing -f or -fe to -ves. 
 
 beef, beeves self, selves 
 
 calf, calves shelf, shelves 
 
 elf, elves sheaf, sheaves 
 
 half, halves thief, thieves 
 
 knife, knives wharf, wharves (or wharfs) 
 
 leaf, leaves wife, wives 
 
 life, lives wolf, wolves 
 
 Write the possessive singular and the possessive plural of 
 each of the nouns mentioned above. 
 
 Give the rules for forming plural nouns. See Lesson 84. 
 
 94. ORAL LESSON 
 
 What railroads has your town? Has it any trade by 
 water? What are its principal industries? What does it 
 manufacture? Can you tell how any of these things are 
 made? How many people do the factories employ? What 
 are its principal stores? What do they sell? If a friend 
 came to visit you, what shops or stores would you show
 
 84 Everyday Eno-lis^h 
 
 him? How is the town governed? Has it a mayor and 
 council? a police department? What can you tell about the 
 history of the town? When was it settled? 
 
 Give an account of the town such as would convince a 
 stranger that it is a "live place." Can you tell any events 
 in its early history? 
 
 Select one of the several topics on which you will give a 
 brief talk to the class: 
 
 1. The railroads and where they go. 2. The factory and what 
 is made there. 3. A large store in your town. 4. The story of 
 the town years ago. 5. How to take books out of the library. 
 6. What the police do. 
 
 95. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 You are to write a letter on one of the topics suggested 
 in l^esson 94 to a friend who has never been in your town. 
 
 Write (1) the heading; (2) the address; (3) the salu- 
 tation; (4) the letter ; (5) the signature. 
 
 Your teacher will pass about the room and criticise the 
 heading, address, and salutation, while you are writing the 
 rest of the letter. 
 
 Some of the letters are to be read aloud. Listen and see 
 if you can tell whether the letter should be divided into 
 paragraphs. Where should the paragraphs be made? 
 
 96. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PLURAL POSSESSIVES 
 
 This dog's nose is black. 
 Dogs' noses are cold. 
 
 In the first sentence, how many dogs are there? How is 
 the singular possessive shown in writing and printing?
 
 Plural Possessives 85 
 
 r' 
 
 In the second sentence, how many clogs are there? What 
 is the difference between tlie plural and the possessive? 
 How is the plural possessive indicated? 
 
 Explain the difference in the meaning of these two 
 expressions : 
 
 My sister's room. My sisters' room. 
 
 Plural nouns ending in -s are made possessive by adding the 
 apostrophe. 
 
 In the singular the apostrophe is before the s. In plurals 
 the apostrophe is after the s. 
 
 Tell whether these possessives are singular or plural : 
 
 The girl's pony. My brother's store. The pony's dinner. 
 
 The girls' pony. My brothers' store. The ponies' dinner. 
 
 Tell whether these are singular or plural possessives. 
 How can you tell? 
 
 baby's ladies' babies' 
 
 glasses' . daughter's teacher's 
 
 anybody's daughters' teachers' 
 
 doctors' Mr. Thomas Lane's doctor's 
 
 butcher's dolls' horses' 
 
 Change these expressions so that the possessive shall be 
 plural. Explain the change in meaning in each case, 
 my dog's kennel this boy's dog 
 
 her brother's house the lady's carriage 
 
 that horse's stable the thief's punishment 
 
 The few plurals of nouns that do not end in -8 form the 
 possessive by adding 's. For example : 
 
 men's oxen's mice's sheep's 
 
 Give the plural possessives of : 
 
 woman child tooth foot
 
 ^ 
 
 S(y Everyday English 
 
 97. ORAL LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 1, What is a sentence? 2. What is a declarative sen- 
 tence ? 3. What other kinds of sentences are there ? 
 4. Give an example of each kind. 5. Give the rules for 
 ca2)itals. G. When is a period used? a question mark? 
 7. What is an abbreviation ? 8. Mow is it written ? 
 9. Give the rule for forming plural nouns. 10. Give three 
 examples of })lurals in -oes. 11. (iive three examples of 
 plurals in -ies. 12. Give three examples of })lurals in 
 jves. 13. What is a paragraph? 14. What is indention? 
 
 15. How is the possessive of singular nouns formed? 
 IP). How is the possessive of plural nouns formed? 
 
 17. What are homonyms? Give two or three examples. 
 
 18. What are synonyms? Give two or three examples. 
 
 19. Name five pronouns. 20. Make some sentences, using 
 these pronouns with 2«, are; was, were; has, have. 21. How 
 are quotations written ? 22. How are divided quotations 
 written ? 23. How is conversation between two persons 
 divided into paragraphs ? 24. What is a contraction? how 
 is it written ? Give several examples. 25. What is the dif- 
 ference between a contraction and an abbreviation ? 
 
 98. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 Write the following exercises from dictation : 
 
 1. Mr. James K. Williams went to New York on June 22, 1913. 
 
 2. To-day is (date in full). 
 
 3. "Come, May," said George, " Til show you the turtle." 
 " Will he bite ? " asked May. 
 
 " No, May, he is not a snapping turtle," said George.
 
 Review Lessons 87 
 
 The children walked down the hill and soon came to the 
 
 brook. The turtle was sunning himself on the bridge. 
 " He doesn't look as if he wanted to fly," said May. 
 "No, turtles don't fly except in fables," said George. 
 4. Who has seen the wind ? 
 
 Neither I nor you ; 
 But when the leaves hang trembling, 
 
 The wind is passing through. 
 Who has seen the wind ? 
 
 Neither you nor I ; 
 But when the trees bow down their heads. 
 The wind is passing by. 
 
 — Christina G. Rossetti. 
 
 99. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 1. Give the plurals of the following nouns : 
 
 child, hero, lily, solo, cargo, beef, thief, ox, sheep, negro, rose, 
 baby, piano, leaf, house, review, tomato, city, chief, shelf. 
 
 2. Give the possessives, singular and plural, of: 
 
 horse, negro, thief, sheep, mouse, baby, lady, captain, buffalo. 
 
 3. Give the plural of the following pronouns : 
 I, he, she, it, this, that, you. 
 
 4. Fill the blanks with the proper words, using am, is, are, 
 was, were, or been : 
 
 I going to town to-day. you going with me ? I 
 
 have in town every day this week. you in town yes- 
 terday ? We there yesterday, and going again to-day. 
 
 JSTo, he not ready. His sisters ready now. Yesterday 
 
 we ready before you, but to-day you ready first.
 
 88 Everyday Englisli 
 
 100. REVIEW LESSON 
 
 CAPITALS AND PUNCTUATION 
 
 Capitals are used : 
 
 At the beginning of a sentence. (Lesson 6.) 
 At the beginning of every line of poetry. (Lesson 9.) 
 At the beginning of every direct quotation. (Lesson 78.) 
 In names of persons, places, cities, towns, months. (Lessons 
 12, 21, 24, 45, 48.) 
 
 In the principal words in titles. (Lessons 14, 17.) 
 
 For / and 0. (Lesson 9.) 
 
 For all words referring to God. (Lesson 12.) 
 
 The period is used : 
 
 At the end of a declarative or imperative sentence (Lesson 
 6); after abbreviations (Lessons 21 and 24). 
 
 The question mark is used after every question. (Lesson 6.) 
 
 The exclamation mark is used to show strong feeling. (Lesson 
 12.) 
 
 The hyphen is used, to separate syllables when a word is 
 divided at the end of a line (Lesson 17); and between the parts 
 of many compound words (Lesson 48). 
 
 The comma is used to mark off : 
 No or yes in replies. (Lesson 72.) 
 The name of the person spoken to. (Lesson 45.) 
 A direct quotation, or each of its parts if it is divided. (Les- 
 sons 78, 80, 81.) 
 
 Words in series. (Lesson 90.) 
 
 Find examples of each use in this book. Can you find any 
 other cases in which the comma is used ?
 
 PART TWO 
 
 101. ORAL LESSON 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 
 
 You already know a good many things about sentences. 
 What is a sentence? What kinds of sentences are there? 
 How is eacli kind punctuated? Every sentence has two 
 parts, subject and predicate. The subject is what we are 
 talking about. In the sentence. — Birds j\y^ — Birds is the 
 subject. The predicate is what we say about the subject. 
 In the sentence. — Birds fly, — fly ^^ the predicate. Think 
 of several very short simple sentences. What are their sub- 
 jects? What are their predicates? 
 
 Are the groups of words below sentences? Supply sub- 
 jects to show what we are talking about. 
 
 growl. has lost her sheep. 
 
 swim. pulled out a plum. 
 
 talk. never told a lie. 
 
 make an hour. spoke very clearly. 
 
 Are the following groups of words sentences? Say some- 
 thing about each. Have you made a sentence? What is 
 its subject? What is its predicate? 
 
 a snow storm some boys whom I know 
 
 cows sentences 
 
 the mail carrier the predicate 
 
 clouds the clock in the tower 
 
 the flowers Theodore Roosevelt 
 
 89
 
 90 Everyday English 
 
 Let us take somewhat longer sentences and divide tliem 
 into subject and predicate. In the sentence, — Mayiy birds 
 fiy south. — Many birds is the subject; fiy south is the predi- 
 cate. What are the subjects and predicates of the two fol- 
 lowing sentences? 
 
 Many birds fly south in the autumn. 
 
 Many birds, both large and small, fly south in the autumn. 
 
 In each of the following sentences what do we talk about? 
 What do we say about it? What is tlie subject, what is the 
 predicate of each? 
 
 Jack and Jill went up the hill. 
 
 Christmas comes but once a year. 
 
 Honesty is the best policy. 
 
 Kain refreshes the dry earth. 
 
 I ran home like a deer. 
 
 Nearly all domestic animals appreciate kindness. 
 
 Every sentence has a subject and a predicate. 
 
 Is your father at home? 
 
 All of the grandchildren returned to the old home for Christmas. 
 
 102. WRITTEX LESSON 
 
 BUILDING SENTENCES 
 
 Write sentences, supplying predicates for the following 
 subjects: 
 
 Little Jack Horner My mother and I 
 
 The schoolhouse on the corner My baby brother 
 The steamboat Kipe red strawberries 
 
 I The city of Boston 
 
 My father The President of the United 
 
 States
 
 ,' Complete Subjects and Predicates 91 
 
 Write sentences, supplying subjects for the following predi- 
 cates: 
 
 will rain to-morrow rode in a red automobile 
 
 jumped over the moon ran away with the spoon 
 
 was first President discovered America in 1492 
 
 wrote letters to his friends carried many tons of freight 
 
 10.3. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE COMPLETE SUBJECT AND COMPLETE PREDICATE 
 
 Write from dictation : 
 
 Every sentence can be divided into two parts, the com- 
 plete subject and the complete predicate. 
 The subject is what we are talking about. 
 The predicate is what we say about the subject. 
 The complete subject contains a noun or a pronoun. 
 The complete predicate always contains a verb. 
 
 Supply predicates for the following subjects: 
 
 I The dinner bell The largest building in town 
 
 You Benjamin Franklin " My pet canary 
 
 Cats George and May San Francisco 
 
 Supply subjects for the following predicates: 
 
 haven't time jumped on the seat isn't ready yet 
 
 caught fire fell downstairs had an axe to grind 
 
 ran away will go to-morrow is far from home 
 
 Divide the following sentences into tlieir complete subjects 
 and complete predicates: 
 
 1. Little Jack Horner sat in a corner. 
 
 2. The little fellow slept in a cradle. 
 
 3. The earth is a big round ball.
 
 92 Everyday Eiiglisli 
 
 4. A year has tliree hundred and sixty-five days. 
 
 5. Taffy was a Welshman. 
 
 G. The village smithy stands under a spreading chestnut tree. 
 
 7. Dirt and disease go together. 
 
 8. George and j\Iay were brother and sister. 
 
 A MOTE APPEAL. 
 
 104. ORAL LESSON 
 
 Study tlie picture carefully. Describe the little girl, her 
 dog, the other dog. Do you see anything that indicates to 
 whom this other dog belongs ? Can you imagine how his 
 owner looks ? Where is the scene ? AVhat is the girl doing ? 
 Define mute and appeal. Is the title of the picture a good 
 one ? Why ? Several pupils may tell the story of the picture. 
 One may give the little girl's account of the story ; another, 
 her dog's account ; another, the other dog's account.
 
 Order of Subject and Predicate 93 
 
 105. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a single paragraph on one of the following topics : 
 
 1. A description of the picture in Lesson 104. 
 
 2. A vacation outing. 
 
 These paragraphs are to be corrected by the class, for (1) 
 title, (2) indention, (3) capitals, (4) punctuation. 
 
 106. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ORDER OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 
 
 Examine the following sentences. The subject is in 
 italics, the predicate in roman type. What kind of sentence 
 is each ? 
 
 1. Down the hill ran the hoys and girls. 
 
 2. Where is James ? 
 
 3. Where did your brother Tom go yesterday ? 
 
 4. Please give me a dime. 
 
 In the first sentence, the usual order is changed, and the 
 predicate comes first and tlie subject second. In declarative 
 sentences, the natural order is (1) subject, (2) predicate. 
 When a sentence has (1) predicate, (2) subject, this is 
 called inverted order. 
 
 In the second sentence, the subject comes last, as frequently 
 in interrogative sentences. 
 
 In the third sentence, a part of the predicate precedes 
 and a part follows the subject. This order occurs in all 
 kinds of sentences. 
 
 In the fourth sentence, the subject i/ou is omitted, but 
 must be understood. The subject i/ou is frequently omitted 
 in imperative sentences.
 
 94 Everyday English 
 
 Select the subject and the predicate in each of the follow- 
 ing sentences : 
 
 1. Young Walter Raleigh was waiting to see the queen. 
 
 2. At the foot of the stairs lay the queen's barge. 
 
 3. In a minute the queen would pass down the stairs. 
 
 4. From the great gates forth marched the ushers. 
 
 5. Amid a crowd of lords and ladies came the queen herself. 
 
 6. AVhere was Raleigh's companion ? 
 
 7. He was hiding behind AValter. 
 
 8. It had rained the night before. 
 
 9. In the queen's path was a small quantity of mud. 
 
 10. Raleigh took his handsome cloak from his shoulders. 
 
 11. He laid it on the miry spot. 
 
 12. The queen passed over this strange bridge. 
 
 13. Into the barge she stepped without saying a word. 
 
 14. The crowd watched and wondered. 
 
 15. One of the queen's officers appeared. 
 
 16. Follow me to the queen. 
 
 107. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE GROWTH OF A PLANT 
 
 Every spring you have seen trees put forth new leaves, flowers 
 and weeds spring up in field and woodside, and all nature take 
 on new life. Every step in these changes is wonderful ; each is a 
 new act of creation. 
 
 Most of the common plants continue their lives from genera- 
 tion to generation by means of seeds. Have you ever watched 
 a seed grow into a plant ? 
 
 This is a picture of a bean. 
 
 Place several beans in damp sand or earth, and 
 keep them Avarm. In two or three days, if you take
 
 How Plants Grow 
 
 95 
 
 one of them out, it will be soft and much larger than it was 
 when you put it in. In five or six days, take 
 out another, and it will be split apart like this. 
 By the end of a week, or very soon after, 
 the earth will be pushed up and cracked, and 
 soon a tiny pair of leaves will appear with the two halves of the 
 bean clinging to them, like an eggshell to a newly 
 hatched chick. If you pull up one of these, you 
 will see a tiny plant with roots. 
 
 The plant is now well under way in its life. 
 What has happened ? The parent bean had pro- 
 duced a number of these bean seeds such as you 
 have planted. Each bean contained in it the 
 germ, or origin, of a new plant of the same sort. 
 Most of the bean seed was composed of the 
 material on which the infant plant could feed 
 when its life should begin, and the whole was 
 inclosed in a protecting skin. 
 The moisture and warmth started the new plant life. The 
 roots pushed down into the earth for further food, and the stem 
 and leaves pushed up to get their share of help from the light 
 and air. For sunlight and air also contribute to the life of 
 plants. The leaves have many minute openings in them through 
 which the plants breathe in a certain portion of the atmosphere. 
 
 By and by our bean will grow and spread and put forth little 
 white or lilac-colored blossoms. These in turn will drop off, and 
 where they were will appear tiny bean pods, hardly as large as a 
 pin. When these pods have developed we have a little bush 
 about nine inches high, looking like the picture on the next page, 
 and yielding us a delicious and wholesome food. 
 
 What does a seed contain ? What makes it germinate ? 
 Why do we plant things in the spring ? How must our soil
 
 96 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 be prepared? Wliat stages are there in the life of the bean? 
 
 . . -^^^^^-f Have you ever 
 
 V;^ "i^^^ ■/ planted any- 
 
 '^^ -^...: '>^-^ ^. ■;- y.^^ thing? Did it 
 
 / . ^'   • ^?^®^^|| ^»-ow? Did it 
 •%,'/-'' > f i^t^l^^^ ■'•^^1^'*- need any attend- 
 
 
 
 
 *^^^~ 'iiice during its 
 *'^^^ growth? When 
 
 did it ripen or 
 reach its matu- 
 r i t y ? What 
 flowers do you 
 know the names 
 of? Did you 
 ever plant a 
 garden? Can 
 you watch some- 
 thing grow at 
 
 home? How do the earth and the air help plants? Do 
 
 children grow like plants ? 
 
 108. WRITTEX LESSON 
 
 Write the following sentences from dictation: 
 
 1. Mr. and Mrs. Edward Lawrence will be at home on Thurs- 
 day, April 4, 101.3. 
 
 2. In the children's garden were lilies, daisies, roses, and sweet 
 peas. 
 
 3. " I like to dig in the garden," said George. 
 
 4. " I like to pick the flowers," said IVLay. 
 
 5. " I wonder," said their mother, " who likes to weed tlie 
 garden ? " 
 
 6. George's spade and May's rake were left out in the rain.
 
 Nouns 97 
 
 Compare your sentences written from dictation with those 
 printed in the book. Correct carefully all mistakes. 
 
 Write the plurals corresponding to the following : 
 
 I You are He goes was 
 
 this I go the boy runs has 
 
 he is the doll's am sees 
 
 baby's the doll's dress is goes 
 
 109. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 NOUNS 
 
 You have heard something about nouns in Lessons 33, 54, 
 60, 84, 93, and elsewhere. Words used as names are called 
 nouns. They name all sorts of things, persons, places, and 
 ideas. Boy, dog, stick, house, John, George Washington, 
 schoolhouse, music, penny, patriotism, minister, fire engine, 
 and New York are all nouns. 
 
 Select all the nouns in the fable in Lesson 13, 
 Divide the following sentences into subject and predicate. 
 Select the nouns in the subjects. 
 
 1. Plants grow from seeds. 2. All the beautiful flowers in 
 your garden grew from seeds. 3. Plant a seed in the damp earth. 
 4. Is the seed dead ? 5. A tiuy leaf pushes its way out of the 
 earth. 6. This leaf will grow rapidly. 7. New leaves appear. 
 8. Do you see any flowers? 9. Under the earth are roots. 
 10. Light and air help the plant to grow. 11. How does a plant 
 breathe? 12. The flowers have seeds. 13. These seeds may 
 grow into new plants. 14. A common plant teaches us many 
 things. 15. What do the plants eat? 
 
 Words used as names are called nouns. The principal word 
 in the subject is often a noun.
 
 98 Everyday English 
 
 no. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A DRILL IN THE RIGHT WAY OF SAYING THINGS 
 
 1. Say, I have seen him, or I saw him. 
 
 2. Say, / did it, or / have done it. 
 
 3. Say, You were, you have. 
 
 4. Say, He doesn't. 
 
 Choose sides and play the game of using correctly the 
 words : am, are, was, been, do, did, done, have, has, saw, seen. 
 
 The teacher will give the word am. The first pupil on 
 one side will make a sentence containing that word. If the 
 sentence is correct, score one. If it is incorrect, some one 
 on the other side must find the mistake. That counts one 
 for the side finding the mistake. 
 
 May expresses permission. Can expresses ability. The 
 teacher teaches the lesson, the children learn it. 
 
 Study the following sentences until you are sure that you 
 understand the correct use of ma^ and can, learn and teach. 
 Then make other sentences illustrating their use. 
 
 1. May I be excused at three o'clock? 
 
 2. You may if your lessons are learned. 
 
 3. I think I can learn them by then. 
 
 4. AVho teaches drawing in your school? 
 
 5. Perhaps I can teach you how to draw a horse. 
 
 The teacher may use similar exercises on other common 
 mistakes ; for example : 
 
 Love for like. You love your mother, you like candy. 
 3fost for almost. Say, I am almost ready. 
 Leave for let. I^et the kitten alone ; leave it in my care. 
 Betiveen for among. Usually beticeen applies to two persons or 
 things, among to more than two.
 
 '■ Pronouns 99 
 
 111. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Pasadena, Cal., Dec. 0, 1914. 
 Harry Vincent, 
 342 West St., 
 Albany, N. Y. 
 Dear Harry : 
 
 All day long I have been thinking of you and your mamma 
 and wondering what you were doing. So, when I came back to 
 the hotel to-night and found a letter from each of you, I cried, 
 " Hurrah, this is fine ! " I read your letter first, but don't tell 
 mamma. Isn't it splendid to have snow and coasting so early in 
 the winter ? While it was snowing in New York, it was a warm 
 summer day here in California, and I was picking ripe oranges. 
 On Tuesday, I sent you a box by express, and it should reach 
 you about the same time as this letter. As soon as it comes, 
 please write and tell me how you like the oranges. In that letter, 
 keep your eye on the capitals and the punctuation. If you try, 
 I am sure, you can write a letter without a single mistake from 
 the date to the signature. What is a signature? Here is your 
 father's. 
 
 Thomas W. Vincent. 
 
 Imagine that you are Harry Vincent, and write a letter 
 in reply to the above. 
 
 112. LANGUAGE LESSONS 
 
 PRONOUNS 
 
 Pronouns are words used instead of nouns. Take this 
 sentence : 
 
 When John found John's sister crying, John gave John's sister 
 John's whip.
 
 100 Everyday English 
 
 The nouns John and sister are used too often. Tn fact, we 
 never make a sentence like that. We use pronouns in place 
 of the nouns. We would say : 
 
 When John found his sister crying, he gave her his whip. 
 
 He and his refer back to John; her to sister. All pro- 
 nouns stand for nouns. The following are some of the most 
 common pronouns : 
 
 I he his they 
 
 me she hiin them 
 
 you it we who 
 
 your her us which 
 
 Select all the pronouns in these nonsense verses; 
 
 They told me, you had been to her, 
 
 And mentioned me to him ; 
 They gave me a good character, 
 
 But said I could not swim. 
 
 Divide the following sentences into subject and predicate. 
 Select the nouns and pronouns in each subject. 
 
 1. The sun is going down. 
 
 2. The sandman will soon come to see us. 
 
 3. He is sprinkling his sand everywhere. 
 
 4. The sand falls on my eyes. 
 
 5. Do you feel any sand on your eyes ? 
 
 6. Listen to the sandman's song. 
 
 7. How sleepy I feel ! 
 
 8. My eyelids are closing. 
 
 9. All the children hear this song. 
 
 10. The sandman's song is heard around the world. 
 
 Words used as names are called Nouns. 
 
 Words used in place of nouns are called Pronouns. 
 
 Every subject contains a noun or a pronoun.
 
 The Barefoot Boy 
 113. ORAL LESSON- 
 
 101 
 
 THE BAREFOOT BOY 
 
 Blessings on thee, little man, 
 Barefoot boy, with cheek of tan ! 
 With thy turned-up pantaloons, 
 And thy merry whistled tunes ; 
 With thy red lips, redder still. 
 Kissed by strawberries on the hill ; 
 With the sunshine on thy face. 
 Through thy torn brim's jaunty grace ; 
 Prom my heart I give thee joy, — 
 I was once a barefoot boy ! 
 Prince thou art, — the grown-up man 
 
 Only is republican. 
 
 Let the million-dollared ride ! 
 
 Barefoot, trudging at his side. 
 
 Thou hast more than he can buy 
 
 In the reach of ear and eye, — 
 
 Outward sunshine, inward joy : 
 
 Blessings on thee, barefoot boy ! 
 
 This is the first stanza in a well-known and beautiful poem 
 by John G. Whittier. He was born on a farm at Haverhill, 
 Massachusetts, about a hundred years ago. The old farm 
 house is still preserved as it was in his boyhood and is visited 
 every year by many people who have enjoyed his poetry. 
 He did not go to college, but he read good books, observed 
 the life around him, and thought earnestly about what he 
 read and saw, and so educated himself better than many col- 
 lege students do. He wrote many poems that describe the 
 country life in New England. Among the best of these are 
 "Snow Bound " and " Songs of Labor."
 
 102 Everyday En<2:lisli 
 
 Do you know the rest of " Tlie Barefoot Boy " ? Where 
 does the barefoot boy live ? Why is he happy ? What 
 things has he that wealth cannot give? What are his 
 pleasures ? What is the meaning of : cheek of tan^ merry, 
 jaunty, I give thee joy, republican, trudging, million- dollar ed, 
 in the reach of ear and eye ? 
 
 If there is time, let several pupils speak on the following 
 topics. Each talk should form a paragraph. 
 
 1. The Poet Whittier. 
 
 2. The Barefoot Boy. 
 
 3. The Occupations of a Country Boy. 
 
 114. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write about (1) " The Barefoot Boy," or (2) the occupa- 
 tions of a country boy, or (3) an account of how a city boy 
 spends his time out of school. 
 
 Each composition should contain several paragraphs. 
 How many paragraphs are there to be in your composition ? 
 What shall you say in each paragraph ? 
 
 115. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 A, AN, THE. HOMONYMS. SYNONYMS 
 
 A, an, and the are three very useful words. AVhat differ- 
 ence is there in the meaning of the hook and a hookf the 
 pencil and a pencil? Would you use a or an befoi'e the 
 following words ? 
 
 elephant rhinoceros goat ostrich 
 
 consonant vowel uncle aunt 
 
 winter day autumn day new coat old coat 
 
 A is used before a word beginning with a consonant. An is 
 used before a word beginning with a vowel.
 
 Homonyms. Synonyms 103 
 
 Make sentences, using each of the following homonyms. 
 In case of doubt, look the word up in the dictionary. 
 
 their there sowed sewed capitol capital 
 
 piece peace steal steel led lead 
 
 its it's principle principal sent cent scent 
 
 Read the following stanza from Bryant's " Song of 
 Marion's Men." 
 
 Our band is few but true and tried, 
 
 Our leader frank and bold ; 
 The British soldier trembles 
 
 When Marion's name is told. 
 Our fortress is the good greenwood, 
 
 Our tent the cypress tree ; 
 We know the forest round us. 
 
 As seamen know the sea. 
 We know its walls of thorny vines. 
 
 Its glades of reedy grass, 
 Its safe and silent islands 
 
 Within the dark morass. 
 
 Find synonyms, or words of nearly the same meaning, for 
 hand, few, tried, leader, frank, hold, British, tremhles, fortress, 
 greenwood, seamen, glades, silent, morass. 
 
 In this stanza from Sidney Lanier's "Tampa Robins," 
 explain : a fig for thee, glohes of gold. Times scythe. 
 
 The robin laughed in the orange-tree : 
 
 " Ho, windy Xorth, a fig for thee 
 
 While breasts are red and wings are bold 
 And green trees wave us globes of gold, 
 
 Time's scythe shall reap but bliss for rae 
 
 — Sunlight, song, and the orange-tree."
 
 it)i 
 
 iMervdav Enorlish 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^H Vp''' cii^^H 
 
 • 
 
 ^Bt ' ^'^^^1 
 
 r 
 
 HL^^^^ 1 
 
 
 
 ^ '■mtWM^^^^SB^lTs^^K -.i ^IH 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 rf .|t/|f 
 
 
 .' V^pM^^p^Piil 
 
 Al^^^^IpI |.f ; 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 BIHk^ ^-k , 
 
 116. ORAL LESSON 
 
 WAITING FOR MISTRESS 
 
 Study the picture carefully. What shows that tlie ani- 
 mals are " waitin^^ for their mistress " ? Where do you 
 think she is going ? Will the trip be a i)leasure to all of 
 them ? What will the dogs (h) ? If they could all think and 
 talk, what might they be talking about now ? Imagine their 
 conversation. 
 
 117. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of Lesson IIG in tlie form of a dialog 
 between the dogs and the pony, putting in the necessary 
 stage directions. Consult the examples in Lessons 28 and 
 34 to get the risfht form.
 
 Verbs 105 
 
 118. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 VERBS 
 
 You have already learned something about verbs, about is 
 and are in Lesson 42, about was and were and has and have 
 in Lesson 54 and Lesson 60. Verbs are a very important 
 and useful class of words ; you have used them every day 
 since you learned to talk. 
 
 Verbs are used to assert or tell something. In the sen- 
 tence, — John plaijs. — John is a noun and names a boy; 
 plays is a verb and tells what John does. Nouns are only 
 names or signs. You can't tell anything about nouns with- 
 out using verbs. Try to tell something about the noun boy. 
 At once you use a verb. 
 
 The boy is The boy slept   
 
 The boy has The boy thought 
 
 The boy plays The boy gave 
 
 The boy will come The boy has forgotten 
 
 A verb may be a single word ; as, is, think, jumped, drank. 
 Or it may be composed of several words ; as, will come, has 
 been, would have jumped, is drinking, may have been thinking. 
 When a verb consists of several words, it is called a Verb- 
 Group (or Verb Phrase). 
 
 Turn to Lesson 46. In the poem " The Land of Counter- 
 pane " are the following verbs : teas, lay, had, keep, watched, 
 go, sent, brought, planted, was, sits, sees. 
 
 In the following sentences, determine (1) the subject, 
 (2) the predicate. Select (3) the nouns, (4) the pronouns, 
 (5) the verbs. 
 
 Few boys have found my nest in the meadow. There I chatter 
 all day. They call me Bobolink. Do you see the eggs ? Little 
 birds will come by and by. The good farmer spares our nest.
 
 106 Everyday Eiio:lisli 
 
 110. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A PRETTY THIEF 
 
 Mr. Lawrence had planted a few rows of early sweet corn in 
 the garden, and had promised George and May that they should 
 have corn for dinner a week before any one else in the neighbor- 
 hood. It was a kind of corn that grew very quickly and ripened 
 earlier than the usual kinds. Its stalks were not tall, and 
 the ears grcAV low en the stalk, close to the ground. They 
 began to fill out long before the other corn in the garden had 
 tasseled. 
 
 The children counted every ear and watched day by day, that 
 they would be sure to know when the first ear was large enough 
 to pick. There were two ears larger than the rest, and each day 
 the children would call their father and ask him if they could 
 not pick those ears. But each time he would say, "No, we must 
 wait a little longer." Then George and May would go back 
 under the old poplar tree and feed the squirrel that lived in its 
 branches, or else sit quietly in the shade and try to imagine how 
 good the sweet corn would taste. 
 
 At last Mr. Lawrence said, " All right, children, we'll pick 
 those two ears to-morrow morning. You shall each have one for 
 dinner." 
 
 " I choose the long ear," cried George ; " it's the biggest." 
 
 " I'd rather have the fat one," said ]\lay ; " it has the nicest 
 silk." 
 
 The next morning they were out in the garden bright and early 
 to pick the ears. T>ut neither the long one nor the fat one was 
 there ! Each ear had been picked by some one. Under the 
 jiojtlar tree were the husks in two piles, and beside them the two 
 cobs with every kernel neatly picked off. 
 
 Neither Mr. Lawrence, nor Henry the gardener, nor Sarah the
 
 A Squirrel Story 107 
 
 cook, nor any one about the house knew anything about the corn. 
 There had been a thief about. That was clear, but who was the 
 thief ? George and May couhl not believe that such a rascal had 
 been about their poplar tree. 
 
 " Never mind," said their father ; " there are two more ears 
 large enough to pick to-morrow." 
 
 On the next day, however, those two ears had been picked, 
 and their shucks and cobs were found in the same place as before 
 under the poplar tree. The next day three more ripe ears had 
 been taken, and it began to look as if George and May wouldn't 
 get any of the early sweet corn. They were very cross at the 
 thief, whoever he might be, and declared that they would teach 
 him a lesson if they could only catch him. 
 
 ** Well, children," said Mr. Lawrence at supper that night, 
 "Henry and I have been talking about your thief, and we believe 
 that we know who he is. If you will go to bed an hour earlier 
 to-night so that you can get up with the sun to-morrow, we will 
 try to catch him." 
 
 Although George and May went to bed an hour earlier, they lay 
 awake a long time trying to guess who the rascal was that had 
 stolen their corn. So they were fast asleep the next morning when 
 their father called to them, " Get up quick, and look out of the 
 south window ! " 
 
 In half a minute they were up and at the window. There on 
 the lowest limb of the old poplar sat a great gray squirrel. He 
 held a large ear of corn in his paws and was pulling off the husks 
 and throwing them on the ground as fast as he could. 
 
 '' The old scamp ! " said George ; " we've fed him nuts many a 
 time." 
 
 " Isn't he cunning ? " said May ; " he's beginning to nibble the 
 kernels." 
 
 Mr. Squirrel had finished husking the corn, and was biting off 
 the kernels, as neat as you please. The early ears grew so low on
 
 108 
 
 Everyday Eno-lisli 
 
 the stalk that, by stretching a little, he had been able to reach 
 thora and ])reak them off. Then he had carried his stolen .goods 
 
 to the great limb, and now 
 was having a tine breakfast. 
 After every bite, with his 
 sharp little teeth, he would 
 throw his head back and look 
 as proud and pleased with 
 himself as could be. 
 
 Tn fact, he made such a 
 ])retty picture there among 
 the green leaves in the bright 
 morning sun that George and 
 ^lay did not feel very angry 
 at the thief, after all. 
 
 Before the talk in the 
 class about squirrels, see 
 what you can learn by 
 studying any squirrels near your home. 
 
 Are there any gray squirrels in your part of the country ? 
 Can they run fast ? What is the shape of their tails ? What 
 does the squirrel clo with his tail when resting ? when jump- 
 ing ? Has he large or small ears ? Where are his eyes placed ? 
 What is peculiar about his upper lip ? Upon what does he 
 feed ? What enemies has he ? 
 
 Have you seen a red squirrel ? a chipmunk ? What can 
 you tell about them ? In some parts of the country the gray 
 squirrels make so much trouble by eating the young corn 
 tliat boys are placed in tlie cornfields to frighten them away. 
 In other parts of the country, in the cities especially, gray 
 squirrels are kept in the parks, and everybody feeds and 
 pets them. Have you any story to tell about squirrels ?
 
 Verbs and Verb-Groups 109 
 
 There is a well-known poem, " The Mountain and the 
 Squirrel," by Ralph Waldo Emerson. Do you know it ? 
 Perhaps some one in the class can recite it. Our picture of 
 squirrels is from a painting by Sir Edwin Landseer, the 
 famous painter of animals. 
 
 Read the story " A Pretty Thief " aloud. 
 
 Commit these lines to memory : 
 
 He prayeth well who loveth well 
 Both man and bird and beast. 
 
 He prayeth best who loveth best 
 All things both great and small ; 
 For the dear God who loveth us, 
 He made and loveth all. — Coleridge. 
 
 120. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write in your own words the story "A Pretty Thief," 
 told in Lesson 119. Be careful in paragraphing, punctuation, 
 and use of quotation marks. 
 
 121. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Every predicate contains a verb or a verb-group. Make 
 sentences containing the following verbs and verb-groups : 
 
 Verbs : ran, jumped, swam, dives, gives, gave, chased, skated, 
 thought, saw, were, was, taught, learned. 
 
 Verb-Groups: have seen, may go, has taught, will learn, should 
 have been, cannot speak. 
 
 Make five sentences, each containing the plural of one 
 noun. What is the subject and the predicate of each sen- 
 tence?
 
 110 Everyday English 
 
 122. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE OLD GARDEN 
 
 Where are the children? How do you know? Tell all 
 the things that show it is a garden. How many different 
 kinds of flowers do you see? Are there any trees in the 
 picture? What is the boy doing? What is the flower he 
 holds in his hand? What colors has this flower? Have 
 you ever seen it growing? What other flowers do you see? 
 What time of day do you think it is? The pillar which the 
 girls are looking at is a sun dial. The level top has a face 
 with numbers on it like a clock. The pointed thing at the 
 top is called a style. The shadow of this style, falling on 
 the numbers, shows what time of day it is. Have you ever 
 seen a sun dial? Do we use the sun to tell the time? What 
 ways of indicating time do you know? How old were you 
 when you learned to tell the time ? 
 
 123. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Give a description of the 
 picture on the opposite page. 
 Be sure to tell everything 
 that you think interesting 
 in it. Tell what the chil- 
 dren are doing and how they 
 are dressed. 
 
 After your composition 
 has been corrected, perhaps 
 you can illustrate your story 
 with pencil or water-color 
 sketches, and take it home 
 to show your parents.
 
 THE OLD GARDEN
 
 Planning a Letter 111 
 
 124. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ^= VERBS : NUMBER AND TENSE 
 
 As we have seen, the verb is often different in the plural 
 from the singular. We say, he goes and they go^ the hoy runs 
 and the hoys run. 
 
 Verbs also change with the time when the action was done. 
 We say I run now; but I ran yesterday, or I ra7i last week. 
 This way of indicating the time of an action we call tense; 
 and we speak of the present tense, and the past tense. 
 
 Select the present tense and the past tense: 
 
 I slept. The lion roars. 
 
 He thinks. We thought so. 
 
 The rain came. The weather was fine. 
 
 In the letter in Lesson 111, select the verbs and tell which 
 are in the present tense and which in the past tense. 
 
 125. ORAL LESSON 
 
 PLANNING A LETTER 
 
 In the talk to-day we are going to prepare for a real let- 
 ter. Every one in the class is to write a real letter to a real 
 person. The first question to decide is, to whom will you 
 write your letter ? The second question is, about what will 
 you write your letter ? Think over these two questions, and 
 have your answers ready. 
 
 In the class each pupil will be called on to say to whom 
 his letter is to be addressed, and then to tell in a few words 
 what he expects to say in the letter. Does the letter treat 
 of several topics ? Each topic should be given a paragraph 
 or paragraphs. Make outlines or plans showing the differ- 
 ent topics and their order.
 
 112 
 
 Everyday Knglisli 
 12G. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 IW« ili iiiiJ 
 
 Write the letter you talked about in Lesson 125. Be sure 
 that you write the heading, address, salutation, and signa- 
 ture correctly. If you are uncertain about any of these, 
 turn to the models in Lessons 74 and 111. How many top- 
 ics are you writing about ? Make each topic a paragraph. 
 
 127. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 The letters written in Lesson 126 are to 
 be exchanged and criticised by the pupils. 
 Mark mistakes with an X. 
 
 Be sure tliat you find all 
 mistakes in (1) capitals, (2) punctua- 
 tion, (3) plurals, (4) possessives. 
 
 The letters are to be returned to 
 the writers. Look your letter over 
 carefully. Can you tell what each x 
 stands for ? If you find a sentence 
 marked that 
 you are sure 
 has no mis- 
 take, you may 
 write the sen- 
 tence on the 
 board. Can 
 any one find 
 a mistake, 
 then? Pre- 
 serve these 
 letters ; they are not yet 
 ready for the mail box.
 
 Writing a Letter 113 
 
 128. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A number of the letters written in Lesson 126 are to be 
 read aloud. Each pupil is to read his own letter. Read 
 very distinctly, so that every one in the class can under- 
 stand . 
 
 Are there any mistakes in pronunciation or in the use of 
 words? Which are the best letters ? Why? 
 
 For Lesson 129, bring an envelo]3e and a stamp to the 
 class. Be sure you know how to spell the name and address 
 of the person to whom your letter is written. 
 
 129. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 On the envelope write the name and address correctly. 
 Follow the models in Lessons 83 and 111. 
 
 Now copy very carefully the letter that you wrote in Les- 
 son 126. Make sure that all the mistakes are corrected. 
 Write f)lainly and slowly. Sign your name. Read the let- 
 ter over. Is it a good one ? 
 
 Now fold the sheet neatly and put it in the addressed 
 envelope. Mail the letter after school. 
 
 130. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 TWO TROUBLESOME VERBS 
 See, Saw, Seen 
 
 Study carefully these sentences, and repeat them over and 
 over until you are sure you can use correctly the words see, 
 saw, %een. They are different forms of the verb see. See is 
 the present tense; saiv is the past tense; and seen is used in 
 verb-groups with has, have., and had.
 
 114 Everyday English 
 
 1. I see the bird now. 2. He sees the nest. 3. I have seen 
 him often. 4. I haven't seen him for several days. 5. I saw 
 him first a week ago. 6. Has he seen us ? 7. Yes, he saw us a 
 moment ago. 8, Did you see him, too? 9. Now we have both 
 seen him. 
 
 Supply the proper form, see, sees, smv, seen, in the follow- 
 ing sentences: 
 
 1. I an oriole yesterday. 2. Where did you him ? 
 
 8. There, I him now. 4. I never one before. 5. Oh, 
 
 I have them many times. 6. Have you ever a scarlet 
 
 tanager ? 7. No, but my brother has them several times 
 
 this summer. 
 
 Do, Does, Did, Done 
 
 Do is plural ; does is singular ; both are in the present 
 tense. JJid is both singular and plural and is in the past 
 tense. Done is used in verb-groups with has, have, or had: 
 I have done it. He has done it. 
 
 1. I do my lessons in the morning. 2. He does his at night. 
 3. She doesn't do hers at all. 4. Doesn't she like to study ? 
 5. Her brothers do, but she doesn't. G. I did my example. 
 Have you done yours ? 7. He has done all his examples. 8. I 
 didn't go yesterday, did you ? 
 
 Read these sentences over and over until you are sure you 
 can use the words correctly. Then make three sentences, 
 using do, and three each for does, did, and done. 
 
 After this, any errors in the use of the verbs see and do in 
 the oral lessons should be corrected as soon as the speaker 
 makes the mistake. 
 
 Review tlie drill in the right way of saying things in 
 Lesson 110.
 
 / October's Briglit Blue Weather 115 
 
 131. ORAL LESSON 
 
 The poem on the next two pages is to be studied and 
 memorized in preparation foi* the Oral Lesson. 
 
 Read the poem carefully aloud. What is the first stanza 
 about ? the last stanza ? What are the other stanzas about ? 
 Have you seen bumblebees, golden-rod, gentians, grapes, 
 chestnuts, woodbine, and apple trees ? What do the words 
 belated, thriftless, vagrant mean ? Why are they applied to 
 the bumblebee ? Explain the first two lines of the third 
 stanza. Why are chestnut burrs described as sating Ex- 
 plain tvMte-tvinged seeds, aftermaths, lovely wayside things^ 
 golden freighting. 
 
 Helen Hunt Jackson was an American writer who spent 
 most of her life in California. You shoukl read her poem 
 " September," and compare it with this one on October. 
 Other poems on the months are " May," by Frank Dempster 
 Sherman; "July," by Susan Hartley Sweet; "March," by 
 William Wordsworth. Do you think that October is the 
 best of the months ? 
 
 How do you like the drawing for the poem in tliis book ? 
 If you care to, you might make with your water colors an 
 ornamental cover for a booklet in which you could copy the 
 poem. This would make a nice Christmas gift for some one 
 at home. 
 
 
 
 .c-^ 
 
 ••'..•■^--rr.'i*?'*-'-^ 
 
 
 :.-' \i^ 
 
 C'**
 
 OCTOBERS BRIGHT BLUE WEATHER 
 
 suns and skies and clouds of June, 
 And flowers of June together, 
 
 Ye cannot rival for one hour 
 October's bright blue weather; 
 
 When loud the bumblebee makes haste, 
 
 Belated, thriftless, vagrant. 
 And golden-rod is dying fast. 
 
 And lanes with grapes are fragrant ; 
 
 When gentians roll their fringes tight 
 To save them for the morning, 
 
 And chestnuts fall from satin burrs 
 Without a sound of warning ; 
 
 When on the ground red apples lie 
 In piles like jewels shining. 
 
 And redder still on old stone walls 
 Are leaves of woodbine twining ; 
 
 116
 
 When all the lovely wayside things 
 Their white-winged seeds are sowing, 
 
 And in the fields, still green and fair, 
 Late aftermaths are growing; 
 
 "When springs run low, and on the brooks. 
 
 In idle golden freighting, 
 Bright leaves sink noiseless in the hush 
 
 Of woods, for winter waiting; 
 
 W^hen comrades seek sweet country haunts, 
 
 By twos and twos together, 
 And count like misers, hour by hour, 
 
 October's bright blue weather. 
 
 O sun and skies and flowers of June, 
 Count all your boasts together, 
 
 Love loveth best of all the year 
 October's bright blue weather, 
 
 — Helex Hunt Jackson. 
 
 117
 
 118 Everyday Englisli 
 
 132. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write from dictation the folloiving sentences : 
 
 1. It was May's birthday, Saturday, October 15, 1911. 
 
 2. " Come," said May to her brother, " let iis take a walk." 
 
 3. " All right," he replied ; " we may find some chestnuts." 
 
 4. In the fields the pumpkins were turning yellow, and in the 
 orchards the apples were red on the trees. 
 
 5. The bumblebee's gold, the woodbine's scarlet and the grapes' 
 purple were other colors that we noticed. 
 
 Rewrite each of the following sentences, using another 
 word or expression in place of the one in italics, clianging 
 the order of the words when necessary. Underline the 
 subject of each sentence. 
 
 1. June cannot rival October. 
 
 2. The bumblebee is a vagrant fellow. 
 
 3. Gay colored leaves fall quietly into the brook. 
 
 4. The ivaysicle gentians curl their fringes. 
 
 5. The lanes are odorous with grapes. 
 
 6. The bumblebee^ s buzz was the only sound to be heard. 
 
 133. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES 
 
 You have often noticed that two words are alike, except 
 that they begin or end differently. We often add a syllable to 
 the beginning or to the end of the word. We say that apples 
 are ripe, or unripe; or, that we are going home, or homeivard. 
 A syllable that is put on at the beginning of a word is called 
 •A prefix; a syllable at the end of a word is called a suffix. 
 
 Let us consider some of these prefixes and suffixes. Un- is a 
 prefix that means not; unripe means not ripe ; unread i/ me-dus
 
 Prefixes and Sufiixes 119 
 
 not ready. Tell the meaning of the following words : un- 
 willing, unsteady, U7iable, untrue^ unpleasant, unsafe, un- 
 broken, unknoivn. How many other words can you think of 
 that begin with un-f 
 
 In- is another prefix that often means not. Before m, p, 
 and h it is written im, before I it is il, and before r it is 
 written ir. Insincere means not sincere. Tell the mean- 
 ing of the following words: inactive, impatient, illegible, 
 immovable, impious, incomplete, irrational, illegal, impossible, 
 inconsistent, irregular, irresponsible. Can you think of any 
 other words beginning with il-, im-, in-, or ir- in which 
 this prefix means not? 
 
 This same prefix often means in, into, on, or to. Indraion 
 means drawn in; injiow means that whiaXi flows in. Tell the 
 meaning of the following words : immigrate, impart, import, 
 imprint, implant, inclose, indent. 
 
 There are many other prefixes in common use. Here are 
 a few of them : 
 
 pre-, meaning before, as in j)refix, precede. 
 
 ante-, meaning before, as in antedate. 
 
 anti-, meaning against, as in antipathy. 
 
 con-, meaning together, as in congress, convene. 
 
 extra-, meaning beyond or outside, as in extraordinary. 
 
 fore-, meaning before, as in foresee, foretell. 
 
 re-, meaning bach or again, as in return, retell. 
 
 A suffix is a syllable added to the end of a word : happy, 
 happiness ; home, homelike; sivift, swiftly ; act, action. Two 
 common suffixes, meaning one that, are -er and -or, as in 
 walker, sailor. 
 
 It is a good habit to note how words are formed. It al- 
 ways helps you to remember how to spell them, and it often 
 helps you to get at their meaning.
 
 120 Everyday English 
 
 134. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ABRAHAM LINCOLN 
 
 Abraham Lincoln was president of the United States in 
 the time of its greatest trial, during the terrible Civil War 
 between North and South. No leader of a nation ever had 
 
 Statue in Lincoln Park, Chicago, ky St. Gaudkns. 
 
 heavier duties or graver cares. Lincoln accomplished the 
 duties of his leadership with an ability and wisdom that
 
 Abraham Lincoln 121 
 
 have marked liira as one of the greatest men of the world's 
 history. In spite of the burden of the long years of war, he 
 remained unselfish, generous, sympathetic, and tender- 
 hearted as a child. Wlien the war was over, and he was 
 planning "Avith malice toward none, with charity for all, to 
 bind up the nation's wounds," his noble life was suddenly 
 ended by an assassin's bullet. Perhaps no man was ever 
 better loved or more deeply mourned. 
 
 Every child should know some of the facts of Lincoln's 
 life; of his boyhood struggle with poverty, his earnest effort 
 for an education, his success as a lawyer and statesman, his 
 lofty patriotism, his man}^ deeds of sympathy and kindness. 
 Incidents in his life and traits of his character should be 
 discussed in the class. There are biographies of Lincoln, 
 suitable for boys and girls, by Horace Scudder (Houghton), 
 Ida Tarbell (McClure), and Norman Hapgood (Macmilhln). 
 
 Here is Lincoln's own modest account of his life from 
 eiglit to twenty-one. 
 
 My father, at the death of his father, was but six years of 
 age, and he grew up literally without education. He removed tvoni 
 Kentucky to what is now Spencer County, Indiana, in my eighth 
 year. We reached our new home about the time the State came 
 into the Union. It was a wild region, with many bears and other 
 wild animals still in the woods. There I grew up. There were 
 some schools, so called, but no qualification was ever required of 
 a teacher beyond "veadiu', w^ritin', and cipherin'" to the rule of 
 three. If a straggler supposed to understand Latin happened to 
 sojourn in the neighborhood, he was looked upon as a wizard. 
 There was absolutely nothing to excite ambition for education. 
 Of course, when I came of age, I did not know much. Still, some- 
 how, I could read, write, and cipher to the rule of three, but that 
 was all. I have not been to school since. The little advance I
 
 122 Everyday English 
 
 now have upon this store of education I have picked up from time 
 to time under the pressure of necessity. 
 
 I was raised to farm work, which I continued till I was 
 twenty-two. At twenty-one I came to Illinois, Macon County. 
 Then I got to New Salem, at that time in Sangamon, now in 
 Menard rounty, where I remained a year as a sort of clerk in a 
 store. 
 
 135. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition on Abraham Lincoln. Divide the 
 composition into three parts, giving one paragraph to each 
 of tliese parts. 
 
 1. Lincoln's boj-hood. 
 
 2. Lincoln's public life. 
 
 3. Lincoln's character. 
 
 This division into parts is what is called an outline. Out- 
 lines are useful in writing and speaking. They help us to 
 keep our thoughts in order. Each part or division of an 
 outline is called a head : there are three heads in our 
 outline. 
 
 136. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 DOUBLE NEGATIVES 
 
 Simple Simon met a pieman going to the fair. 
 Said Simple Simon to the pieman, *'Let me taste your ware." 
 Said the pieman to Simple Simon, " Show me first your penny." 
 Said Simple Simon to the pieman, " Indeed, I have not any," 
 
 Study the punctuation and quotation marks until you can 
 write correctly from memory. It is Simple Simon's last 
 remark that is important for our language lesson. Suppose
 
 Double Negatives 123 
 
 he had said, " I have no penny," or " I have none." His 
 meaning would have been the same as, "I have not anyJ" 
 
 No means not any. None means not one. Nohody means 
 not anybody. Nothing means not anything. 
 
 Suppose, however, that Simon's grammar had been as 
 poor as his purse, and he had said, " I haven't no penny," 
 or "I haven't none." What nonsense that would have 
 been ! " I haven't no penny " = " I have not not any 
 penny." 
 
 Never use no or none, or nobody or nothing after not. 
 
 In the following sentences those in the first column have 
 not^ to be followed by awy, any one, anybody, anytliing. In 
 the second column the words lacking are no, none, nobody, 
 nothing. Fill the blanks so that both sentences, 1, 2, 3, etc., 
 shall have the same meaning : 
 
 1. I haven't time. I have time. 
 
 2. I do not want presents. I want presents. 
 
 3. I don't know body. I know body. 
 
 4. I haven't done . I have done 
 
 5 He doesn't care for . He cares for 
 
 6. You haven't seen . You have seen — 
 
 7. He would not say . He would say — 
 
 8. We shall not expect . We shall expect 
 
 Read over each column, filling in the blanks. When the 
 teacher reads one sentence, write the second sentence hav- 
 ing the same meaning. 
 
 Explain the negatives in these lines from the old song 
 "The Miller of Dee": 
 
 And this the burden of his song 
 Forever used to be, 
 " I envy no one, — no, not I ! 
 And no one envies me ! "
 
 124 Everyday Eiig-lisli 
 
 137. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A PICTURE STORY 
 
 Look ut the pictures on this and the o[)posite page. Do 
 
 they suggest a story? In the first 
 picture where is the rabbit? in tlie 
 woods or in a garden? What is he 
 doing? What do you suppose is hap- 
 pening on the other side of the cold- 
 frame? Suppose there is a dog coming 
 through the garden ; can he see the 
 rabbit? What will happen when the 
 dogf comes round the corner? What 
 is happening in the second picture? 
 Where is the rabbit going? Where is 
 his home? How far away is it? What 
 fields must he cross? Does he go 
 through any fences? over any stone walls? Has the rabbit 
 a wife and children waiting for him at home ? Imagine the 
 story of the chase, and describe any narrow escapes the rab- 
 
 
 bit has. Tell how the dog feels as he is shown in the third 
 picture, and how tlie rabbit feels as he appears in the
 
 A Picture Story 
 
 125 
 
 fourth picture. What 
 to the end of the story ? 
 Find a title for the 
 story and names for the 
 dog and the rabbit. 
 Several children may 
 tell the story, and we 
 will see how many dif- 
 ferent things the pic- 
 ture can suggest. Or, 
 
 does the fifth picture tell you as 
 
 three pictures. Perhaps 
 as the rabbit wo old tell i 
 
 one pupil may tell the story 
 as far as it is suggested by the 
 first picture ; another may 
 continue the story for the sec- 
 ond picture ; and another may 
 complete the story, following 
 the suggestions of the last 
 some pupil can tell the whole story 
 t to the little ones in the burrow.
 
 12G Everyday English 
 
 138. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of the dog and his rabbit hunt. Decide 
 how many paragraphs yoa will have and wliat each will tell 
 about. You may tell the story as it seemed to the dog, or 
 to the rabbit, or to an onlooker. After the compositions 
 are written read some of them aloud. See whether the sen- 
 tences are all good. Tf there are any bad sentences, have 
 them corrected on the board. The best of these stories may 
 be put in the class story book. 
 
 139. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 Select all the nouns, pronouns, and verbs in the fable in 
 Lesson 37. 
 
 State whether each noun or pronoun is singular or plural. 
 
 Give the possessive singular and plural of each noun. 
 
 Make five sentences, each containing the plural of one 
 noun and the past tense of one verb. 
 
 Select all the nouns, pronouns, and verbs in one of the 
 stories written in Lesson 138. 
 
 140. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE BIRD SHOP 
 
 Isn't this picture full of stories? Who can tell the story 
 of those great, gorgeous parrots? Where were they born? 
 How did they live in the forest? How were they captured? 
 How far did they travel before they came to the United 
 States ? What adventures did they have before they reached 
 the bird shop? How do they live there? Can they talk? 
 If he could talk as well as you can, what a story Mr. Parrot 
 would tell to the girl in the picture ! Tliere are many other
 
 THE BIRD SHOP
 
 Punctuation 127 
 
 birds in the bird shop besides the parrot. How many birds 
 do you know by sight? How many can you recognize by 
 their songs? There must be a canary in the bird shop; can 
 you tell its story? And what is the story of the goldfish? 
 What is the boy trying to teach the puppies? They don't 
 look as if they were learning very fast or as if they had much 
 of a story to tell. Their stories are in the future. Suppose 
 the boy buys one of the puppies for a pet ; can you imagine 
 the story of that puppy from the time he leaves the shop 
 until he becomes a big dog? We are sure that some kind 
 and thoughtful children will buy the rabbits and will take 
 good care of them. But even so, they are likely to have 
 some adventures to relate. Perhaps you have some pets that 
 you can tell stories about. Can you imagine a story about 
 the boy or the girl in the picture, how they came to the 
 bird store and what they are going to buy? Or, will you tell 
 a story about the old man wlio keeps the store? He must 
 have a whole library of animal stories under his skull cap. 
 For the oral lesson as many children as time permits are 
 to tell stories suggested by our picture. Before you begin, 
 arrange a brief outline in your mind. 
 
 141. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a story suggested by the picture in Lesson 140. 
 It will be interesting to see how many stories the picture 
 has suggested to different members of the class. 
 
 142. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PUNCTUATION 
 
 Punctuation is used to aid the eye of the reader. It 
 would be very difficult to read a page without any punctua- 
 tion marks. You could not tell when one sentence ended
 
 128 Everyday Englisli 
 
 and another began. The period and question mark show 
 a complete break in the sense. The sentence is ended ; the 
 reader pauses. The comma is used to mark shorter pauses 
 and less abrupt breaks in the sense. It is used to separate 
 words, or to show a slight pause or a change in the sense, or 
 an omission of a word. We have seen several uses, illus- 
 trated in the following sentences. Can you give the rules? 
 (See Lesson 100.) 
 
 Come, John, we are ready to go. 
 
 Yes, he is here. 
 
 James said, " I will go." 
 
 For Christmas he had a tool chest, a sled, and a necktie. 
 
 In all these cases some words are separated by commas 
 from others. Often one part of a sentence must be sepa- 
 rated from the rest, or the meaning may be misunderstood. 
 Examine the following sentences. Are two meanings pos- 
 sible ? Where should a comma be placed ? 
 
 Frank shot a crow and his father and mother praised him. 
 When the clock struck William John Davis started for home. 
 
 Always look over your compositions and decide whether 
 commas are needed to make the sense clear. 
 
 The semicolon is used, like the comma, to separate parts 
 of the sentence from other parts, but it shows a more marked 
 separation, or a longer pause than the comma. Turn to 
 Lesson 76 and see how semicolons are used there. 
 
 The colon is used in the salutation of a letter and before 
 a series of words. Notice the colon in Lesson 75. 
 
 The hyphen (see Lesson 100) is used between syllables of 
 a word when one part of the word comes at the end of one 
 line and the other part comes on the next line. It is also 
 used in compound words, as threshinff-rnaehine, verb-group.
 
 Proverbs 129 
 
 143. ORAL LESSON 
 
 PROVERBS 
 
 Most of the common proverbs are very old. In fact, people 
 made proverbs before they knew written language. They are found 
 among the savage and ignorant tribes of Africa and Asia, although, 
 strangely enough, not among the American Indians. Each proverb 
 states in a few words the result of much thinking and experience. 
 When we say, "Haste makes waste," we are merely repeating 
 what people learned thousands of years ago and have found to be 
 true in every generation since then. A proverb is always short, 
 and it often uses some particular instance or example to point a 
 general lesson. Thus when we say, "A new broom sweeps 
 clean," we mean that any new tool does its work more thoroughly 
 than an old, or that a new person at any job is likely to be more 
 thorough for a time than the person who preceded him. Some- 
 times, indeed, a proverb has several slightly different meanings. 
 
 In Lesson 78 tlie proverb "Haste makes waste" was illus- 
 trated by a few sentences; and in Lesson 72 a short story illus- 
 trated the proverb " Every cloud has a silver lining." Explain 
 the meaning or give examples to illustrate these proverbs. 
 
 A friend in need is a friend indeed. 
 Handsome is that handsome does. 
 A stitch in time saves nine. 
 He laughs best who laughs last. 
 A rolling stone gathers no moss. 
 A barking dog seldom bites. 
 Willful waste makes woeful want. 
 
 Many proverbs and familiar expressions seem to be re- 
 membered because of the rhyme or alliteration. Perhaps 
 your teacher will explain alliteration. 
 
 How many proverbs do you know? 
 
 K
 
 130 Everyday Engl i si i 
 
 144. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 "Write a story illustrating the meaning of one of the prov- 
 erbs in Lesson 143 or of some other proverb that you select. 
 Underline all the verbs or verb-groups in your composition. 
 
 145. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 SIMPLE SUBJECT, SIMPLE PREDICATE, MODIFIERS 
 
 As we have seen, every, sentence can be divided into its 
 complete subject and complete predicate. Li every com- 
 plete subject, the main word, either a noun or a pronoun, is 
 called the subject word, or the simple subject. In every 
 complete predicate, the main word, a verb or verb-group, 
 is the simple predicate. The simple subject is the word 
 that tells whom or what we are talking about. The simple 
 predica£e is the verb that tells something about the subject. 
 In tlie following sentences the vertical line separates the 
 complete subject from the complete predicate. The simple 
 subject and the simple predicate are printed in italics. 
 
 1. The great Hercules \ came at last to the garden of Hesperides. 
 
 2. Famous golden apples \ grew on a tree in the garden. 
 
 3. The deeds of Hercules | loere known all cjver the world. 
 
 4. With his club and lion's skin, he \ marched straight on. 
 
 In each sentence the complete subject is composed of the 
 simple subject (a noun or pronoun) and words which describe 
 or modify it. These are called modifiers. 
 
 Each complete predicate is composed of the simple predicate 
 (a verb or verb-group) and its modifiers. 
 
 Select the simple subjects and simple predicates in the 
 sentences in Lesson 106. 
 
 The simple subject of a sentence is a noun or pronoun. 
 
 The simple predicate of a sentence is a verb or verb-group.
 
 The Daffodils 181 
 
 146. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE DAFFODILS 
 
 I wandered, lonely as a cloud 
 
 That floats on high o'er vales and hills, 
 
 When all at once I saw a crowd, 
 
 A host, of golden daffodils ; 
 
 Beside the lake, beneath the trees. 
 
 Fluttering and dancing in the breeze. 
 
 Continuous as the stars that shine 
 And twinkle on the milky way, 
 They stretched in never-ending line 
 Along the margin of a bay : 
 Ten thousand saw I at a glance, 
 Tossing their heads in sprightly dance. 
 
 The waves beside them danced ; but they 
 
 Out-did the sparkling waves in glee : 
 
 A poet could not be but gay 
 
 In such a jocund company : 
 
 I gazed — and gazed — but little thought 
 
 What wealth the show to me had brought : 
 
 For oft, when on ray couch I lie 
 In vacant or in pensive mood. 
 They flash upon that inward eye 
 Which is the bliss of solitude ; 
 And then my heart with pleasure fills, 
 And dances with the daffodils. 
 
 William Wordsworth. 
 
 What is the meaning of sprightly, jocund, jjensive, solitude? 
 Note the order followed by the poet. The first and second 
 stanzas describe the daffodils as he saw them. The third
 
 132 Everyday English 
 
 stanza tells how lie felt about them. The fourth stanza tells 
 how the picture of the daffodils reappears in memory and 
 brings anew its lesson of joy. Note the picture that the poem 
 brings to the mind, to the " inward eye." Describe the pic- 
 ture you receive from the first two lines. Give the picture 
 of the daffodils along the lake. How do you see the waves ? 
 Note the words that aid in giving a picture of movement 
 among the flowers : JI uttering, dancing, twinkle, tossing, 
 sprightly. Some of these words and some others in the 
 poem help to give the feeling of joy. What are they? What 
 words help in showing us what a great crowd of daffodils 
 there were ? What is " a pensive mood," " the inward eye," 
 " the bliss of solitude " ? Commit the poem to memory. 
 
 William Wordsworth, one of the greatest English poets, 
 often wrote about flowers, birds, animals, and children. 
 Some of his poems that you should read are : " We are 
 Seven," " The Pet Lamb," " To the Cuckoo," " The Green 
 Linnet," "To a Butterfly," "The Daisy," "Lucy Gray," 
 " The Reverie of Poor Susan." 
 
 147. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition following this outline. Your teacher 
 will change the outline to suit tlie place and season. 
 What I see on my Walk to School: 
 (1) Flowers. (2) Trees. (3) Birds. (4) Other Animals. 
 
 148. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Some of the compositions written in Lesson 147 are to be 
 read aloud in the class. The teacher will select from these 
 compositions simple declarative sentences which are to be 
 analyzed. In each sentence select the simple subject and its 
 modifiers, and the simple predicate and its modifiers.
 
 Modifiers 133 
 
 149. ORAL LESSON 
 
 YOUR STATE 
 
 Have you studied in geography about tlie state in which 
 you live ? What are its boundaries? its rivers? its moun- 
 tains ? its lakes ? Has it any famous natural wonder, like 
 Niagara Falls, or the Yosemite Valley ? What can you tell 
 about its soil, its products, its industries ? How far have 
 you traveled in your state ? What are its chief cities ? 
 What are the industries of each ? Locate each. How would 
 you go to get from your state to New York ? to Chicago ? 
 to New Orleans ? to San Francisco ? What have we talked 
 about in this lesson which would make a good topic for a 
 written composition ? Is there some river or lake you could 
 describe? or some city? or some journey? Or you may tell 
 a story of the early settlement or history of your state. 
 
 150. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition on a topic selected from Lesson 149. 
 At the close of your composition, at the foot of the page, 
 write the name of a state (not your own) which you have 
 studied in geography, and which you can write a composition 
 about later on. (Lesson 153.) 
 
 Lessons 149, 150, 152, 153, may be used in connection with 
 the class work in geography. 
 
 151. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 MODIFIERS 
 
 Review Lesson 145. 
 
 Notice the difference in meaning in the following : 
 
 1. Dogs. 3. The black dogs. 
 
 2. The dogs. 4. The black dogs in our yard.
 
 l;]4 Everyday Kiiglisli 
 
 Bogs is a iiouii that names all dogs. The words the^ black, 
 in our yard, modify and add to the meaning of dogs. They 
 are called modifiers. 
 
 Suppose we wish to make a statement about these dogs. 
 We shall need a verb — hark. Notice the differences in 
 meaning in the following sentences : 
 
 1. The black dogs in our yard bark. 
 
 2. The black dogs in our yard bark loudly. 
 
 3. The black dogs in our yard bark loudly every night. 
 
 The words loudly and every night modify or add to the 
 meaning of the word bark. They are called modifiers. 
 
 Make sentences with the following modifiers of the simple 
 subject. 
 
 1. i)retty 4. little, black 
 
 2. red, on the bush 5. in the water 
 
 3. loud, in the schoolroom G. The old 
 
 What is the complete subject in each sentence ? 
 
 ]\Iake sentences with the following niodiliers of the simple 
 predicate: 
 
 1. politely 4. in a hurry 
 
 2. at half-past four 5. in Xew York 
 
 3. while the sun shines G. for an hour 
 
 What is the complete predicate in each sentence? 
 
 Modifiers are words which modify or limit the meaning of 
 other words. 
 
 The simple subject and its modifiers make the complete 
 subject of a sentence. 
 
 The simple predicate and its modifiers make the complete 
 predicate of a sentence.
 
 The States 
 
 135 
 
 152. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE STATES 
 
 How many stars are there in the flag ? What does each 
 star represent ? How many states are there ? In Lesson 
 150 you selected a state that you would like to write about. 
 If every one wrote about a different state, we should have an 
 account of nearly the whole United States. How many 
 states were there when the United States first became an 
 independent nation? How many stars were there in the 
 flag ? Where were these states located ? Who lived in the 
 rest of the ccuntry? Were there any cities west of the 
 Alleghany Mountains ? anj^ railroads ? Can you tell any- 
 thing about the settlement of the country? What is the 
 difference between a state and a territory ? What terri- 
 tories are there ? What islands are in the possession of the 
 United States ? Can you give an outline of the composi- 
 tion you are going to write about a state? What will you 
 speak of first ? second ? A few outlines may be put on the 
 board.
 
 136 Everyday .English 
 
 153. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition of two or three paragraphs about the 
 state which you selected. 
 
 154. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Some of the compositions written in Lesson 153 are to be 
 read in the class. After a composition is read, the class may 
 indicate the main ideas or the outline of the composition. 
 Are the paragraph divisions correct ? Did you notice any 
 mistakes in the use of words or sentences ? Was the com- 
 position clear at every point ? 
 
 155. ORAL LESSON 
 
 , CORN 
 
 When the New World was discovered, the Europeans found in 
 use among the Indians here three plants that were unknown in 
 Europe. These were tobacco, potatoes, and Indian corn, or maize. 
 All of them are now cultivated extensively throughout the civi- 
 lized world. Each of them is, in many regions, the jjrincipal crop. 
 
 Corn is grown in nearly every part of the United States ; and 
 our annual crop is nearly three thousand million bushels. In 
 the great fertile valley of the Mississippi, in Illinois, Indiana, 
 Missouri and other states — there are hundreds of thousands of 
 acres planted in corn every year. Corn is, indeed, in many of 
 these sections, the staple crop ; that is, the crop upon which the 
 farmers mainly depend. They use it to feed their horses, their 
 cattle, and their hogs, and they sell it in large quantities. It is a 
 food for human beings also. The meal can be made into whole- 
 some and palatable breads and cereals, and the whole grain is 
 often used as hominy or samp. No more valuable legacy was 
 left us by the Indians.
 
 Cor 
 
 n 
 
 137 
 
 The growing of corn is a very interesting process. The soil 
 must be very fertile. In the early spring as soon as the ground 
 grows dry and warm, it is plowed and harrowed until it 
 is well pulverized. Then the corn is planted, by hand or wfl 
 by machine, in furrows about two or three feet apart. ^ 
 The seeds are carefully selected from the biggest and best ears of 
 
 the corn, and not from the ends 
 of the ear. 
 
 In about a week after plant- 
 ing, the ground begins to crack 
 over the seeds, and soon the tiny 
 round yellow shoots of the corn 
 burst through. These turn 
 green, and, as they push up- 
 ward, open into two long leaves, shaped at first like 
 a pointed finger tip and later like a broad blade of 
 
 grass. When the stalks are 
 well advanced, six inches 
 high or more, the ground 
 must be cultivated between 
 the furrows, by hoe, or plow, 
 or cultivator. This process, 
 which is repeated at inter- 
 vals of several weeks until 
 the corn has grown tall, 
 serves not only to keep down 
 the weeds, but also to keep 
 the moisture in the soil. 
 
 Within three or four 
 months after planting the 
 corn has reached its full 
 height, — from six to fifteen 
 feet, according to the kind
 
 1)38 Everyday Englisli 
 
 of corn, the soil, and the temperature. Being a warm weather 
 plant, it grows best where there is abundant sunshine. Under a 
 gray sky, like that of Great Britain, it will not thrive. It does 
 best under brilliant skies like those of Italy or the United States. 
 
 Tell about the growing of corn, potatoes, tobacco, cotton, 
 or some other crop that j^ou know about. 
 Do you know Whittier's " Corn Song " ? 
 
 156. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 SENTENCE BUILDING 
 
 Make sentences using one of the following nouns in each 
 subject. Add to that noun at least one niodilier. 
 
 Example : Balloon. The great balloon rose quietly from the 
 earth. 
 
 corn United States 
 
 cotton Italy 
 
 hills Mississippi 
 
 ears potatoes 
 
 plow furrow 
 
 Make sentences, using one of the following verbs in eiu'li 
 predicate, with some modifiers : 
 
 Example: Scamper. Away scampered all the mischievous 
 youngsters. 
 
 plant are produced 
 
 feed , will throw 
 
 select may be going 
 
 cultivate can find 
 
 Make sentences using one of the following modifiers in 
 each sentence : golden^ sparkling, jocund, Q'^Vi vacant, pen- 
 sive, continuous, sprightly, inward. AV^here have you seen 
 these adjectives before?
 
 / Adjectives 139 
 
 157. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 Look at these expressions : a brave girl, a gray squirrel, 
 the tallest building, the merry music. Girl^ squirrel^ build- 
 ing^ music, are nouns. The other words, brave, gray, tallest^ 
 merry, are modifiers (Lesson 151). They add to, or modify, 
 the meaning of the nouns. Each goes with a noun. They 
 are adjectives. Words that add meaning to nouns or pro- 
 nouns are called adjectives. 
 
 Sometimes an adjective is next to its noun ; as. The tall 
 boy. Sometimes it is separated from its noun ; as. The boy 
 seems to me very tall. But the adjective always adds some- 
 thing to the meaning of its noun or pronoun. Turn to the 
 poem, " The Land of Counterpane," Lesson 46. The adjec- 
 tives in that poem are : sick, two, happy, leaden, different, great, 
 still, pleasant. With what nouns or pronouns do they belong ? 
 
 A, an, and the are adjectives, but they are often called 
 articles. They are very small, but very necessary articles. 
 
 Select the simple subject and the adjectives that modify 
 it in the following sentences : 
 
 1. The tall, homely man was Abraham Lincoln. 
 
 2. His next visitor had forced her way past the doorkeeper. 
 
 3. This sweet-faced little woman had come all the way from 
 
 Ohio to beg for the life of her son. 
 
 4. The poor boy had fallen asleep at his post. 
 
 5. The kind and patient president listened to her story. 
 
 6. A few words were written on a piece of paper. 
 
 7. His sad face lightened with a smile. 
 
 8. That little piece of paper was a pardon for the boy. 
 
 A word used to add something to the meaning of a noun or 
 pronoun is an adjective.
 
 140 Everyday English 
 
 158. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ROBERT E. LEE 
 
 In any list of great Americans the name of Robert E. 
 Lee must take a high phice. The Civil War tested men's 
 
 abilities and characters as has 
 no other period in our liistory. 
 Lincoln was the greatest man 
 whom that war revealed in the 
 North, and Lee was unques- 
 tionably the greatest South- 
 erner. In many respects he 
 and Lincoln were very differ- 
 ent. Lee was a remarkably 
 handsome, dignified man, 
 finely educated, and from one 
 of the most distinguished 
 American families. Lincoln 
 was homely and awkward, with 
 almost no schooling, and with 
 none of the advantages that family and culture bring. But 
 both men were alike in their modesty, unselfishness, and de- 
 votion to dut3^ Lee was a great general, Lincoln a great 
 statesman ; and both were great in character as well as 
 ability. Every one who knew General Lee loved and ad- 
 mired him. Every one knew that it would be impossible 
 for him to do anything mean, cowardly, dishonest or selfish. 
 Now, many years after the great war, men of the North 
 appreciate and honor Lee, as men of the South appreciate 
 and honor Lincoln. We are proud that our country has 
 produced such great and good men. 
 
 Here is a ])ortion of a letter that General Lee wrote to 
 his wife on Christmas day, 1862, after his great victory over
 
 Eobert E. Lee 141 
 
 General Burnside at Fredericksburg. What do you learn 
 from it in regard to the character of General Lee ? 
 
 " I will commence this holy day by writing to you. My heart is 
 filled with gratitude to Almighty God for His unspeakable mercies 
 with which He has blessed us in this day, for those He has 
 granted us from the beginning of life, and particularly for those 
 He has vouchsafed us during the past year. What should have 
 become of us without His crowning help and protection ? Oh, if 
 our people would only recognize it and cease from vain self- 
 boasting and adulation, how strong would be my belief in final 
 success and happiness to our country ! But what a cruel thing is 
 war ; to separate and destroy families and friends, and mar the 
 purest joys and happiness God has granted us in this world; to 
 fill our hearts with hatred instead of love for our neighbors, and 
 to devastate the fair face of this beautiful world ! I pray that, 
 on this day when only peace and good-will are preached to 
 mankind, better thoughts may fill the hearts of our enemies and 
 turn them to peace. . . . My heart bleeds at the death of every 
 one of our gallant men." 
 
 Other interesting letters will be found in his son's "Recol- 
 lections and Letters of General Lee." Doubleday, Page, and Co. 
 
 You have beard stories from time to time of fine and noble 
 traits in our American heroes ; of Washington, or Lincoln, 
 or Lee, or Grant. Can you recall any such incidents ? 
 
 You have often been reminded, at home and in school, of 
 the value of good manners. Have you stopped to think 
 what good manners mean, and why they are worth while ? 
 Do you like to be treated with disrespect ? to have your 
 feelings hurt ? to have your rights disregarded ? to have 
 your proper pleasures interfered with ? Remember that 
 other people think just as much of their personal dignity,
 
 142 Everyday English 
 
 their feelings, their rights, and their pleasures, as you do of 
 yours. And that is why good manners are really the 
 practice of the Golden Rule , " Do unto others as you would 
 have them do unto you." 
 
 What do you think true politeness is? What are some of 
 the things you should remember to do? some of the things 
 not to do? What instances of fine courtesy can you recall? 
 
 159. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write an account of any generous action that you have 
 read of, heard of, or experienced. 
 
 160. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 TROUBLESOME VERBS: SIT OR SET 
 
 Sit, sits, sat, has sat, will sit, sitting, are all forms of the 
 verb meaning to stay or rest somewhere. 
 
 Set, sets, has set, will set, settiiig, are forms of another verb 
 meaning to place or put something somewhere. 
 
 Read these sentences over carefully until 3'ou are sure you 
 know the correct use of the verbs, sit and set. 
 
 I sit in this chair. My father has sat there an hour. The cat 
 is sitting on the window sill. T set tlie vase on the mantel. The 
 maid sets the dishes on the table. The gardener is setting out the 
 plants. The nurse sets the baby in his carriage, and he sits there 
 happy as a king. 
 
 Fill in these blanks with correct forms of sit and set. 
 
 1 . Please the broom in the closet. 
 
 2. Henry has his watch by the clock. 
 
 3. John tli(> watering-can on Iho steps. 
 
 4. Is he still in his chair? 
 
 5. He has there for an liour.
 
 Troublesome Verbs 
 
 143 
 
 6. Who the dog after my cat ? 
 
 7. The cat there waiting for her mistress. 
 
 8. Who is the leaves on fire ? 
 
 As we have seen, a verb may be a single word or a group 
 of words which form a verb-group. Sometimes the words 
 forming a verb-group may be separated from each other in 
 a sentence. He wiiY^ s^f there. IF«7Hie siY there ? 
 
 Use the following verb-groups correctly in sentences: 
 
 will sit would not sit has been setting 
 
 do not set 
 wouldn't set 
 
 am sitting 
 
 have been sitting 
 may have sat 
 
 am settmg 
 shall set 
 is setting 
 
 hadn't sat 
 
 161. ORAL LESSON 
 
 OLD IRONSIDES 
 
 One of the most famous ships that ever carried the American 
 flag into battle is the frigate Con- 
 stitution. It was built in 1797, 
 and gained the popular nickname 
 " Old Ironsides " by its victories 
 over British ships in the war of 
 1812. In 1833 it was proposed to 
 destroy the good ship, which had 
 grown useless for warfare. 
 
 Oliver Wendell Holmes, then 
 a young man, wrote the following 
 verses in protest. The poem was 
 printed in newspapers all over 
 the country, and nothing more 
 was heard of the proposal to destroy the Constitution. In fact, it 
 still exists in the Charlestown navy-yard.
 
 144 Everyday English 
 
 Aye, tear her tattered ensign down ! 
 
 Long has it waved on high, 
 And many an eye has danced to see 
 
 That banner in the sky ; 
 Beneath it rung the battle shout, 
 
 And burst the cannon's roar; — 
 The meteor of the ocean air 
 
 Shall sweep the clouds no more. 
 
 Her deck, once red with heroes' blood. 
 
 Where knelt the vanquished foe, 
 When winds were hurrying o'er the flood, 
 
 And waves were white below, 
 No more shall feel the victor's tread, 
 
 Or know the conquered knee ; — 
 The harpies of the shore shall pluck 
 
 The eagle of the sea ! 
 
 Oh, Letter that her shattered hulk 
 
 Should sink beneath the wave ; 
 Her thunders shook the mighty deep. 
 
 And there should be her grave ; 
 Nail to the mast her holy flag. 
 
 Set every threadbare sail, 
 And give her to the God of storms, 
 
 The lightning and the gale ! 
 
 Oi.ivKu Wendell Holmes, 
 
 You may have heard something of the history of Old Troyisides. 
 Among her famous victories were those with the liritisli frigate, 
 Gaerrihe, in the north Atlantic ; with the Java off Brazil ; and 
 with the Gyane and Levant off Portugal. Another famous exploit 
 was her escape from a squadron of five British vessels. The
 
 Old Ironsides 
 
 145 
 
 Constitution was a full-rigged ship, and she set all her sails so as 
 to catch every bit of breeze. The British vessels also set all sail, 
 for the wind was very light. Captain Hull of the Constitution 
 next tried kedging. All the spare rope was attached to the cable, 
 and the anchor carried by one of the rowboats half a mile ahead 
 of the ship, and let go. Then the crew worked merrily taking in 
 the rope and pulling the good ship up to the anchor. In this way 
 she escaped the nearest British frigate, which was being towed 
 by all the boats in the squadron. After a chase that occupied 
 four exciting days, Captain Hull, by splendid seamanship, finally 
 brought his ship safe into Boston Harbor. 
 
 The full story of the Constitution can be found in any history 
 of the United States, or in Theodore Roosevelt's The Naval War
 
 14G Everyday English 
 
 of 1812, or in Lossing's Story of the American Navy, or Horace 
 Scudder's Boclley Children. 
 
 Read the poem again aloud. Explain the meaning of 
 kedge, ensign, meteor, harpies, hulk, vaiiquished. P]xplain 
 the expressions, " The meteor of the ocean air," " the 
 harpies of the shore," " the eagle of the sea." Commit 
 the poem to memory. 
 
 What can you tell of Oliver Wendell Holmes ? Do you 
 know any other of his poems : " Union and liberty," " Con- 
 tentment," " Ode for Washington's Birthday," " The One 
 Hoss Shay," " The Chambered Nautilus " ? 
 
 162. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 SENTENCE BUILDING 
 
 Write five sentences, using the following nouns as simple 
 subjects, and adding one or more adjectives as modifiers of 
 each subject. 
 
 1. ensign 2. frigate 3. squadron 4. sails 5. waves 
 
 Write five sentences, using the following verbs as simple 
 predicates, and adding other words as modifiers of each verb. 
 Do not use any of the subjects that you used in the exercise 
 above. 
 
 1. waved 2. danced 3. sweep 4. knelt 5. shall feel 
 
 Exchange papers. First mark all mistakes in capitals, 
 punctuation, and spelling with a X. Does each of the first 
 five sentences contain the given noun as simple subject with 
 an adjective as modifier ? If so, write a C after the sen- 
 tence. If not, write a W. Mark the last five sentences in 
 the same way. 
 
 Return the papers. Study your mistakes. How many 
 crosses? How many W's?
 
 Lie or Lay 147 
 
 163. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 LIE OR LAY 
 
 Lie, lies, lying, apply to anything that reclines or rests. 
 
 Lay, lays, laying apply to putting or placing something. 
 
 Lay is also the past form of lie, so, / lay may mean L ivas 
 reclining. 
 
 Laid is the past form of lay, meaning put or place, and 
 never means to rest or recline. Laid is also the form of lay 
 used with has, have, or had. Lain is the form of lie used 
 with has, have, or had. 
 
 Supply the blanks with the proper form lie, lies, lay, or laid. 
 
 1. The hen the eggs in the nest. 
 
 2. The eggs in the nest. 
 
 3. Last night I on the couch. 
 
 4. Last night I the book on that table. 
 
 5. He the pencil there. 
 
 6. There the pencil until you took it. 
 
 7. • your book down, please. 
 
 8. down and rest. 
 
 9. The cattle had in the grass all night. 
 
 10. Pie had the book on the table. 
 
 11. Have they in bed too late ? 
 
 12. Will the mason the bricks to-morrow ? 
 
 13. I shall in the hammock. 
 
 14. I haven't down to-night. 
 
 Name five sentences using lay, meaning to put or place. 
 
 Name five sentences using lay, the past tense of lie. 
 
 Make three sentences using laid ; three using lain. 
 
 For an additional lesson, use the forms of lie and lay and 
 of other troublesome verbs in a game as described in Les- 
 son 110.
 
 14(S Everyday English 
 
 1G4. ORAL LESSON 
 
 AN UNFINISHED STORY 
 
 Out in the country, one of the common amusements of the boys 
 is to wander in groups through the woods and fields looking for 
 any kind of excitement they may find. They generally take a 
 dog or two with them, and the dog often contributes to their 
 amusement. The boys fish, hunt for birds' nests, find snakes in 
 bushes and under stones, and chase squirrels or rabbits. 
 
 One of our American poets, James Whitcomb Riley, spent his 
 boyhood in the country in Indiana, and has written many poems 
 of boy life there. Here is a short one that describes such an 
 incident as he may have often seen. 
 
 Rabbit in the cross-ties. — Watch him on the south side — 
 
 Punch him out — (piick ! Watch him on the — Hi ! 
 
 Git a twister on him There he goes ! Sic him, Tige ! 
 
 With a long prong stick. Yi ! Yi ! ! Yi ! ! ! 
 
 The cross-ties are logs such as are used to put under the 
 rails on a railroad. "• Tige " is the name of the dog, being 
 short for Tiger. Now can you make out the whole story ? 
 Imagine the whole scene, and describe it as clearly and 
 definitely as you can. Invent details when you think they 
 are necessary to make the story good. 
 
 165. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write out the story you have built up in Lesson 164. 
 Each pupil may make a story to suit himself. 
 
 166. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Exchange compositions, and criticise them, as in Les- 
 son 127.
 
 Lion Family 
 
 149 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1 
 
 
 Wfwit 
 
 ' "*^ '- ^'.<I^BE«*.. 
 
 
 *** 
 
 
 167. ORAL LESSON 
 
 LION FAMILY 
 
 This picture is from a painting by Rosa Bonhenr, a famous 
 Frenchwoman who lived from 1822 to 1899. She was very fond 
 of animals, and spent much of her time outdoors among her 
 friends, or studying wild animals in the zoological gardens. She 
 became one of the most skillful painters of animals who have ever 
 lived. Among her paintings are some that you should know ; 
 " The Horse Fair," •' A Noble Charger," "Coming from the Fair," 
 " An Old Monarch " (a lion), " Meditation " (a donkey). 
 
 Study the picture carefully so that you can give a brief 
 oral description of it. Does it show a happy family ? Are 
 there other pictures of animals in tliis book ? What are 
 they ? Can you find one by Sir Edwin Landseer, another 
 famous painter of animals ? 
 
 Writers often make pictures in words of objects, animals, 
 scenes, and persons. These word pictures are called descrip-
 
 150 Everyday English 
 
 tions. Try to give in a few sentences a description of the 
 lions in the picture, or of some animal that you know. 
 
 Interestinsf books about animals are Dr. John Brown's 
 Rab and his Friends^ SewalFs Black Beauty, l^ondon's The 
 Call of the Wild, and White Fang, OUivant's Boh, Son of 
 Battle, Pierre Loti's Lives of Two Cats, Kipling's Junyle 
 Books. 
 
 168. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 AN EXERCISE IN DESCRIPTION 
 
 Select one of the following topics for description. Think 
 carefully of the details that will make the picture clear to 
 you and to your reader. Don't say merely that a thing is 
 tine, or pretty, or ugly. Tell, instead, the thing that makes 
 it fine, or pretty, or ugly to you. For example : 
 
 " My dog is a handsome animal. He is almost as high as my 
 waist, and his body is long and slender. His long hair is brown- 
 ish red, and so soft and silky that it glistens in the sunlight. His 
 head is small, his jaws long and narrow, and his eyes are bright 
 and friendly. When he looks at you, it almost seems as if he 
 were smiling and saying, 'Come and have a romp with me.'" 
 
 Choose one of these subjects and describe it : 
 
 1. My cat 5. My room 
 
 2. My bird 0. Our house 
 
 3. My garden 7. Our schoolroom 
 
 4. The swimming hole 8. Our playground 
 
 169. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 In these exercises, a (question is followed by several an- 
 swers. Fill in the blanks with the correct words.
 
 A Review 151 
 
 1. Who is here ? I . He . She . 
 
 2. Who was here yesterday ? I . He . She . 
 
 You . 
 
 3. AVho has learned the lesson? I . He , She . 
 
 You . We all it. 
 
 4. Who sees this book ? I it. He it. She it. 
 
 Do you it ? 
 
 5. Who saw that mistake ? I it. He it. She 
 
 it. They all it. We all it. 
 
 In place of the following singular pronouns and verbs, 
 supply plural pronouns and plural verbs. Instead of / saiv, 
 say we saw. Instead of he sees, say thei/ see. Sometimes 
 the plural is the same as the singular. 
 
 I am. That boy saw. He runs. 
 
 He does. It wasn't. Has she seen ? 
 
 She doesn't. He sat. Has he been ? 
 
 This boy sees. You run. Was it good ? 
 
 Change all the verbs from present to past tense. 
 
 I am ready. The lion roars. I see the lion is in a cage. 
 
 He is good. Are you afraid ? It has strong bars. 
 
 She has a penny. Xo, I am not. I don't care if he roars. 
 
 He sees a lion. Why aren't you ? It doesn't hurt me. 
 
 You have used the pronouns J, he, it, she, you. What are 
 the possessives of these words? What are the plurals? 
 What are the possessives of the plurals ? 
 
 Which of the following words are possessive ? Make 
 sentences, using these Avords correctly. 
 
 his my its whose 
 
 him our it's she 
 
 their your they her 
 
 those it them us
 
 152 Everyday English 
 
 170. ORAL LESSON 
 
 BUSINESS LETTERS 
 
 Almost every one nowadays needs sometimes to write a 
 business letter. Here are two examples : 
 
 125 Broadway,. Rochester, N.Y. 
 April 16, I'.Ul. 
 
 Mr. E. B. Kyan, 
 Williamsport, Pa. 
 
 My dear Sir : 
 
 Your order for 250 hedge plants arrived to-day. The plants 
 will be shipped to you by express at the earliest possible date. 
 If you do not receive them by April 20, kindly write us and in- 
 form us of the fact. 
 
 Sincerely yours, 
 
 C. H. Gardner. 
 
 Williamsport, Pa., 
 April 19, 1911. 
 Mr. C. H. Gardner, 
 
 Rochester, N.Y. 
 Dear Sir : 
 
 The plants arrived to-day in good condition. I thank you for 
 your promptness in filling the order. 
 
 Sincerely yours, 
 
 E. B. Ryan. 
 
 In eacli of these examples, notice (1) that the addresses 
 of the writer and of the person to whom it is written are 
 given ; (2) that the letters are short ; and (3) that they 
 are perfectly clear. They are also entirely formal in tone, 
 and contain nothing except the business in hand. 
 
 Discuss what you would have to say in letters on the fol-
 
 Shall and Will 153 
 
 lowing matters ; then dictate tlie letter as a business man 
 would dictate it to his stenographer : 
 
 1. An order to a merchant for half a dozen tennis balls. 
 
 2. A letter to the express company calling attention to the 
 
 fact that they have overcharged you for deUvering a 
 trunk. 
 
 3. A letter inclosing payment by postal money order for a 
 
 book. 
 
 4. A subscription to a paper. 
 
 5. An appointment by mail for an intervievsr. 
 
 6. An excuse to the teacher for an absence. 
 
 7. An answer to this advertisement : 
 
 Wanted. — A boy about fourteen to work in a lawyer's office 
 during the summer vacation. He must be willing and intelligent. 
 Address Box 174, Sun Office. 
 
 171. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write an appropriate letter applying for tlie position in 
 Example 7 of the preceding lesson. Give briefly and clearly 
 the reasons why you think you could do the work well. The 
 letters may be compared in order to see who would be most 
 likely to secure the position. 
 
 172. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 SHALL AND WILL. VERB-GROUPS 
 
 I shall and toe shall refer to what is likely to happen. 
 I ivill and we will express willingness or purpose. 
 In questions, always use shall I? shall ive ? 
 
 I shall be tired after the walk. 
 
 We shall not have time. 
 
 I will win the prize if I can.
 
 are 
 
 were 
 
 is 
 
 has been 
 
 am 
 
 have been 
 
 was 
 
 had been 
 
 l.")4 Everyday Eii<i,lisli 
 
 We will help you with your lessons. 
 Shall I open the door ? 
 Shall we see you at church ? 
 
 Make sentences, using- /and we with shall and will. 
 
 We have seen that one verb may have many forms. What 
 is a verb-group ? Among the forms of the verb he are the 
 following : 
 
 will be is being 
 
 shall be was being 
 
 will have been to be 
 
 shall have been to have been 
 
 Make a sentence for each of these forms, using as subject, 
 /, he., or they, as may be proper. 
 
 ExAMPLK : I was to have been there at noon. 
 
 Some verb-groups of the verb talk are : have talked, ivill 
 talk, shall talk, am talking, have been talking. Make a sen- 
 tence, using each form with / for a subject, and with one 
 adverb modifying tlie verb. 
 
 173. ORAL LESSON 
 
 BUSINESS LETTERS. PROTESTS 
 
 Not all the letters in the business world are easy to write. 
 Sometimes one must call attention to errors or injustices; 
 overcharges, neglect, even dishonesties, must sometimes be 
 taken up by letter. 
 
 It is important that any complaint you make be dignified 
 and courteous. You gain nothing by being abusive. Do 
 not assume that the other man intended to do wrong. He 
 may be as honest as you are, and you sometimes make mis- 
 takes yourself. 
 
 What would you say in some of the following cases?
 
 Telegrams 155 
 
 Frame your protest as if you were making it over the 
 telephone, or dictating it to your stenographer. 
 
 1. A roll of silk is delivered one yard short. 
 
 2. The grocer sent bad butter last week, 
 
 3. The laundry sent home some collars and handkerchiefs 
 badly injured. 
 
 4. You find yourself charged, in the milkman's bill, with two 
 more bottles of cream than you had. 
 
 5. You were away from home during August, and the house 
 was closed. But you got a gas bill of the usual size, just the 
 same. 
 
 174. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 TELEGRAMS 
 
 Writing telegrams is a valuable exercise. It teaches one 
 to be brief and to the point; for, except in night letters, one 
 must pay extra for more than ten words. But it is not 
 always easy to make ten words clear. 
 
 1. Arrived twelve to-night. All well at home. Letter follows. 
 
 This is entirely clear. Can you fill it out as it would be 
 spoken ? 
 
 How would you word a telegram to a friend announcing 
 that you will arrive at the Polk St. Station in Chicago at 
 four o'clock on Wednesday next, asking him to meet you in 
 his automobile, and informing him that you are not bringing 
 a trunk with you ? In how few words can you say this ? 
 
 Try to say in ten words or less that you have received the 
 parcel of sporting goods, but that there are two tennis balls 
 and one golf club missing. 
 
 Invent material for other telegrams, and have your class- 
 mates try to write the messages.
 
 15(3 Everyday English 
 
 175. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ADVERBS 
 
 The black clog is barking. 
 Tiie black dog is barking now. 
 The black dog is barking there. 
 The black dog is barking loudly. 
 
 In tlie first sentence j'ou know that the and black are 
 adjectives, dog is a noun, and ix harking a verb. \n the 
 other sentences now^ there, and loudly are adverbs. Now 
 tells when tlie dog is barking, tliere tells where he is barking, 
 loudly tells how he is barking. Words used to modify the 
 meaning of verbs are called adverbs. Adverbs usually 
 modify the meaning of verbs by telling when, where, or how. 
 
 Some adverbs answering the question when ? are : now^ 
 soon, already, ever, never, seldom, once, to-day. 
 
 Some adverbs answering the question where? are: down, 
 out, there, here, below. 
 
 Some adverbs answering the question how? are : gently, 
 loudly, fiercely, nobly, grandly. 
 
 Other common adverbs are : very, too, more, most, quite, 
 rather. They often are used to modify the meaning of 
 a<ljectives or other adverbs as well as verbs. 
 
 Make a sentence containing each adverb mentioned above. 
 State with what verb, adjective, or other adverb it is con- 
 nected. 
 
 Adverbs are words used to modify the meaning of verbs, 
 adjectives, or other adverbs. 
 
 If your lips you would preserve from slips, 
 Five things observe with care : 
 Of whom you speak, to whom you speak, 
 And hoiv and tvhen and where.
 
 Clear Eiiimciatioii 157 
 
 176. ORAL LESSON 
 
 CLEAR ENUNCIATION 
 
 Have you ever been in a great cit}^ railway station ? How 
 were the departing trains announced ? Could you under- 
 stand the familiar names better than tlie unfamiliar ? If the 
 announcer called out Poughkeepsie, Albany, Buffalo, and 
 Chicago, would it be plainer to you than if he called out a 
 string of foreign names ? Is it important to enunciate 
 clearly ? Why ? Do you speak distinctly ? Try the fol- 
 lowing lists, saying them so clearly that a foreigner might 
 understand you. Bridgeport — New Haven — New London 
 — Stonington — Providence — Boston : Boston Express ! ! 
 
 Trenton — Philadelphia — Lancaster — Harrisburg — Al- 
 toona — and Pittsburgh : Pittsburgh Express ! ! 
 
 Albany — Rochester — Buffalo — Cleveland and Chicago : 
 Chicago Express ! ! 
 
 What train announcements do you remember ? 
 
 Let some member of the class pronounce five names of per- 
 sons or places, and call upon some one to repeat the names. 
 Were the names correctly repeated ? If not, was it the first 
 speaker's fault ? 
 
 177, WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition, selecting one of these topics and 
 following the outline. 
 
 The Robin: (1) Its appearance, (2) Its food and habits, (3) 
 Its relation to other birds. 
 
 The Oak Tree: (1) Where it is found, (2) Its appearance, 
 growth, etc., (3) Its uses. 
 
 The Police : (1) How they are appointed, (2) How they are 
 dressed, (3) What their duties are.
 
 158 Everyday English 
 
 The Push-Cart Mex : (1) How they are dressed, (2) "UTiat 
 tliey sell, (3) AAliere they are seen. 
 
 The Postman : (1) His uniform, (2) His duties. 
 
 178. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 1. In the following sentences select the adverbs. What 
 words do they modify ? 
 
 2. Make sentences, using one of the following adverbs in 
 each sentence: already, seldom, yesterday, here, yonder, quite, 
 rather, twice, possibly. 
 
 1. George and May watched the ripening corn eagerly. 
 
 2. They often talked of plucking the ears. 
 
 3. They got up early and dressed quickly. 
 
 4. The squirrel had been there already. 
 
 5. He now began to scold them angrily. 
 
 6. " How angry he is to-day ! " said May. 
 
 3. Make sentences each containing an adverb not men- 
 tioned in this lesson. 
 
 179. ORAL LKSSON 
 
 WHEAT 
 
 There are only a few kinds of grain that are much used for 
 food by human beings. Among these, two stand out above the 
 others : rice is the grain that is most used in Asia, and wheat 
 makes the bread of the nations of Europe and America. These 
 two cereals are the principal food of the majority of the fifteen 
 hundred million people in the world. 
 
 Wheat is grown in the temperate zones. It is not, like rice, a 
 plant of the hot climates. Although it is cultivated in many 
 places, the greatest wheat fields of the world are in the northern 
 part of the United States, in Canada, and in Russia. These three
 
 The Story of Wheat 159 
 
 regions export many millions of bushels to the rest of the world. 
 A failure of the wheat crop in any one of these sections would 
 mean great distress, not only in these places, but in the countries 
 to which they are accustomed to send their wheat or their flour. 
 
 Wheat is commonly planted in the fall. The soil must be fer- 
 tile, and must be first plowed and then harrowed until it becomes 
 loose and light. The seed was formerly scattered by hand, and 
 then worked into the soil by brushes dragged over it. Now it is 
 planted by a drill, a machine which inserts the seed in little rows 
 that it makes as it is pulled along by horses. 
 
 The young plants appear in a week or two, and, if the soil is 
 rich, and the season favorable, the ground will be covered by the 
 beautiful emerald green of the wheat before the winter closes in. 
 
 Wheat is a hardy plant, and can live through a good deal of 
 cold weather. But if the snow falls early and lies on the ground 
 all winter, the young plants are all the better for this soft, warm 
 covering. In certain places, however, the cold of the winter is 
 too intense for the young plant to live through it. In some of 
 our northwestern states, therefore, and in parts of western Canada, 
 the seed must be sown in the spring. This is known in the mar- 
 kets as spring wheat ; that planted in the autumn is called fall 
 wheat ; the fall wheat is of firmer and better quality. 
 
 Wheat raising in our country is an industry of enormous size. 
 Millions of acres are planted every year, and a good crop, averag- 
 ing twenty bushels to the acre, makes a total of seven or eight 
 hundred million bushels. As wheat is worth about a dollar a 
 bushel, you can see the benefit to the country of a good wheat 
 crop. 
 
 The :-eaping or harvesting of the crop is a big affair. On the 
 large farms of the northwest there are often from twenty to a 
 hundred thousand acres of wheat to be cut. In one of these great 
 fields there may be ten or even twenty reaping machines drawn 
 by engines moving steadily across the field, cutting the golden
 
 ICO 
 
 F. very (lav F.iiulisli 
 
 brown grain ami dropping it in neatly bound bundles called 
 sheaves. These sheaves are gathered up by a crowd of men, and 
 either placed together in small tent-like piles called shocks, or 
 hauled directly to the threshing machines. Into these threshers, 
 huge machines that are operated by engines, the sheaves of wheat 
 are thrust, head foremost. They pass between rapidly revolving 
 cylinders spiked with pieces of iron. The grains of wheat are 
 thus knocked loose from the straw and chaff. The straw and 
 chaff are blown out in a never-ending cloud at the other end of 
 the thresher, and the wheat pours out of the bottom of the 
 machine in a golden-brown stream. Here it is caught in sacks, 
 and is ready to be sent to the mills where it will be ground into 
 Hour. 
 
 Read this selection orally. Make an outline of it. Sev- 
 eral members of the class are to be called upon to repeat the 
 substance of the selection as an oral composition. These 
 oral compositions are to be criticised for order and fullness 
 of material and for clearness of speech and correctness of 
 punctuation.
 
 /. A Threshing Scene 161 
 
 180. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A THRESHING SCENE 
 
 Study this selection and write it from dictation: 
 
 On all sides now the wagons of the plowmen or threshers were 
 getting out into the fields, with a pounding, rumbling sound. 
 
 The pale-red sun was shooting light through the leaves, and 
 warming the boles of the great oaks that stood in the yard, and 
 melting the frost off the great, gaudy, red- and gold-striped thresh- 
 ing machine standing between the stacks. The horses stood 
 about in a circle, hitched to the ends of the six sweeps, every rod 
 shining with frost. 
 
 The driver started the horses. The whirring cylinder boomed, 
 roared, and snarled as it rose in speed. At last, when its tone 
 became a rattling yell, David nodded to the pitchers and rasped 
 his hands together. The sheaves began to fall from the stack ; the 
 band-cutter, knife in hand, slashed the bands in twain, and the 
 feeder, with easy majestic movement, gathered them under his 
 arm, rolled them out into an even belt of entering wheat, on 
 which the cylinder tore with its smothered, ferocious snarl. 
 
 Will was very happy in a quiet way. He enjoyed the smooth 
 roll of his great muscles, and the sense of power in his hands as 
 he lifted, turned, and swung the heavy sheaves two by two upon 
 the table, where the band-cutter madly slashed away. 
 
 This scene, one of the jolliest and the most sociable of the 
 Western farm, had a charm quite aside from human companion- 
 ship : — the beautiful yellow straw entering the cylinder ; the 
 clear yellow-brown wheat pulsing out at the side ; the broken 
 straw, chaff, and dust puffing out on the great stacker; the cheery 
 whistling and calling of the driver ; the keen, crisp air, and the 
 bright sun were somehow weirdly suggestive of the passage of time. 
 — Hamlin Garland, Main Traveled Roads,
 
 102 Everyday English 
 
 181. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 SENTENCE ANALYSIS 
 
 Find the simple subject (noun or pronoun) and the 
 simple predicate (verb) in the following sentences. 
 
 Select the modifiers of the simple subject and the modifiers 
 of the simple predicate. 
 
 Select the nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. 
 What words do the adjectives modify ? What words do the 
 adverbs modify? 
 
 Example : The tall peddler walked slowly behind me. 
 
 The simple subject is peddler. 
 
 Modifiers of the simple subject are : the, tall. 
 
 The simple predicate is ivalked. 
 
 Modifiers of the simple predicate are : sloidy, beJiind me. 
 
 Noun : peddler. 
 
 Pronoun : me. 
 
 Verb : loalked. 
 
 Adjectives: the and tall modifying perW/^r. 
 
 Adverbs: slovh/ modifying the verb ivalked. 
 
 1. The sun will soon set. 
 
 2. Already the western sky is bright. 
 .S. The clouds are red and gold. 
 
 4. Shall we sit quietly on this old wall ? 
 
 5. The sun is growing larger and larger. 
 
 6. It has nearly reached the horizon. 
 
 7. How quiet everything is! 
 
 8. The sun bids us a silent farewell. 
 
 9. The sky is flaming with many colors. 
 
 10. The sunset always makes me sad and solenm. 
 
 11. Now we can see the evening star. 
 
 12. We must return to the house.
 
 The Colonists 1(33 
 
 182. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE COLONISTS 
 
 Mr. Barlow shows his schoolboys a new game. 
 
 Mr. Barloiv. I have a new play for you. I will be the founder 
 of a new colony, and you shall be people of different 
 trades and professions coming to offer yourselves to 
 go with me. What are you, Charles ? 
 
 Charles. I am a farmer, sir. 
 
 Mr. B. Very good. Farming is the chief occupation we have 
 to depend upon. But you must be a working farmer, 
 not a gentleman farmer. Laborers will be scarce 
 among us, and every man must put his hand to the 
 plow. 
 
 Charles. I shall be ready to do my part. 
 
 Mr. B. Then I shall entertain you willingly. You shall have 
 land enough, and utensils. Now for the next. 
 
 John. I am a miller, sir. 
 
 Mr. B. A very useful trade. The grain we grow must be 
 ground. But what will you do for a mill ? 
 
 John. I suppose we raust make one. 
 
 Mr. B. True ; but, then, you must bring with you a millwright 
 for the purpose. As for millstones, we will take 
 them with us. Who is next ? 
 
 Henry. I am a carpenter, sir. 
 
 Mr. B. Excellent. We shall find you work enough, never 
 fear. There will be houses to build, fences to make, 
 and all kinds of wooden furniture to provide. But 
 our timber is all growing. You will have a deal of 
 hard work to do felling trees, and sawing planks, 
 and shaping posts, and the like. 
 William. I am a blacksmith, sir.
 
 1()4 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 3fr. B. 
 
 Edward. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Simon. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Simon. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Silas. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Jidius. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Julius. 
 Mr. B. 
 
 Matthev). 
 Mr. B. 
 
 An excellent companion for a carpenter. We cannot 
 do without either of you ; you may bring your great 
 bellows and anvil, and we wall set up a forge for you 
 at once. But we shall want a mason for that. 
 
 I am one, sir. 
 
 That's well. Though we may live in log houses at first, 
 we shall want brick or stone work for chimneys and 
 hearths and ovens; so that will be employment for a 
 mason. So I engage you. Who is next ? 
 
 I am a shoemaker, sir. 
 
 And shoes we cannot well do without. lUit can you 
 make them, like Eumaeus in the Odysseij, out of a 
 raw hide ? For I fear we shall get no leather. 
 
 But I can dress hides, too. 
 
 Can you ? Then you are a clever fellow, and T will 
 have you, though I give you double wages. 
 
 I am a weaver, sir. 
 
 Weaving is a usef id art. But I fear we shall not need 
 you at present. It will be cheaper for us to import 
 our cloth than to make it. In a few years, however, 
 we may be very glad of you. 
 
 I am a silversmith, sir. 
 
 Then, my friend, you cannot go to a worse place than 
 a new colony to set up your trade in. You will 
 break us, or we shall starve you. 
 
 But I can repair clocks and watches, too. 
 
 That is something more to our purpose. But I fear we 
 cannot give you work enough. For the present you 
 had better stay where you are. 
 
 I am a doctor, sir. 
 
 Then, sir, you are very welcome. Health is the first 
 of blessings, and if you can give us that, you will be 
 a very valuable man, indeed.
 
 Common and Proper Nomis 165 
 
 Read this selection aloud, parts being assigned to various 
 members of the class. Continue the drama, introducing a 
 lawyer, a tailor, a milliner, a soldier, a school-teacher, a 
 dancing master. 
 
 183. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the first part of Lesson 182 in the form of a story, 
 using quotation marks when the precise words of a speaker 
 are given. 
 
 Exchange papers and mark all mistakes in quotation marks. 
 
 184. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 COMMON AND PROPER NOUNS 
 Look at the following nouns : 
 water river stream current Mississippi 
 
 Which of these belongs to only one thing? There are 
 many waters, rivers, streams, and currents, but only one 
 Mississippi River. A noun that is used to name some par- 
 ticular person, place, town, book, or thing is called a proper 
 noun. Proper nouns should begin witli a capital: John 
 Adams, Albany, Missouri, Atlantic, America. 
 
 Common nouns are names that do not sj)ecify a particular 
 person or place. Most nouns are common nouns. Boij and 
 dog are common nouns ; James and Fido are proper nouns 
 because they refer to one special boy and one special dog. 
 
 Select the common and the proper nouns in Lesson 43. 
 
 Name ten proper nouns; ten common nouns. 
 
 A proper noun is a special name for some one person, place, 
 or thing. 
 
 A common noun is a common name that applies to many- 
 persons or things.
 
 ll)() Everyday English 
 
 185. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ROBERT OF LINCOLN 
 
 Merrily swinging on brier and weed, 
 Near to the nest of his little dame, 
 Over the mountain-side or mead, 
 
 Robert of Lincoln is telling his name : 
 "Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Snug and safe is that nest of ours. 
 Hidden among the summer flowers. 
 Chee, chee, ehee." 
 
 Robert of Lincoln is gayly dressed, 
 
 Wearing a bright black wedding-coat ; 
 White are his shoulders and white his crest. 
 Hear him call in his merry note : 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Look, what a nice new coat is mine, 
 Sure there was never a bird so fine. 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 Robert of Lincoln's Quaker wife, 
 
 Pretty and quiet, with i)lain brown wings, 
 Passing at home a patient life. 
 
 Broods in the grass while her husband sings ; 
 " Bol>o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Brood, kind creature ; you need not fear 
 Thieves and robbers while I am here. 
 Chee, chee, chee."
 
 Robert of Lincoln 167 
 
 Modest and shy as a nun is she ; 
 
 One weak chirp is her only note. 
 Braggart and prince of braggarts is he, 
 Pouring boasts from his little throat: 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Never was I afraid of man; 
 Catch me, cowardly knaves, if you can ! 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 Six white eggs on a bed of hay, 
 
 Flecked with purple, a pretty sight ! 
 There as the mother sits all day, 
 
 Robert is singing with all his might : 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Nice good wife, that never goes out, 
 Keeping house while I frolic about. 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 Soon as the little ones chip the shell, 
 Six wide mouths are open for food ; 
 Robert of Lincoln bestirs him well, 
 Gathering seeds for the hungry brood. 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 This new life is likely to be 
 Hard for a gay young fellow like me. 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 Robert of Lincoln at length is made 
 Sober with work, and silent with care ; 
 
 Off is his holiday garment laid, 
 Half forgotten that merry air :
 
 168 Everyday Englisli 
 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 
 Spink, spank, spink ; 
 Nobody knows but my mate and I 
 Where our nest and our nestlings lie. 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 Summer wanes; the children are grown; 
 
 Fun and frolic no more he knows ; 
 Robert of Lincoln's a humdrum crone ; 
 Off he flies, and we sing as he goes : 
 " Bob-o'-link, bob-o'-link, 
 Spink, spank, spink; 
 When you can pipe that merry old strain, 
 Robert of Lincoln, come back again. 
 Chee, chee, chee." 
 
 — William Cullex Bryant. 
 
 This poem is to be read aloud several times, with especial 
 attention to distinct enunciation and expression. The fol- 
 lowing words are to be defined : mead, flecked, xvane, hum- 
 drum, crone. What is each stanza about ? Give in your 
 own words a short history of the bobolink's life. Make oral 
 paragraphs on the following topics: A Description of Robert 
 of Lincoln, A Description of his Wife, The Bobolinks' Nest. 
 
 The poem may be studied in connection with some of the 
 following poems about birds: 
 
 "The Bluebird," Emily Huntington Miller. 
 
 "The Blue Jay," Susan Hartley Swett. 
 
 "To the Cuckoo," William Wordsworth. 
 
 "To a Waterfowl," William Cullen Bryant. 
 
 "The Sandpiper," Celia Thaxter. 
 
 "The Throstle," Alfred Tennyson 
 
 " The Green Linnet," William Wordsworth.
 
 Sentence Building 
 
 169 
 
 William Cullen Bryant, one 
 of the most distinguished 
 American poets, was born in 
 Cummington, Massachusetts, 
 1794, and died in New York 
 City, 1878. He wrote " Than- 
 atopsis," one of his best 
 poems, when he was-«ighteen, 
 and he continued to write 
 poetry throughout his life. 
 For many years he was editor 
 of the New York Evening 
 Post. You shoukl know his 
 poems, " Song of Marion's 
 Men," "The Planting of the 
 Apple Tree," and '' The Glad- 
 ness of Nature." 
 
 186. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 SENTENCE BUILDING 
 
 The following words are to be used as subjects of sen- 
 tences. Include in each sentence, besides its simple subject, 
 an adjective and an adverb. Papers are to be exchanged 
 and corrected. If a sentence is correct, mark it C ; if incor- 
 rect, mark it X. 
 
 William Cullen Bryant 
 
 The bluejay 
 
 The robia 
 
 The crow 
 
 The sparrows 
 
 The Children's Hour 
 
 New York 
 
 The blackbirds 
 
 Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 
 
 Tennyson 
 
 Stevenson 
 
 Whittier
 
 170 Everyday English 
 
 187. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 NUMBER : Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs 
 
 We have seen tluit nouns may be singular ov plural. 
 
 A noun that names one thing is in the singular number. 
 
 A noun that names more than one thing is in the plural 
 number. 
 
 Here are the rules that we have learned for changing 
 singular nouns to plural. 
 
 1. Most nouns add -s. 
 
 2. Nine nouns do not add -s. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in -s, -x, -z, -sh, and soft -ch add -es. 
 
 4. About forty nouns ending in -o add -es. 
 
 5. All nouns ending in -y after a consonant change y to ies. 
 
 6. Fifteen nouns ending in -for -fe change/ or /e to ves. 
 
 Give several examples under each rule. 
 
 What are the plurals of the nouns in Lesson 180? 
 
 Which of these pronouns is singular ? which plural ? 
 which may be either singular or plural ? 
 
 I you it these 
 
 we he fhey that 
 
 me she this those 
 
 Wliich of these verb-forms would you use with a singular 
 pronoun as subject? Which would you use with a plural 
 pronoun as subject ? Make sentences, using singular or 
 jjlural pronouns with these verbs. 
 
 is 
 
 are 
 
 does 
 
 do 
 
 jumps 
 
 jump 
 
 was 
 
 were 
 
 doesn't 
 
 don't 
 
 teaches 
 
 teach 
 
 lias 
 
 have 
 
 rides 
 
 ride 
 
 learns 
 
 learn 
 
 sits 
 
 sit 
 
 runs 
 
 run 
 
 rises 
 
 rise 
 
 talks 
 
 talk 
 
 plays 
 
 play 
 
 raises 
 
 raise
 
 . Icarus and His Flialit 171 
 
 188. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ICARUS AND HIS FLIGHT 
 
 The ancient Greeks had a number of stories about a man 
 named Daedalus (De'-da-lus), who was famed for his cleverness 
 in designing things and for his skill of hand in making them. 
 At one time he lived in the island of Crete, and while there got 
 into trouble for having made the famous labyrinth for a monster, 
 the Minotaur, who demanded of the inhabitants a yearly sacrifice 
 of young men and women. For helping this monster, he and his 
 son Icarus (Ic'-a-rus) were imprisoned by King Minos. In order 
 to escape, he procured wings and fastened them witli wax to his 
 shoulders and to those of Icarus. Then they flew forth from their 
 prison, and started across the ^gean Sea towards the mainland of 
 Europe. All went well for a time ; but Icarus rose too high, and 
 got too near the sun. 
 
 Imagine the rest of the story. When you have made your 
 guess, your teacher can tell you how the old Greeks finished it. 
 
 It may interest you to look up a map that gives that part 
 of the Mediterranean Sea that is called the ^gean Sea. If 
 your map is large enough, it will contain a name in a part of the 
 -^gean Sea that recalls this story. 
 
 189. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write the story of Icarus. Let the first paragraph tell of 
 the imprisonment of Icarus; in the second, tell of the mak- 
 ing of the wings ; in the third, of the flight and its conse- 
 quences. 
 
 190. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 Criticise the composition of Lesson 189, for (1) capitals, 
 (2) punctuation, (3) spelling, (4) sentences, (5) paragraphs.
 
 1 72 Everyday English 
 
 191. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ENUNCIATION 
 
 We Americans are accused of careless and indistiiut 
 speech. Have you ever thought whether the accusation is 
 true? Do you always say tliing-s distinctly, or do you some- 
 times slur and mumble, especially in class when you are not 
 sure your answer is right ? Think of how you say and how 
 you hear others say certain words. Do you say and do you 
 hear — 
 
 Saturday 
 
 or 
 
 Sa'erday 
 
 athletics 
 
 or athaletics 
 
 spaniel 
 
 or 
 
 spannel 
 
 calculate 
 
 or calclate 
 
 towel 
 
 or 
 
 towl 
 
 floor 
 
 or floo 
 
 vowel 
 
 or 
 
 vowl 
 
 our 
 
 or ouah or are 
 
 letter 
 
 or 
 
 le'er 
 
 idea 
 
 or idear 
 
 get out 
 
 or 
 
 giy-out 
 
 pretty 
 
 or purty 
 
 let go 
 
 or 
 
 le-go 
 
 when 
 
 or wen 
 
 quiet 
 
 or 
 
 quite 
 
 window 
 
 or winder 
 
 poem 
 
 or 
 
 pome 
 
 why 
 
 or wy 
 
 Try to think of other words and expressions that you 
 hear mispronounced, or slurred over and left indistinct. 
 Wouldn't it be easier to know what our friends say, if they 
 always made their words clear and distinct ? And if we 
 should like to hear them do so, would it not be right and 
 fair to take the trouble to do so ourselves ? Beautiful 
 speech is pleasing to the ear. When words come clear and 
 distinct, and in a musical voice, we listen with pleasure. If 
 your voice is hansh or squeak)'- or shrill, try to modify it. 
 As far as you can, make it like the pleasing voices that you 
 hear. A good deal can be done to improve our voices just 
 by listening and trying. 
 
 Here is a stanza from Browning's " The Pied Piper of
 
 r Enunciation 173 
 
 Hamelin " that requires clear enunciation, and is all the 
 better for being read also with a good voice : 
 
 Once more he stept into the street, 
 
 And to his lips again 
 Laid his long pipe of smooth straight cane ; 
 
 And ere he blew three notes (such sweet 
 Soft notes as yet musician's cunning 
 
 Never gave the enraptured air) 
 There was a rustling that seemed like a bustling 
 Of merry crowds justling at pitching and hustling; 
 Small feet were pattering, wooden shoes clattering, 
 Little hands clapping and little tongues chattering, 
 And, like fowls in a farm-yard when barley is scattering. 
 Out came the children running. 
 All the little boys and girls. 
 With rosy cheeks and flaxen curls, 
 And sparkling eyes and teeth like pearls, 
 Tripping and skipping, ran merrily after 
 The wonderful music with shouting and laughter. 
 
 192. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write sentences containing : 
 
 1. A proper noun as subject and an adverb in the predicate. 
 
 2. A subject modified by several words. 
 
 3. A verb-group modified by several words. 
 
 4. The pronouns he, Mm, and his. 
 
 5. A pronoun as subject modified by an adjective. 
 
 6. The past tense of a verb modified by an adverb. 
 
 7. The contraction Ws and the pronoun its. 
 
 8. The pronouns /, you, and them. 
 
 Exchange papers and correct, as in Lesson 186.
 
 174 Everyday English 
 
 11)3. LANGUxVGE LESSON 
 
 COMPOUND SUBJECTS 
 What are the subjects of these three sentences? 
 
 1. Mary and I walked to school. 
 
 2. The dog, the horse, and the cow are quadrupeds. 
 
 3. You and T have had a fine time. 
 
 The subject of a sentence is often not one noun, but sev- 
 eral nouns or pronouns, often connected by and. 
 
 Supply the correct words in the following sentences: 
 
 1. George aud (I, me) are ready. 
 
 2. IMy brother and (I, me) went fishing. 
 
 3. Either George or May (is, are) going for the mail. 
 
 4. (He, him) and his father have packed the basket fur the 
 
 picnic. 
 
 5. (He, him) and (she, her) will take the wagon. 
 
 6. Where shall my sister and (I, me) meet you ? 
 
 7. The sandwiches and roasted apples were (laid, lain) out 
 
 before the fire. 
 
 8. Now father and (I, me) must bring the water, 
 
 9. (They, them) and (I, me) went in to dinner. 
 
 10. Charles and he (is, are) coming to-morrow. 
 
 11. Neither the dog nor the cat (was, were) in the house. 
 
 12. (Was, were) George and you at the party? 
 
 The following are examples of correct usage. Repeat them 
 aloud until you are sure you know them. 
 
 It is I. It was I. . It is not she. 
 
 It is he. Was it she ? Don't they ? 
 
 Is it he ? Were you ? Doesn't he ? 
 
 It isn't she. Aren't you? It doesn't.
 
 APPLE PICKING
 
 The Elements of a Sentence 175 
 
 194. ORAL LESSON 
 
 APPLE PICKING 
 
 Observe the picture carefully. How many people are in 
 it ? What is each of the men doing ? Which one is picking 
 the fruit ? Which one- is packing it ? In what is he putting 
 it ? What will be done witli it ? What is in the wagon ? 
 Did you ever see a ladder like the one in the picture ? What 
 are the ladders that you have seen like? Why do they not 
 simply shake the apples down and gather them up ? Have 
 you ever helped to pick apples ? Did you enjoy it ? How 
 many children are in the picture ? What is each doing ? 
 Which children are interested in watching the work ? Which 
 are interested in the feel and taste of the apples ? 
 
 195. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition on one of the following subjects : 
 
 1. An account of the picture. 
 
 2. Picking apples. 
 
 3. Gathering cherries (or strawberries, blackberries, blue- 
 
 berries, or some other kind of fruit). 
 
 4. Nutting. 
 
 5. The fruit and nuts on a push-cart. 
 
 Make an illustrated booklet of this composition, using 
 your water colors, as in Lesson 131. 
 
 196. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE ELEMENTS OF A SENTENCE 
 
 In Part II of this book we have learned something about 
 the way in which sentences are made, and something about the 
 uses of words in the sentences. Every sentence has a sub-
 
 176 Everyday English 
 
 ject and a predicate. Usually there are other words, some 
 modifiers of the subject and some modifiers of the predicate. 
 Every sentence can be analyzed into the subject and its modi- 
 fiers and the predicate and its modifiers. 
 
 The subject of a sentence is a noun or pronoun. The 
 predicate is a verb or verI)-group. Adjectives are words 
 modifying nouns. Adverbs are words modifying verbs. 
 
 Nouns, pronouns, and verbs change their form in order to 
 express changes in meaning. We have studied changes in 
 nouns and pronouns to express number and possession, and 
 •changes in verbs to express number and tense. 
 
 We have also studied with especial care some troublesome 
 verbs, as do, see, may, can, lie^ lay, set, teach, learn. 
 
 Analyze the following sentences, as in Lesson 181: 
 
 1. The great fire flames brightly. 
 
 2. Our hands and faces burn with the heat. 
 
 3. May and I have played in the brook. 
 
 4. The dark shadows of the trees gather about the fire. 
 
 5. Now we must trudge slowly to our home. 
 
 197. ORAL LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 What are the four kinds of sentences? Define each and 
 give an example. Define the complete subject, the complete 
 predicate, the simple subject, the simple predicate. What are 
 modifiers? Make several sentences with subject modifiers; 
 several with predicate modifiers. Define nouns, common and 
 proper nouns, pronouns, verbs, verb-groups, adjectives, and 
 adverbs. Give examples of each. Explain number, posses- 
 sion, tense. Let several pupils give the substance of Lesson 
 19G.
 
 Review Lessons 177 
 
 198. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 Write a telegram of not over ten words addressed to your 
 father asking him to meet you at a certain time and place. 
 
 Write a letter to the Macmillan Company, 64-66 Fifth 
 Ave., New York, ordering a copy of this book. 
 
 If these written exercises are faulty, they are to be cor- 
 rected and carefully rewritten. 
 
 199. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 Choose the correct word from the two in each parenthesis: 
 
 1. I have (laid, lain) the table for supper. 2. I will (lie, lay) 
 down for a nap. 3. (Were, was) you at home ? 4. (Doesn't, 
 don't) he study hard? 5. He (can, may) be excused at four 
 o'clock. 6. She (set, sat) the chair on the porch, and I (set, sat) 
 there in the sunshine. 7. (A, an) old man gave the dog (its, it's) 
 name. 8. I (have, haven't) no money. 9. (Has, have) you 
 (laid, lain) there all the afternoon ? 10. I (shall, will) be at home 
 to-morrow, 12 He (shall, will) play ball with her and (I, me). 
 13. She (doesn't, don't) care for any candy. 14. (They, them) 
 and (we, us) (run, runs) races. 15. (Was, were) you and (he, 
 him) kept after school? 16. He (did, done) a good deal. 17. 
 Between you and (I, me) (sat, set) a very tall girl. 18. Yester- 
 day I (play, played) with (those, them) boys. 19. If you say I 
 (may, can), I will (sit, set) on the sofa. 20. (It's, its) too fine 
 a day for (a, an) umbrella. 
 
 Make sentences with pronouns for subjects and with may^ 
 can^ shall, will, sit, set, lie, lay, laid, lain, saw, seen, did, done, 
 in the predicates. 
 
 N
 
 178 Everyday English 
 
 200. RE\'ii:\v 
 
 CAPITALS AND PUNCTUATION 
 
 Review the rules for capitals in Lesson 100. All proper 
 nouns begin with capitals. All direct quotations begin with 
 capitals. 
 
 Review the rules for punctuation in Lessons 100 and 142. 
 What are contractions? abbreviations? Give the rules for 
 the apostrophe. Give the rules for divided quotations. 
 
 Punctuate and capitalize the following passages : 
 
 1. george washingtous birthday is february 22nd 
 
 2. another great americans birthday comes in february 
 
 3. these patriots deeds will not be forgotten 
 
 4. not a drum was heard not a funeral note 
 
 as his corse to the rampart we hurried 
 not a soldier discharged his farewell shot 
 oer the grave where our hero we buried 
 
 5. a grasshopper half dead with hunger said to an ant give me 
 a morsel of your corn for i am starving what were you doing all 
 last summer said the ant o i wasnt idle said the grasshopper i 
 was singing all summer long then said the ant laughing since you 
 could sing all summer mr grasshopper you may dance all winter 
 good-by
 
 PART THREE 
 
 201. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ENUNCIATION 
 
 Yoiir attention was called in Lesson 191 to certain faults 
 of speech common in this country. Our words are often 
 mumbled and often run together or clipped off, so that we 
 are not easily understood. Sometimes our voices are very 
 shrill or harsh, and many of us have the bad habit of talking 
 through our noses. Words are the tools by which we ex- 
 press our thoughts to each other. Why not learn to use 
 these valuable tools correctly ? 
 
 Much of the beauty of good literature is spoiled by bad 
 reading. Read aloud carefully the two following passages 
 from Tennyson, and see how clear enunciation and good 
 tones add to their beauty: 
 
 1- l^i'^g o^^t, wild bells, to the wild sky, 
 
 The flying clouds, the frosty light ; 
 The year is dying in the night ; 
 Eing out, wild bells, and let him die. 
 
 2. Sometimes a troop of damsels glad, 
 
 An abbot on an ambling pad, 
 Sometimes a curly shepherd lad. 
 Or long-haired page in crimson clad, 
 Goes by to towered Camelot. 
 179
 
 180 Everyday English 
 
 Read aloud the poems in Part 11, Lessons 113, 131, 146, 
 161, 185. 
 
 In the following description from Stevenson, one of our 
 most pleasing modern writers, see how the music of the 
 language is helped by careful reading : 
 
 This was a very different camp from that of the night before 
 in the cool and silent pinewoods. It was warm and even stifling 
 in the valley. The shrill song of frogs, like the tremolo note of a 
 whistle with a pea in it, rang up from the riverside before the sun 
 was down. In the growing dusk, faint rustlings began to run to 
 and fro among the fallen leaves; from time to time a faint chirp- 
 ing or cheeping noise would fall upon my ear; and time to time 
 I thought I could see the movement of something swift and in- 
 distinct between the chestnuts. A profusion of large ants swarmed 
 upon the ground ; bats whisked by, and mosquitoes droned over- 
 head. The long boughs with their bunches of leaves hung against 
 the sky like garlands ; and those immediately above and around 
 me had somewhat the air of a trellis which should have been 
 wrecked and half overthrown in a gale of wind. 
 
 — Travels with a Donkey. 
 
 202. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a brief account of some incident in your vacation. 
 What is the title ? Where is it to be written ? How many 
 paragraphs are there to be in your composition ? What is 
 each one to be about ? Where should the first word of each 
 paragraph be placed ? After you have finished writing, look 
 over your work and revise your spelling, capitalization, and 
 punctuation. 
 
 Some of the compositions may be read idoud, and judged 
 by the teaclier for (1) interest, (2) clearness, (3) good oral 
 reading.
 
 The Parts of Speech 181 
 
 203. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH 
 
 There are eight Parts of Speech or uses of words in the 
 sentence. Five of these have already been studied in Part II. 
 
 Nouns are words that name persons, places, things, ideas. 
 Pronouns are words that stand for nouns. 
 Verbs are words that assert or tell something. 
 Adjectives are words that modify nouns or pronouns. 
 Adverbs are words that modify verbs, adjectives, or other 
 adverbs. 
 
 Find each of these parts of speech in the following sentence : 
 
 The little dog quickly buried his bone in the ground. 
 
 Give several examples of each of these parts of speech. 
 
 Make sentences by enlarging the following subjects and 
 predicates. In each sentence put at least one adjective or 
 adverb. See if you can make more than one sentence for each 
 noun and verb. See how many modifiers you can introduce 
 in a single sentence. 
 
 Example : The yellow lion roared with delight. 
 
 The fierce lion had roared for the last time. 
 
 In the morning the big ugly lion roared for his breakfast. 
 
 Subjects 
 
 
 Predicates 
 
 
 lion 
 
 Columbus 
 
 roared 
 
 discovered 
 
 rain 
 
 Washington 
 
 fell 
 
 told 
 
 minister 
 
 Europe 
 
 preached 
 
 is 
 
 children 
 
 Icarus 
 
 cried 
 
 flew 
 
 The eight parts of speech are nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjec- 
 tives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, interjections.
 
 182 Everyday English 
 
 204. ORAL LESSON 
 
 AURORA 
 
 A long time ago people believed that the sun, moon, and stars 
 were persons like themselves, only greater and more powerful. 
 They worshiped these powerful beings as gods. The Greeks 
 called the moon-goddess Diana, and the sun-god Apollo. Our 
 
 picture is from a famous painting that illustrates the Greek story 
 about Apollo, who changed night into beautiful day with its wel- 
 come light and warmth. 
 
 Apollo's palace was far away in the east where he rested dur- 
 ing the night, seated upon a golden throne. The Hours, Days, and 
 Months stood ready to attend him on his daily journey. 
 
 During the night the beautiful Diana made her journey across 
 the sky, and each morning she was succeeded by Aurora, the 
 rosy-fingered goddess of dawn. You can see Aurora in the pic- 
 ture parting the clouds in order to prepare the way for the chariot 
 of the sun-god. To this chariot are harnessed the four white 
 horses, which no one but Apollo could drive. The picture shows 
 the moment of dawn and the beginning of Apollo's journey. 
 
 He drove his chariot up the steep ascent of the sky until he 
 reached the top. From the rapidly driven chariot streamed light
 
 Aurora 183 
 
 and heat. At noon the descent began, and the chariot sped on 
 down the sky toward the west, and the sun-god was glad to bathe 
 his head in the cool sea. Aurora again parted the clouds, which 
 her rosy fingers transformed into the beautiful hues of the sunset, 
 and the sun-god sank to rest beneath the western sea. 
 
 Guido Reni, who painted this picture, was not a Greek, 
 but an Italian who lived long after the Greeks. How many 
 goddesses encircle the chariot? Why has the painter put 
 wreaths of flowers in Aurora's hands? Apollo (or Phoebus), 
 Aurora, and Diana are frequently referred to in English 
 poetry. If you remember this picture, you will understand 
 many passages, as the following, from Shakespeare : 
 
 The heavenly-harnessed team 
 Begins his golden progress in the east. 
 Gallop apace, you hery-footed steeds. 
 Towards Phoebus' lodging. 
 
 Oral Compositions: 
 
 I. The Story of Apollo. 
 
 1. Beliefs of the Greeks about the sun and moon. 
 
 2. Apollo's Palace. 
 
 3. The Dawn. 
 
 4. Apollo's daily journey. 
 
 IT, The Picture Aurora, by Guido Reni. 
 
 1. What the picture represents. 
 
 2. Persons in the picture : 
 
 (a) Aurora ; (6) Apollo ; (c) Apollo's attendants. 
 
 205. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a composition on (1) The Story of Apollo, or 
 (2) The Picture of Aurora, following one of the outlines 
 given in Lesson 204.
 
 1S4 Everyday English 
 
 206. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 NOUNS: REVIEW 
 
 See Lessons 109, 184, 187. 
 
 Nouns are names for persons, places, things, or ideas. 
 
 Nouns are divided into two classes, proper nouns and 
 common nouns. 
 
 Proper nouns are names of individual persons, places, or 
 things ; as, John, Smith, Baltimore. Proper nouns begin with 
 capitals. 
 
 Common nouns are names that can be applied to many 
 persons or places or things, as man, city, ice-cream. 
 
 Most nouns become plural by adding s to the singular. 
 Some nouns form plurals in other ways (see Lesson 84). 
 
 Most nouns become possessive by adding 's to the singular 
 and (') to the plural. In what other ways may the possessive 
 be formed ? 
 
 Nouns play an important part in the sentence. The sub- 
 ject is a noun or a pronoun. 
 
 From the compositions written in Lesson 205, select the 
 following : five proper nouns, five common nouns, three 
 nouns that are possessive, five nouns that are subjects. 
 
 207. ORAL LESSON 
 
 BEES 
 
 Although bees have been in the service of man for thousands 
 of years, they have never been thoroughly domesticated. They 
 are wild creatures still. They are still armed with a sting 
 against man's interference, still take to the woods when conditions 
 in the garden do not suit them, and still thrive in a wild state as 
 well as under the care of man. Their service to us is still involun- 
 tary ; and the tribute we levy is in the nature of a robbery.
 
 Bees 
 
 185 
 
 The bees in tlie hives are queens, workers, and drones. The 
 drones, or male bees, are useless for gathering honey, and are 
 commonly destroyed by the females, or workers. The task of the 
 workers is to build the cells of the honeycomb and to fill them 
 with honey against the long winter season. The queen is the 
 mother bee of the brood. She is wonderfully prolific. She will 
 sometimes lay a thousand or more eggs per day for a month. 
 These eggs are deposited in cells, and the larvae or young bees 
 fed with honey until fully grown. 
 
 Bees are great colonists. Their rapid increase will soon fill a 
 hive. When they find themselves growing hot and crowded, a 
 body of them, with a queen, will emerge from the hive, gather 
 on some neighboring tree or building, and then all make oft' for a 
 new home. This is called " swarming." Those that remain in 
 the old hive will continue life there with a new queen, until the 
 pressure of population again becomes too great ; then another 
 body of " colonists '' will be sent out. The community or social 
 life of bees has been closely studied, and shown to be one of the 
 most marvelous things in nature.
 
 ISfj Everyday Eiin-lisli 
 
 Repeat the substance of this selection in the form of an 
 oral composition. Can any one give further information 
 about bees ? about ants or other insects ? Mu('h interesting 
 bee lore will be found in John Burroughs's Pepactoru in Sir 
 John Lubbock's Bees^ Ants, and Wasps. Charming stories 
 about bees are Maurice Maeterlinck's The Life of a Bee and 
 Maurice Noel's Buzz. 
 
 208. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A PARAGRAPH FOR STUDY 
 
 Bees, like the milkman, like to be near a spring. They do 
 water their honey, especially in a dry time. The liquid is then, 
 of course, thicker and sweeter, and will bear diluting. Hence 
 old bee-hunters look for bee trees along creeks and near springs 
 in the woods. I once found a tree a long distance from an}'- 
 water, and the honey had a peculiar bitter flavor, imparted to 
 it, I was convinced, by rainwater sucked from the decayed and 
 spongy hemlock tree in which the swarm was found. In cut- 
 ting into the tree, the north side of it was found to be saturated 
 Avith water like a spring, which ran out in big drops, and liad a 
 bitter flavor. The bees had thus found a spring or a cistern in 
 their own house. 
 
 — From Pepadon, by John Burroughs. 
 
 Copy this paragraph carefully. A paragraph should al- 
 ways have one subject or topic, and every sentence in the 
 paragraph should have some connection with that subject. 
 The topic of this paragraph can be put in a single sentence : 
 Bees put water in their honey. Note how this idea is in- 
 troduced in the first sentence of the paragraph. 
 
 In Lesson 207, what is the topic of the first paragraph ? 
 of the third paragraph ?
 
 Personal Pronouns 187 
 
 209. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PRONOUNS: PERSONAL 
 
 See Lessons 112, 169, 187. 
 
 Pronouns are words used instead of nouns. 
 
 The subject of a sentence is a noun or a pronoun. 
 
 A personal pronoun shows by its form whether it stands for 
 the person speaking, the person spoken to, or the person or 
 thing spoken of. 
 
 John meets James and says, ''Hello, James, I am going skat- 
 ing. Will you go with me ? Do you think Fred will go? Shall 
 I ask him ? " 
 
 Who is the person speaking ? W^hat pronouns stand for 
 the person speaking ? Wlio is the person spoken to? What 
 pronouns stand for the person spoken to ? Who is the person 
 spoken of ? W^hat pronoun stands for the person spoken of ? 
 
 Pronouns that stand for the person speaking are in tlie 
 first person; as, /, my^ me, we., our, us. 
 
 Pronouns that stand for the person spoken to are in the 
 second person ; as, you, your. 
 
 Pronouns that stand for the person or thing spoken of are 
 in the third person ; as, he, she, it, him, his, her, its, they, their, 
 them. 
 
 Exercises 
 
 1. What are the plurals for the singular pronouns /, you, 
 he, she, it ? What are the possessive singulars and plurals ? 
 
 2. Find the personal pronouns in Lesson 92. Tell whether 
 each is in the first, second, or third person ; whether each is 
 singular or plural. 
 
 Besides the personal pronouns there are many others, of 
 which the most common are : who, ivhich, whom, what, this, that.
 
 188 Everyday Eiiglisli 
 
 210. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A GAME WITH WORDS 
 
 Many games with words have been invented for the amuse- 
 ment of children of all ages, from seven to seventy. One of 
 the most common games is to choose a word and see how 
 many other words can be made with the letters of the word 
 chosen. In playing the game it is not permitted to use any 
 letter oftener than it is used in the original word. Suppose 
 Ave try the word timber. We can get tire^ met, bet, bit, rim, 
 brim, mire, tier, and others from it. From earnest we can 
 get ear, eat, east, earn, ease, ant, are, ate, rest, ran, rate, nest, 
 neat, near, nearest, sear, seen, set, steer, stare, and, possibly, 
 still others. Try some other words, your name, for example, 
 and see what you can do with them. See who can make the 
 longest correct list in five minutes. If you like this game, 
 play it; it will not only be amusing, l)ut will help you to 
 spell correctly. 
 
 211. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 This lesson may be devoted to a criticism of words mis- 
 spelled, misused, or j)oorly chosen in the compositions of 
 Lessons 202, 205, and 208. The incorrect words may be 
 selected by the teacher, but the class should write the cor- 
 rect forms. 
 
 212. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 VERBS AND VERB-GROUPS 
 
 See Lessons 118, 121, 13U, 169, 172, 187. 
 
 Verbs are words that tell or assert something. 
 
 Most verbs express action : as, run, jump, talk, find, chase.
 
 Verbs and Verb-Groups 189 
 
 Verbs vary in form to express number and tense. 
 
 The verb may consist of several words. Tlien it is called 
 a verb-group (or verb-phrase). 
 
 The simple predicate of a sentence is always a verb or 
 a verb-group. 
 
 In Lesson 207 select all the verbs and verb-groups. 
 
 Which express action? Which are used with plural sub- 
 jects? 
 
 Which are modified by adverbs? 
 
 In the following sentences, select the simple subjects and 
 the simple predicates. Notice that there are sometimes two 
 subjects and sometimes two predicates. 
 
 1. May was playing in the field. 
 
 2. She picked a dandelion ball and blew it. 
 
 3. The seeds sailed away like feathers. 
 
 4. Three white seeds caught on the limb of a tree. 
 
 5. A bird may find those seeds. 
 
 6. What would he do with them ? 
 
 7. He would carry them home for his nest. 
 
 8. The lining of his nest is soft and warm. 
 
 9. May and her brother George climbed the tree. 
 10. Look at its three blue eggs. 
 
 213. ORAL LESSON 
 
 GREEK STORIES 
 
 Even before men had a written language, they delighted in 
 stories of brave and heroic adventure. They made songs which 
 told of the great deeds of some hero, and these songs were handed 
 down to their children and their children's children. Whenever 
 any race or nation became so civilized that it had tools, houses, 
 writing, and a government, these songs were made over into poems
 
 1 !H^ 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 that related again the stories of adventure and praised the deeds of 
 bravery, truth, and justice. The most famous of such poems are 
 in Greek, Homer's Iliad and Odyssey. This Iliad is the story of 
 the siege of Ilium or Troy, a city in Asia Minor. Hector is the 
 liero of the defenders of the citj^, and Achilles the hero of the 
 Greeks, who finally capture and destroy it. The Odyssey tells of 
 the long travels and adventures of one of the Greeks, Ulysses, from 
 the time of the destruction of Troy until at last he returned to his 
 home and his faithful wife, Penelope. These great poems have 
 been read and reread for thousands of years, and they are still the 
 best loved stories in the world. The Greeks, who were a very 
 brilliant and imaginative people, created many other famous 
 hero tales, some of which must be familiar to you. 
 
 In the talk to-day let us see what the pupils can tell about 
 some of the following topics, or what questions they can ask 
 the teacher in regard to them: Greece, Homer, Iliad, Odys- 
 sey, Troy, Achilles, Hector, Ulysses, Greek myths, Greek 
 heroes, Hercules, Jason, Perseus, Nausicaa, Cyclops, The 
 Lotus-Eaters, Orpheus. 
 
 BEADING HOSIER. 
 
 Alma Tudcma.
 
 Adjectives 191 
 
 The Iliad and Odyssey have been retold by A. J. Chvirch in two 
 delightful volumes, The Story of the Iliad and The Story of the 
 Odyssey (Macmillan Co.). Bryant's poetical translation of the 
 Odyssey will supply interesting selections for reading. Among 
 the best translations are Lang and Butcher's Odyssey and Lang, 
 Leaf, and ]\[yers's Iliad. Charles Kingsley's The Greek Heroes, 
 and Hawthorne's Wonder-Book and Tanglewood Tales tell the 
 stories of the Greek myths and legends. Selections from these 
 books are given in Baker and Carpenter's Fifth Year Language 
 Reader (Macmillan Co.). 
 
 214. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 BUILDING SENTENCES 
 
 Write the following sentences: 
 
 1. An Interrogative Sentence, underlining the complete subject. 
 
 2. An Imperative Sentence, underlining the complete predicate. 
 
 3. An Exclamatory Sentence. 
 
 4. A sentence with a pronoun in the first person. 
 
 5. A sentence containing a proper noun, a personal pronoun, 
 
 and a verb-group. 
 
 6. A sentence containing a plural and a possessive noun. 
 
 Exchange papers. Mark with a C each sentence that is 
 correct; and with a W each sentence that is wrong. The 
 sentences marked W are to be rewritten correctly. 
 
 215. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 Review Lesson 157. 
 
 Adjectives are words that modify nouns or pronouns. 
 The three adjectives, a, an, the, are usually called articles.
 
 192 Everyday English 
 
 Make sentences containing the following adjectives: 
 
 black famous rosy-fingered these 
 
 red elaborate courteous that 
 
 first graceful brittle those 
 
 second famous awful every 
 
 wild fertile right better 
 
 droll peppery this best 
 
 Find four adjectives that you can use in describing : 
 
 a horse, a book, your schoolroom, your best friend, the 
 
 weather. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 
 
 Exaruine the following sentences. 
 
 John is brave. James is braver than John. Charles is the 
 bravest of the three. 
 
 In these three sentences we have three forms of the adjec- 
 tive brave, which are used in comparisons. When two per- 
 sons or things are compared, braver is used. When more 
 than two are compared, bravest is used. 
 
 The three forms are called degrees of comparison, the posi- 
 tive, comparative, and superlative degrees. 
 
 Adjectives of one or two syllables regularly form the com- 
 parative by adding -er to the positive form, and form the 
 superlative by adding -est to the positive form. 
 
 Examples : sweet, kind, sour, bitter, funny, cold, warm, etc. 
 
 Many adjectives of two syllables, and all of more than two 
 syllables, use more and most in comparison. 
 
 Examples : beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful ; elegant, 
 distinguished, interesting, famous, useful. 
 
 Some adjectives cannot be compared. 
 
 Examples : first, daily, weekly, arctic, equal, perfect.
 
 \ ^1 I'M-; IN Hi'l,l,AM>
 
 Holland 193 
 
 216. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE WINDMILLS OF HOLLAND 
 
 What wonder that the Dutch have always been wise, plucky, 
 and strong ? They have had to struggle for a foothold upon the 
 very land of their birth. They have had to push back the ocean 
 to prevent it from welling in upon them. They have had to wall 
 in the rivers and lakes to keep them within bounds. They have 
 been forced to decide which should be land and which should be 
 water, — forever digging, building, embanking, and pumping for 
 dear existence. 
 
 Even the riotous wind has been made their slave. Caught by 
 thousands of long-armed windmills, it does their grinding, pump- 
 ing, draining, sawing. When it ceases to blow, those great 
 sleevelike sails all over the country hang limp and listless in the 
 misty air, or are tucked trimly out of sight; but let the first 
 breath of a gale be felt, and straightway, with one flutter of 
 preparation, every arm is turning slowly, steadily, with a peculiar 
 plenty -of-time air, or is whirling as if the spirit of seventy Dutch- 
 men had taken possession of it. 
 
 You can scarcely stand anywhere in Holland without seeing 
 one to twenty windmills. Many of them are built in the form of 
 a two-story tower, the second story being smaller than the first, 
 with a balcony at its base from which it tapers upward until 
 the cap-like top is reached. High up, near the roof, the great 
 axis juts from the wall; and to this are fastened two prodigious 
 arms, formed somewhat like ladders, heaving great sheets of 
 canvas, whose business it is to catch the mischief-maker and set 
 him at work. These mills stand like huge giants guarding the 
 country. Their bodies are generally of a dark red ; and their 
 heads, or roofs, are made to turn this way and that, according to 
 the direction of the wind. Their round eye-window is always 
 staring. Altogether, they seem to be keeping a vigilant watch
 
 194 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 in every direction. Sometimes they stand clustered together; 
 sometimes alone, like silent sentinels; sometimes in long rows, 
 like ranks of soldiers. Holland wouldn't be Holland without the 
 wnndmills, any more than it would be Holland without its dikes 
 and its Dutchmen. 
 
 — Mary Mapes Dodge, Tlie Land of Pluck. 
 
 Some of the topics for oral composition may be : " The 
 Fight with the Sea," " Dutch Costumes," " Windmills," 
 "Products of Holland," "A Dutch Milk Cart." 
 
 217. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A DESCRIPTION 
 
 Write a composition telling what you see in the picture, 
 and using as many of the following expressions as possible : 
 
 canals, flutter, baggy, clumsy, giants, poplars, demure, breath 
 of wind, vigilant, clatter, on the cobble stones, plenty of time. 
 
 218. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ADVERBS 
 
 Review Lesson 175. 
 
 Adverbs are used to modify the meaning of verbs, adjec- 
 tives, or other adverbs. 
 
 Adverbs answer the questions, when, where, or how, 
 expressing time, place, or manner. 
 
 Use the following adverbs in sentences : 
 
 now 
 
 twice 
 
 out 
 
 very 
 
 to-day 
 
 seldom 
 
 down 
 
 too 
 
 yesterday 
 
 here 
 
 up 
 
 more 
 
 never 
 
 there 
 
 pleasantly 
 
 most 
 
 always 
 
 backward 
 
 sure 
 
 quite 
 
 once 
 
 forward 
 
 probably 
 
 rather
 
 Heroes of the North 
 
 195 
 
 Many adverbs form the comparative and superlative by 
 prefixing more and most. Positive, pleas antli/; comparative, 
 more pleasantly ; superlative, most pleasantly . 
 
 The following adjectives and adverbs are irregular in 
 comparison : 
 
 Comparative Superlative 
 
 better best 
 
 more most 
 
 farther farthest 
 
 worse worst 
 
 better best 
 
 less least 
 
 Form an adjective from each of these nouns ; as, sensible, 
 senseless, sensuous, sensitive, from sense. 
 
 noise worth snow pain 
 
 joy love hope father 
 
 peace sympathy heart child 
 
 hunger honor care home 
 
 Form adverbs from as many as possible of the adjectives 
 that you have just made. 
 
 Positive 
 good 
 
 much, many 
 far 
 bad 
 Avell 
 little 
 
 219. ORAL LESSON 
 
 HEROES OF THE NORTH 
 
 In Lesson 213 we talked about some of the heroes and stories of 
 ancient Greece. Other lands and other peoples also had hero tales 
 handed down from generation to generation by singers and reciters 
 and finally made into written poems. Most of the heroes are 
 represented as having more than human strength, and as meeting 
 with most wonderful adventures. One of the great heroes of the 
 German people was Siegfried the Volsung, and the chief hero 
 of French poetry was Roland, who died defending France against
 
 SIKUKIUKD AND THE DKAGuN. 
 196
 
 Books worth Reading 197 
 
 the Saracens. The ancestors of the English people came to Eng- 
 land from Germany, and they brought with them songs and 
 stories. Beowulf, a story about a hero of the same name, is one 
 of the oldest poems in the English language. The Britons, who 
 lived in England before the Angles and Saxons came there, also 
 had their stories. Some of these told of King Arthur and his 
 court, and later on these became the subjects of many famous 
 tales in verse and prose. All of the stories were told hundreds of 
 years ago, before America was discovered, or printing invented ; 
 but they all show the same love for bravery, truth, and unselfish- 
 ness, which we have to-day. 
 
 Who can tell something about any of the following topics ? 
 What would you like to know about them? Siegfried, Brun- 
 hild, the Rhiuegold, Nibelungen, Roland, Charlemagne, the 
 Saracens, Beowulf, Grendel, King Arthur, Sir Galahad. For 
 a later lesson you are to be prepared to tell one story or 
 incident about some one of the heroes discussed in the present 
 Lesson and in Lesson 213. 
 
 These stories will be found in Katherine F. Boult's Heroes of 
 the Norselands (Temple Classics for Young People) ; James 
 Baldwin's Story of Siegfried ; C. J. Child's translation of Beowulf 
 (Riverside Series) ; A. J. Church's Heroes of Chivalry and 
 Romance; Baker's Oat of the Northland (Jsi^cmiWaw); Brown's 
 In the Days of Giants (Houghton Mifflin Co.). Keary's Heroes of 
 Asgard; Mabie's Norse Stories (Doubleday) ; Cox's Popular Ro- 
 mances of the Middle Ages; Butler's translation of the Song of 
 Roland (Riverside Series). Baker and Carpenter's Fifth Year 
 Language Reader (Macmillan) will supply the material needed for 
 class work. 
 
 You should not forget that the history of our own country is 
 full of brave deeds by land and sea. Every year on Memorial 
 Day as you help to decorate with flowers the graves of the old
 
 lOi^ Everyday English 
 
 soldiers, you are celebrating the heroism that was displayed by 
 the armies of the North and South. 
 
 The following poem was written many years ago by an English 
 poet in memory of English soldiers and sailors, but no words 
 could better express our feelings toward both the Blue and the 
 (iray. 
 
 AN ODE TO THE BRAVE 
 
 How sleep the brave, who sink to rest. 
 By all their country's wishes blessed ! 
 When spring, with dewy fingers cold. 
 Returns to deck their hallowed mould, 
 She there shall dress a sweeter sod 
 Than fancy's feet have ever trod. 
 
 By fairy hands their knell is rung; 
 By forms unseen their dirge is snng; 
 There Honor comes, a pilgrim gray. 
 To bless the turf that wraps their clay ; 
 And Freedom shall awhile repair. 
 To dwell a weeping hermit there ! 
 
 — William Collins. 
 
 220. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a brief composition telling an incident from one of 
 the hero tales of Lessons 213 and 219. 
 
 A story should begin in a simple, clear, and interesting way, 
 and should end wlien you have reached the ending. Do not 
 try to fill it out when 3'our ideas are all used up, and do not 
 add a " moral." Some of the compositions will be read in the 
 class. Which have the best beginnings ? Which tell the story 
 most clearly and directly ? Which have good endings ? Are 
 any of them good enough to go into the class story-book ?
 
 Phrases and Prepositions 199 
 
 221. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 PHRASES AND PREPOSITIONS 
 
 The following expressions are prepositional phrases: of me, 
 with pleasure, on the table, fro7n the country, in time, by courtesy, 
 for us, at the picnic. 
 
 In each expression there is a principal word, either a noun 
 or a pronoun. 
 
 In each expression there is an introducing word, called a 
 preposition. 
 
 The principal word in a phrase (a noun or a pronoun) may 
 be modified by adjectives; as, in the good old summer time, 
 under the long red box. 
 
 Make sentences, each containing a phrase with one of these 
 prepositions. 
 
 on from against for 
 
 of into by over 
 
 below in beneath through 
 
 ■under at down with 
 
 A phrase may be used like an adjective to modify a noun or 
 pronoun. 
 
 A phrase may be used like an adverb to modify a verb or an 
 adjective. 
 
 Make sentences in which the following phrases modify 
 nouns or pronouns: 
 
 on the table, of honor, under the carpet, in his place, beneath 
 the apple trees, down the street, with me. 
 
 Make sentences in which the following phrases play the 
 part of adverbs and modify verbs or adjectives: 
 
 into the shop, in fun, at home, against his father's wishes, down 
 the street, for my own, toward the city, with my old friend.
 
 200 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 222. ORAL LESSON 
 
 HOEING AND FISHING. AN UNFINISHED STORY 
 
 Tlie sun was Wcariu, and the wind still, as James and his father 
 hurried back and forth through the plowed field along a small 
 ]Srew England lake, dropping little handfuls of beans in the fur- 
 rows and covering them with their hoes. The day was Saturday, 
 
 and James cherished a feeling that 
 a world in which a boy had to work 
 on his one weekly holiday was not 
 ordered properly. The field was 
 big; and although they had been 
 at work all the four hours since 
 sunrise, they would probably not 
 be done until the sun was going 
 down over the wooded hills. Two 
 of his friends were off in the woods 
 following a leaping, dashing little 
 stream up the mountain side, and, 
 he felt sure, filling their baskets 
 with the beautiful spotted trout. 
 To-morrow would be Sunday ; he 
 would have to wear a stiff collar 
 and tight, squeaky shoes. After 
 Sunday school his friends Avould 
 tell him all about their fishing and 
 tlieir catch. Perhaps one of them 
 had already got the famous big 
 trout uuder the mill-race that 
 every man and boy in the town 
 had tried for, but no one had ever 
 hooked. He thought he had seen that trout once, but he wasn't 
 quite sure. And his hands were getting blistered from this heavy
 
 An Unfinished Stoiy 
 
 201 
 
 hoe (the fishing pole raised blisters sometimes, but that didn't 
 matter), and he was tired and hot and altogether unhappy. 
 
 So the slow day wore on, with an hour for rest and lunch at 
 noon. At four o'clock one of the neighbors drove up, and hailing 
 his father, took him off to look at some cattle that were for sale. 
 <' There are only six rows to do, James," said his father. " Hurry 
 along, and you'll be through before dark." 
 
 Meanwhile the sky had grown gray, a dark cloud came up out 
 of the west, faint thunder rolled in the distance, and — what was 
 that ? Yes, a fish leaped in the lake ; then another, and another, 
 until they seemed to be calling to James, " Come, have a try at 
 us!" It was too much for the tired boy. He dug a big hole 
 with his hoe, poured in the rest of the beans, and hurried across 
 the field to the woodshed where his fishing tackle hung. 
 
 Think of what the ending or tlie sequel to this story 
 might be. Invent as many endings for it as you can. 
 Which is the most natural, or most interesting ?
 
 202 Everyday English 
 
 223. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 BUILDING SENTENCES 
 
 Taking as a general topic the story in Lesson 222, write 
 declarative sentences : 
 
 1. With a noun, an adjective, and a prepositional phrase in the 
 subject. 
 
 2. With a noun and two adjectives in the subject. 
 
 3. With a compound subject. 
 
 4. With a verb group and an adverb in the predicate. 
 
 5. With a prepositional phrase in the predicate. 
 
 6. With two i^repositional phrases. 
 Exchange papers and correct as in Lesson 214. 
 
 224. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. INTERJECTIONS 
 
 Words used to connect words, sentences, or parts of sen- 
 tences are called conjunctions. 
 
 Andy but, or, therefore, hence, hoivever, if, that, are some of 
 the most common conjunctions. 
 
 Spring has come cmd the flowers are blooming. 
 
 The crocuses cmd hyacinths are here. 
 
 It is raining, but the sun is shinins; through the chjuds. 
 
 It will be rainy or cloudy to-morrow. 
 
 The arithmetic papers are excellent, therefore the class may be 
 excused at three o'clock. 
 
 The spelling lesson was poor ; hoivever, you will do better to- 
 morrow. 
 
 Prepositions introduce nouns or pronouns, thus making 
 phrases. Conjunctions connect words or parts of sentences, but 
 do not make phrases.
 
 The Concord Hymn 203 
 
 In Stevenson's poem " Singing," Lesson 7, and in the ac- 
 count of Washington, Lesson 43, select tlie prepositions and 
 conjunctions. How is each one used ? 
 
 Words used to express strong feeling are called interjections. 
 
 Some of the most common are: 0, Oh, Ah, hurrah, alas, hello. 
 They are usually followed by an exclamation mark or a 
 comma, and are thus separated from the sentence. 
 
 1. ! please help me. 2. Hurrah ! we have won the game. 
 3. Hello ! is that you ? 4. Ah, I see that you were here before 
 me. 5. There is, alas, no hope. 
 
 225. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE CONCORD HYMN 
 
 By the rude bridge that arched the flood, 
 Their flag to April's breeze unfurled, 
 
 Here once the embattled farmers stood, 
 And fired the shot heard round the world. 
 
 The foe long since in silence slept ; 
 
 Alike the Conqueror silent sleeps ; 
 And Time the ruined bridge has swept 
 
 Down the dark stream which seaward creeps. 
 
 On this green bank, by this soft stream, 
 
 We set to-day a votive stone; 
 That memory may their deed redeem, 
 
 When, like our sires, our sons are gone. 
 
 Spirit! who made those freemen dare 
 
 To die, or leave their children free, 
 Bid Time and Nature gently spare 
 
 The shaft we raise to them and Thee. 
 
 — Ralph Waldo Emerson.
 
 204 
 
 Everyday iMi^lisli 
 
 This poem was written to celebrate the monument which 
 
 marks the spot where the 
 battle of Concord was 
 fought, April 19, 1775. 
 At the beginning of what 
 war did the battle of Con- 
 cord take place ? Describe 
 the condition of affairs 
 in Boston. Why did the 
 British troops march out to 
 Concord ? How were the 
 Americans warned of the 
 approach of the British ? 
 
 What does the last line 
 of the first stanza mean ? 
 Wliat thought is expressed 
 in the second stanza ? 
 What are the meanings of 
 votive and redeem in the 
 stanza ? What reason is given for erecting the monu- 
 ? What Spirit " made 
 
 third 
 inent 
 those heroes dare to die " ? 
 
 Ralph Waldo Emerson has a 
 place among the greatest Amer- 
 icans, along with Washington, 
 Lincoln, Lee and a few others. 
 J le was a philosopher and thinker 
 wliose ideas have influenced many 
 men all over the world. When 
 you are older you will read his 
 essays and addresses. Emerson 
 was born in 1803, and died in 1883, at Concord, Massachusetts, 
 where he lived for fifty years.
 
 The Parts of Speech 205 
 
 226. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 THE CHOICE OF WORDS 
 
 The teacher will read aloud or write upon the board some 
 sentences that have been written by the class in Lesson 214, 
 217, or 223, underlining words which have been used im- 
 properly or which are not well chosen. The class will 
 rewrite these sentences, substituting different words for 
 those indicated. 
 
 227. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH REVIEWED 
 
 The subject of a sentence is a noun or pronoun. The 
 predicate is a verb. Nouns, pronouns, and verbs, do the 
 chief work in a sentence. You cannot express the simplest 
 thought without their aid. 
 
 Adjectives and adverbs are always used as modifiers of 
 other words. They are assistants to nouns and verbs. They 
 help us to express ideas more exactly and more nicely. 
 
 Prepositions and conjunctions are link words. They con- 
 nect or link other words together. They connect ideas. 
 
 Interjections are not very useful. We employ them only 
 when we are excited. But excitement is necessary now and 
 then, even in the sentence. 
 
 The noun and the verb are the main parts of the machine. 
 The pronoun is very helpful in taking the place of the noun. 
 Whatever a noun can do, a pronoun can do. Adjectives 
 assist nouns and pronouns. Adverbs assist verbs and adjec- 
 tives. Prepositions and conjunctions are kept very busy 
 linking one part of the machine with another. Interjec- 
 tions are the horns and whistles. Each sentence is an active 
 machine which carries our thoughts to others.
 
 206 Everyday English 
 
 The same word may be used at different times in different 
 ways. 
 
 1. The bi'ttve man struggled with all his might. 
 
 2. Who would brave the dangers of the whirlpool ? 
 
 3. The Indian brave was splendid in war paint and feathers. 
 
 In the first sentence brave is an adjective, in the second 
 it is a verb, in the third a noun. In determining what part 
 of speech a word is, we must always decide what use it serves 
 in the sentence. 
 
 From the compositions written in Lesson 217, select : 
 
 Two proper nouns ; five common nouns. 
 
 Five pronouns, telling what nouns they stand for. 
 
 Five verbs and five verb-groups. 
 
 Five adjectives, telling what words they modify. 
 
 Five adverbs, telling what words they modify. 
 
 Five prepositions, telling what words they introduce. 
 
 Five conjunctions, telling what parts of the sentence they 
 
 connect. 
 Five interjections — but can you find any? 
 
 228. ORAL LESSON 
 
 To-day we are to have a series of stories. Each pupil is 
 to tell as clearly as possible about a single adventure or deed 
 of one of the heroes whom we have talked about in Lessons 
 213 and 219. Here are suggestions for topics. Can you 
 pronounce all the names ? How can you learn the correct 
 })ronunciation ? 
 
 The first sentence of your story is important. It should 
 introduce tlie subject of the story clearly, so that every one 
 will understand what follows. When you have come to the 
 end of the story, stop. Do not try to tell it over again.
 
 A Narrative 
 
 207 
 
 The Combat between Hector 
 
 and Achilles 
 The Death of Achilles 
 The Capture of Troy 
 Ulysses and the Cyclops 
 Ulysses and the Lotus Eaters 
 Ulysses and Circe 
 Ulysses returns Home 
 Jason and the Golden Fleece 
 Hercules and the Garden of 
 
 the Hesperides 
 Perseus and Andromeda 
 
 Orpheus and his Magic Song 
 
 Siegfried and his Sword 
 
 Siegfried and the Rhinegold 
 
 Brunhild 
 
 Beowulf and Grendel 
 
 Beowulf and the Dragon 
 
 King Arthur and his Sword 
 
 Excalibur 
 Adventures of Sir Gareth 
 Death of King Arthur 
 Roland and his Horn 
 
 229. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A NARRATIVE 
 
 There are many stories printed in this book, and you have 
 had to write others of your own composition. You have 
 learned some of the rules of narration or story-telling. 
 Begin with a sentence or two that will help the reader to 
 understand what follows. Tell things in the order in which 
 they have happened. Stop when the story is finished. 
 
 Write one of the incidents told in Lesson 228, making a 
 composition of several paragraphs. 
 
 230. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 The stories written in Lesson 229 are to be criticised by 
 the class. Mistakes may be marked by their abbreviations 
 in the margin: Sp. (spelling), Cap. (capitalization), P (punc- 
 tuation), ^ (paragraphing), G (grammar). Papers should 
 be returned and corrected. Remember these marks of criti- 
 cism for future use.
 
 i>08 Everyday English 
 
 231. ORAL LESSOX 
 
 THE DANGEROUS HOUSEFLY 
 
 There is an old saying, " As harmless as a fly " ; and until 
 recently the Hy has been regai'ded only as an unpleasant but 
 luirmless nuisance. Had our forefathers known as unich about 
 tlies as we now know, they might have made the proverb, " as 
 dangerous as the fly." His origin and his habits are of the 
 worst sort. He is, in short, a disgusting and dangerous pest. 
 
 He begins life in the filth of stables, in decaying garbage, and 
 in other unsavory places, and increases with fearful rapidity. 
 The adult fly will lay in manure or decayed 
 matter a hundred eggs or more. In a day or 
 two these hatch, and there is a cluster of tiny 
 white maggots. In two or three days they 
 enter the chrysalis stage ; that is, they cover 
 themselves with a tiny shell. In about a week 
 "ijjuj the little fly emerges, complete in wings, legs, 
 and all, and grows rapidly to full size. 
 
 He is now a restless, active creature, flying hither and thither 
 and often traveling over a considerable distance. His appetite is 
 impartial and his diet varied. He will feed upon the most dis- 
 gusting filth, and come straight from this to lap tlie milk in your 
 glass and to walk over the dessert on your plate. 
 
 His feet are wonderfully constructed. They have pincer-like 
 claws, a soft pad overgrown with hairs in the center, and on the 
 hairs a sticky substance that enables him to hold on to walls or 
 ceilings. AVhat seems to be his tongue is a long extended lower 
 lip, rough coated on the inside, which he lets down to lick food 
 or lap liquids. You can see it at work as he feeds. 
 
 Both lip and feet are, as you see, perfectly adapted to carrying 
 deadly germs from his loathsome haunts and food into your house 
 and your food. He used to be considered a useful scavenger,
 
 A Business Letter 209 
 
 who helped to save us from disease. He is now known to spread 
 such diseases as cholera, typhoid fever, and diphtheria. So he is 
 hardly entitled to the mercy we used to ask for him. The person 
 who is so gentle that he " will not hurt a fly " is not for that 
 reason a good friend to his fellow men. 
 
 The common housefly has been associated with men for many 
 centuries. There are references to him in some of the oldest litera- 
 ture in the world. But he seems not to have been known on this 
 continent before the Europeans came. America gave to Europe 
 corn, potatoes, and tobacco ; and Europe has given us the English 
 sparrow and the housefly along with more desirable things. 
 
 The scientists have told us also how to keep clear of the flies. 
 Houses and grounds should be kept free of decaying organic 
 matter, and stables should be screened, so as to cut them ofE from 
 their breeding places. Our houses should be carefully screened 
 and food kept free from their dangerous feet and mouths. Fly 
 paper and fly traps can be bought everywhere. Your teacher, also, 
 can probably tell you other means of protection. But don't forget 
 that the "harmless fly" of the proverb is tlie dangerous fly of fact. 
 
 232. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 A BUSINESS LETTER 
 
 Write a letter to the Department of Agriculture at Wash- 
 ington, requesting the officials there to send you one of the 
 bulletins published by the department. You may wish to 
 read the one that treats of mosquitoes and flies, and how 
 they are to be exterminated ; or you may wish for informa- 
 tion on the cultivation of apples, peaches, or other fruits ; 
 or you may be interested in dairying, or in growing corn, 
 wheat, potatoes, or garden vegetables. The Department 
 issues many bulletins containing much accurate and valuable 
 information.
 
 210 Everyday Eng-lisli 
 
 233. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 TRANSITIVE VERBS 
 
 Most verbs tell of action. Play^Jiy, howl., jump, strike.^ are 
 all verbs of action. Some of these tell of a completed action. 
 The bird flies is a complete sentence. No other words are 
 necessary. The \evh flies tells of a complete action. What 
 is the verb in each of the four following sentences? Is each 
 sentence complete? 
 
 Edward plays. The dog howls. 
 
 Birds sing. Pretty little Edna is running. 
 
 Now look at the expressions below on the left of the page. 
 Are they complete sentences? Why do not these verbs com- 
 plete the sense as did those in the four sentences above? 
 Take one of these verbs, shuts. It makes no sense until you 
 shut something. The action is incomplete until something 
 is shut. So it is with all these verbs. Each expresses an 
 action that cannot take place until there is something for it 
 to act on. There must be something to shut, carry, wash, 
 bring, scrub, show, strike, hit, or wear. 
 
 In each instance the sense is incomplete. You feel like 
 asking what? In order to complete the sense, you add a 
 word. Read the expression across the page. Now there is 
 something to act on, and the sense is complete. 
 
 Edward shuts the door. 
 
 Birds carry straws. 
 
 The dog washes himself. 
 
 Edna brings the flowers. 
 
 She scrubs the dining-room floor. 
 
 He struck me. 
 
 The rock hit the window. 
 
 We all wear shoes.
 
 / The War on the Mosquito 211 
 
 Verbs that do not express a complete action are called tran- 
 sitive. 
 
 Words used to complete the action of verbs are called objects 
 of the verb. 
 
 Verbs that express complete action and do not take an object 
 are called intransitive. 
 
 In the following sentences select (1) the intransitive verbs, 
 or verb-groups, (2) the transitive verbs, or verb-groups, and 
 (3) the objects of the transitive verbs. 
 
 1. Why should you hurt a fly ? 
 
 2. The fly begins life in filth. 
 
 3. The youug fly grows very rapidly. 
 
 4. He is flying toward us. 
 
 5. Why do we fear him ? 
 
 6. He brings with him dirt, danger, and disease. 
 
 7. He can walk on the ceiling. 
 
 8. Kill the flies and save the children. 
 
 234. ORAL LESSON 
 
 THE PESTILENT MOSQUITO 
 
 The mosquitoes are more widespread on the earth than man. 
 Th-'^y thrive alike in the tropics and in such cold, inhospitable lands 
 as Alaska and Greenland. In upper Canada there are broad and 
 fertile regions where the summer is made unendurable for horses 
 and men by these little pests. 
 
 Pests though they are, their life history is interesting. The eggs, 
 which are laid on stagnant water in a boat-shaped, floating cluster 
 of two or three hundred, hatch in six to twelve hours. The young, 
 or larvae, known as " wrigglers," live near the top of the water, 
 breathing through a tube at the end of their tails, which they keep 
 at the surface of the water. At the end of ten or twelve days they
 
 212 
 
 Everyday Eiig'lish 
 
 cover themselves with a sort of case. In this stage the creature is 
 
 I called a 7)»/)a. In two 
 
 11 /w days more they emerge 
 
 as mosquitoes. Thus 
 
 '! I ij it is easy to see how 
 ./;'liil their numbers can 
 
 g grow to millions in 
 
 i^wm^i 
 
 
 LliE HISTORY OF MOSQUITO. 
 
 STEGOMYIA OR YELLOW 
 FEVER MOSQUITO. 
 
 CULEX OR COMMON MOSQUITO 
 ABOVK, ANOPHELES OR MA- 
 LARIAL MOSQUITO BELOW. 
 
 swampy, marshy places, during moist, 
 hot weather. 
 
 If the mosquitoes did nothing more 
 than irritate us with their song and 
 their bite, there would be reason enough 
 for getting rid of them ; for tlioy change 
 many regions from delightful homes to 
 places of torture. But there is a far 
 worse charge against them. One va- 
 riety, the anojjheles (pronounced Sn-o'- 
 ph6l-es), carries the germs of malaria 
 from sick people to the well ; and an- 
 other variety, the stegomyia (pro- 
 nounced st6g-o-my'-ia), spreads yellow 
 fever in the same way. These last two
 
 The War on the Mosquito 213 
 
 kinds fly and bite only at night. So that especial precautions 
 against them must be taken after nightfall. It is important to 
 know the difference between the ordinary mosquito (called culex) 
 and the dangerous kinds. The former, when at rest, sit, like most 
 insects, parallel to the surface on which they rest ; the anopheles 
 sit with their tails pointed upward as if standing on their 
 heads. 
 
 There is a wide and growing crusade against the mosquitoes. 
 The results of this war on the mosquito are already showing in 
 many places. The Panama Canal is made possible by protecting 
 the workmen from yellow fever and malaria. In this country a 
 national society has been formed to further the work of extermi- 
 nating them. A valuable bulletin on the subject has been printed 
 by the Department of Agriculture at Washington, and will be sent 
 free to any one who asks for it. 
 
 What are the means of defense against them ? First, screen 
 the house carefully. Then remove or cover all stagnant water, in 
 puddles, ditches, tin cans, rain barrels, and other places. Ponds 
 and marshes should be either drained or covered with a thin cover- 
 ing of kerosene. This thin film prevents the adults from laying 
 eggs on the water, and kills the "wrigglers" by keeping them 
 from breathing. 
 
 Mosquitoes have some natural enemies that should be taken 
 care of. Tadpoles and small fish, such as goldfish, sunfish, 
 minnows, and the like, feed upon the eggs and the "wrig- 
 glers." The full-grown mosquitoes are eaten by dragon flies 
 (sometimes called " devil's darning needles "), bats, and small 
 birds. 
 
 Perhaps we shall some time be far enough advanced in civiliza- 
 tion to have rid our country of such enemies as flies and mosqui- 
 toes. The presence of these and other insect pests means ignorance, 
 laziness, carelessness, and dirt ; and these are not the traits of a 
 high civilization.
 
 214 Everyday Englisli 
 
 235. WRITTEN T.ESSON 
 
 LETTERS OF INVITATION 
 
 Write an answer to this invitation. Some of the answers 
 are to be copied on the board and corrected ])y the class. 
 
 345 West St., Denver, Col., 
 Tuesday, Dec. 20, 1911. 
 Dear Arthur : 
 
 May we have the pleasure of your company at our house a 
 week from to-day, Tuesday, the twenty-seventh, at four o'clock ? 
 My friend, May Lawrence, of Philadelphia, is to be with me for 
 the holidays, and Mamma is giving a little party, that she may 
 meet some of my friends here. 
 
 Truly yours, 
 
 Dorothy Neilson. 
 Mr. Arthur Bigelow, 
 16 Center St., Denver. 
 
 236. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 TRANSITIVE VERBS AND OBJECTS 
 
 Select tlie transitive verbs and objects in the following sen- 
 tences: 
 
 1. May wrote a letter. 
 
 2. She put the letter in an envelope, and put a stamp on the 
 envelope. 
 
 3. She printed the address very carefully. 
 
 4. She gave the letter to the postman. 
 
 5. He took it to the post office. 
 
 6. There he put May's letter and many others into a bag. 
 
 7. The postman threw the bag on the train. 
 
 8. The train rushed on to Philadelphia.
 
 On Explaining Things 215 
 
 9. The next morning George received the letter. 
 10. He opened the envelope and read the letter. 
 
 Select the subject, the verb, and the object, in each of the 
 following sentences: 
 
 I struck him. I caught her. Whom did he chase ? 
 
 He struck me. She brought it. Whom will you choose ? 
 
 We chased them. I hit her. You laid it there. 
 
 They chased us. I found them. He set us right. 
 
 You caught me. Wlio found her ? He raised them. 
 
 Most of the personal pronouns and the relative pronoun 
 who have different forms when used as subjects and when 
 used as objects. 
 
 Subjects : 
 
 I 
 
 we 
 
 you 
 
 he 
 
 she 
 
 it 
 
 they 
 
 who 
 
 Objects : 
 
 me 
 
 us 
 
 you 
 
 him 
 
 her 
 
 it 
 
 them 
 
 whpm 
 
 Make sentences using one pronoun as subject and another 
 pronoun as object in each sentence. 
 
 237. ORAL LESSON 
 
 ON EXPLAINING THINGS 
 
 In Lessons 231 and 234, and elsewhere, we have had certain 
 things explained. We have to do a good deal of explaining and 
 to listen to a good deal of explaining in our daily life. You ex- 
 plain to your mother how you came to upset your glass of milk 
 on the clean tablecloth, and your mother ex,plains to you the way 
 of avoiding such messy accidents. Some one explains to you how 
 a kite is made, and you make the kite and then explain to your 
 little brother how you did it. Your teacher explains a point in 
 the lesson, and then you explain the same point to make clear to 
 her and to yourself that you understand it. The business man
 
 216 Everyday Kiiglisli 
 
 explains to the office boy what his duties are, and the boy hopes 
 sometime to be an employer himself and explain to a boy what 
 the boy is to do. So, altogether, as you see, there's a good deal 
 of explaining going on in this active world of ours. 
 
 Now some of this is good and some of it is bad ; some of it is 
 interesting, and some of it is dull ; some of it is clear, and some 
 of it is muddled. Here are three good rules : be as brief as 
 possible, as interesting as possible, and as clear as possible. 
 
 If it should happen that you find yourself unable to explain a 
 number of things clearly and simply, it probably means that you 
 are not as wide-awake and observant as you ought to be. 
 
 Try to explain orally several of these things, or some other 
 things that you know more about. Make each explanation suit- 
 able for a single paragraph only. 
 
 (1) Feeding a canary, (2) Keeping a bird's cage clean. (3) 
 Damming up a brook. (4) Cutting ice. (5) Storing ice in the ice- 
 house. (6) Spinning a top. (7) A game of marbles. (8) Pitching 
 a curve. (9) Planting flower-seeds. (10) Dressing a doll. (11) 
 Boiling an egg. (12) Lighting the street lamps. (13) Keeping 
 the streets clean. (14) Picking apples. (15) Writing a compo- 
 sition. 
 
 238. WRITTEN I>ESSON 
 
 EXPLANATIONS 
 
 Select one of the best subjects for explanation that you can, 
 and write a clear account of it in a single paragraph. Make 
 a plan of your paragraph before you begin to write, making 
 sure that you follow a clear and natural order. Do the 
 writing neatly and accurately. 
 
 Perhaps the teacher will have time to hear some of the 
 explanations read aloud, and let you compare them.
 
 Case 
 
 217 
 
 239. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 CASE 
 
 Case is a grammatical terra used to indicate the relation- 
 ship of nouns or pronouns to other words in the sentence. 
 
 A noun or pronoun that is the subject of a verb is in the 
 nominative case. 
 
 A noun or pronoun denoting possession is in tlie possessive 
 case. 
 
 A noun or pronoun that is the object of a transitive verb 
 is in the objective case. 
 
 The personal pronouns (Lesson 209) have separate forms 
 for the different cases. The apostrophe is not used in the 
 possessive case of pronouns. 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 
 Nominative 
 
 Possessive 
 
 Objective 
 
 1st Person 
 
 I 
 
 my, mine 
 
 me 
 
 2d " 
 
 
 you 
 
 your, yours 
 
 you 
 
 
 
 he 
 
 his 
 
 him 
 
 3d " 
 
   
 
 she 
 
 hers 
 
 her 
 
 
 
 . it 
 
 its 
 PLURAL 
 
 it 
 
 
 Nor 
 
 ninative 
 
 Possessive 
 
 Objective 
 
 1st Persoist 
 
 we 
 
 our, ours 
 
 us 
 
 2d " 
 
 
 you 
 
 your, yours 
 
 you 
 
 3d " 
 
 
 they 
 
 their, theirs 
 
 them 
 
 The pronoun who also has three forms : who, whose, whom. 
 
 Make four sentences each containing a pronoun in the 
 nominative case : four sentences each containing a pronoun 
 in the possessive case ; and four each containing a pronoun 
 in the objective case.
 
 218 Everyday English 
 
 240. ORAL LESSON 
 
 A MIDSUMMER-NIGHT'S DREAM 
 
 A part of Shakespeare's play 
 
 A Midsummer- Nighf s Dream 
 
 takes place iu a forest at night. 
 
 Thither come many fairies in the 
 
 trains of Titauia, their queen, 
 
 and Oberon, their king. Pease- 
 blossom, Cobweb, Moth, and 
 
 IVIustardseed are the names of 
 
 some who sing and dance with 
 
 Titania. The merriest and the 
 
 most mischievous of all is Puck, 
 
 or Kobin Goodfellow, the servant of King Oberon. 
 
 His pranks make trouble for many mortals, and especially for 
 
 Titania. Oberon squeezes on Titania's eyelids the juice of a 
 
 flower which will make her fall 
 in love with the first person 
 whom she sees when she awakes. 
 Puck arranges that she shall see 
 a foolish weaver named J>ottom, 
 on whose shoulders he places the 
 great head of an ass. Pottom 
 has also been asleep, and when 
 he awakes is greatly bewildered 
 to find that he has a hairy face, 
 an appetite for hay, and a bevy 
 of pretty little fairies to serve 
 
 him. A few selections will give some idea of tlie story of the 
 
 play, and will show what charming poetry the fairies talked. 
 
 Read or recite the selections as if they made a play.
 
 A Midsummer-Nip-ht's Dream 219 
 
 I. A Fairy axd Puck meet iisr the forest 
 Puck. How now, spirit ! whither wander you ? 
 
 Fairy. Over hill, over dale, 
 
 Thorough bush, thorough brier, 
 Over park, over pale, 
 
 Thorough flood, thorough fire, 
 I do wander everywhere, 
 Swifter than the moon's sphere ; 
 And I serve the fairy queen, 
 To dew her orbs upon the green. 
 The cowslips tall her pensioners be : 
 In their gold coats spots you see ; 
 These be rubies, fairy favours. 
 In those freckles live their savours : 
 
 I must go and seek some dewdrops here 
 And hang a pearl in every cowslip's ear. 
 Farewell, thou lob of spirits ; I'll be gone: 
 Our queen and all her elves come here anon. 
 
 II. The fairies sing a lullaby for Titania 
 
 First Fairy. You spotted snakes with double tongue, 
 Thorny hedgehogs, be not seen ; 
 Newts and blind-worms, do no wrong, 
 Come not near our fairy queen. 
 
 Chorus. Philomel, with melody 
 
 Sing in our sweet lullaby ; 
 Lulla, lulla, lullaby, lulla, lulla, lullaby : 
 Never harm, 
 Nor spell nor charm. 
 Come our lovely lady nigh ; 
 So, good night, with lullaby.
 
 220 Everyday English 
 
 First Fairy. Weaving spiders, come not here ; 
 
 Hence, you long-legg'd spinners, hence ! 
 Beetles black, approach not near ; 
 Worm nor snail, do no offence. 
 
 Chorus. Philomel, with melody, etc. 
 
 Second Fairy. Hence, away ! now all is well • 
 One aloof stand sentinel. 
 
 Exeunt fairies. Titania sleeps. 
 
 Enter Oheron and squeezes the flower on Titania''s eyelids. 
 
 Oberon. What thon seest when thou dost wake, 
 
 Do it for thy true-love take. 
 Love and languish for his sake : 
 Be it ounce, or cat, or bear, 
 Pard, or boar with bristled hair, 
 In thy eye that shall appear 
 When thou wakest, it is thy dear : 
 Wake when some vile thing is near. Exit. 
 
 HI. Bottom and Titaxia awake 
 
 Enter Titania, Bottom {with the head of an ass), and the fairies. 
 
 Titania. Come, sit thee down upon this flowery bed, 
 
 While I thy amiable cheeks do coy. 
 And stick musk-roses in thy sleek smooth head, 
 And kiss thy fair large ears, my gentle joy. 
 
 Bottom. Where's Peaseblossom ? 
 
 l\'(i!H'hlussom. Ready. 
 
 Bottom. Scratch my head, Peaseblossom. Where's Moun- 
 
 sieur Cobweb? 
 
 Cobweb. Ready.
 
 A Midsummer-Night's Dream 221 
 
 Bottom. 
 
 Mustardseed. 
 Bottom. 
 
 Mustardseed. 
 Bottom. 
 
 Titania. 
 Bottom. 
 
 Titania. 
 
 Bottom. 
 
 Titania. 
 
 Mounsieur Cobweb, good moimsieur, get you your 
 weapons in your hand, and kill me a red-hipped 
 humble-bee on the top of a thistle ; and, good 
 Mounsieur, bring me the honey-bag. Do not fret 
 yourself too much in the action, mounsieur ; and, 
 good mounsieur, have a care the honey-bag break 
 not; I would be loath to have you overflown 
 with a honey-bag, signior. Where's Mounsieur 
 Mustardseed ? 
 
 Ready 
 
 Give me your neaf, Mounsieur Mustardseed. Pray 
 you, leave your courtesy, good mounsieur. 
 
 What's your will ? 
 
 Nothing, good mounsieur, but to help Cavalery 
 Cobweb to scratch. I must to the barber's, 
 mounsieur; for methinks I am marvellous hairy 
 about the face ; and I am such a tender ass, as if 
 my hair do but tickle me, I must scratch. 
 
 What, wilt thou hear some music, my sweet love ? 
 
 I have a reasonable good ear in music. Let's have 
 the tongs and the bones. 
 
 Or say, sweet love, what thou desirest to eat. 
 
 Truly, a peck of provender : I could munch your 
 good dry oats. Methinks I have a great desire 
 to a bottle of hay : good hay, sweet hay, hath no 
 fellow. 
 
 I have a venturous fairy that shall seek the squir- 
 rel's hoard, and fetch thee new nuts.
 
 »>•>') 
 
 Everyday English 
 
 Bottom. 
 
 Titania. 
 
 I Lad rather have a handful or two of dried peas. 
 But 1 pray you, let none of your people stir me : 
 I have an exposition of sleep come upon me. 
 
 Sleep thou, and 1 will wind thee in my arms. 
 Fairies, be gone, and be all ways away. 
 
 Exeunt fairies. 
 
 So doth the woodbine the sweet honeysuckle 
 Gently entwist; the female ivy so 
 Enrings the barky fingers of the elm. 
 0, how I love thee ! how I dote on thee ! 
 
 They sleep. 
 
 IV. Oberox releases Titania from her enchaxtsiext 
 
 Titania and Bottom asleep. Enter Oberon and Puck. 
 
 Oberon. Be as thou wast wont to be ; 
 
 See as thou wast wont to see : 
 Dian's bud o'er Cupid's flower 
 Hath such force and blessed power. 
 Now, my Titania ; wake you, ray sweet queen. 
 
 Titania. My Oberon! what visions have I seen! 
 
 Methought T was enamour'd of an ass. 
 
 Oberon. There lies your love. 
 
 Titania. How came these things to pass ? 
 
 0, how mine eyes do loathe his visage now ! 
 
 Oberon. Silence awhile. Robin, take off this head. 
 
 Titania, music call ; and strike more dead 
 Than conunoii slcc'i) of all these five the sense. 
 
 Titania. Music, ho ! music, such as charmeth sleep ! 
 
 Puck [_to Bottom']. Now, when thou wakest, with thine own fool's 
 
 eyes peep.
 
 A Midsummer-Nio-lit's Dream 
 
 223 
 
 Oberon. Sound, music ! Gome, my queen, take hands witli me 
 
 And rock the ground whereon these sleepers be. 
 
 PucJc. Fairy king, attend, and mark : 
 
 I do hear the morning lark. 
 
 Oberon. Then, my queen, in silence sad, 
 
 Trip we after night's shade : 
 We the globe can compass soon, 
 Swifter than the wandering moon. 
 
 Titania. Come, my lord ; and in our flight, 
 Tell me how it came this night, 
 That I sleeping here was found 
 With these mortals on the ground. Exeunt. 
 
 Memorize either the Fairy's speech to Puck or the Lullaby 
 for Titania. Can you remember a song by Ariel, another 
 fairy, who has a part in Shakespeare's Tempest? 
 
 orbs, eyes; lob, scamp; anon, soon; newts, lizards; Philomel, nightin- 
 gale; spinners, spiders; ounce, panther; pard, leopard; mounsieur, sir; 
 neaf,Jist; bottle, bundle; sad, serious.
 
 224 Everyday English 
 
 241. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 BUILDING SENTENCES 
 
 Write sentences about the fairies containing: 
 
 1. The possessive and the objective case of he. 
 
 2. A pronoun of the first person in a prepositional phrase. 
 
 3. A transitive verb with a pronoun as direct object. 
 
 4. A direct quotation. 
 
 5. One noun in the nominative, another in the possessive, and 
 
 a third in the objective case. 
 
 6. A pronoun in the nominative, another in the possessive, and 
 
 a thii-d in the objective case. 
 
 7. An intransitive verb. 
 
 8. Three prepositional phrases. 
 
 9. A quotation within a quotation (see Lessons 76 and 120). 
 
 242. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE CASE (Continued) 
 
 We have seen that a noun or pronoun used as the object 
 of a transitive verb is in the objective case. A noun or pro- 
 noun in a prepositional phrase is also in the objective case. 
 
 The teacher put the hooh on the shelf. 
 
 Booh and shelf are both in the objective case. Why? 
 What is the case of teacher? 
 
 I bought it for him. 
 
 What is the case of I? of it ? of him ? 
 \\\ the following sentences, is the verb transitive or intran- 
 sitive? Give tlie case of each noun and pronoun. 
 
 Example: The children chose a pony for a present. The verb 
 cliose is transitive. Children is in the nominative case because it
 
 rv 
 
 The Indirect Object 225 
 
 is the simple subject. Pony is in the objective case because it is 
 the object of the verb. Present is in the objective case because it 
 is in a prepositional phrase. 
 
 1. Mosquitoes lay their eggs in stagnant water. 
 
 2. The young mosquitoes live on the surface of the water. 
 
 3. The female mosquito bites us. 
 
 4. Some mosquitoes carry the germs of malaria. 
 
 5. This kind flies and bites only at night. 
 
 6. The Department of Agriculture prints a bulletin about the 
 
 mosquito. 
 
 7. You should remove all stagnant water in tin cans. 
 
 8. She bought a book for me. 
 
 9. I read it carefully. 
 
 10. Shall I give it to him or to his brother ? 
 
 INDIRECT OBJECT 
 
 In the sentence — James gave a dollar. — dollar is the ob- 
 ject of the verb gave. In the sentence — James gave John a 
 dollar. — there are two objects of the verb gave., dollar, and 
 John. Dollar is the direct object, and tells what James gave. 
 John tells to whom James gave a dollar, and is called the in- 
 direct object. 
 
 In the following sentences select the direct object, the 
 indirect object, and the object of a preposition. 
 
 1. The people gave the soldiers a royal welcome. 
 
 2. Please give us a ride. 
 
 3. Give us this>4ay our daily bread. 
 
 4. Robert of Lincoln gathers his little ones seeds. 
 
 5. Send me a box of candy. 
 
 6. You told him a good story. 
 
 7. Can you find us some violets in the woods? 
 
 8. AVill you open the door for me? 
 
 Q
 
 22 C) Everyday English 
 
 243. ORAL LESSON 
 
 IN MANY WORLDS 
 
 In this world of ours there are many worlds. Your dog has a 
 very different world from your own. Most of your worlds are 
 closed for the dog because he cannot speak, or read or write. 
 Language is the key that unlocks the door to many wonderful 
 realms. In this book, through our study of language, we have 
 unlocked some of these doors and taken a peep into some of these 
 interesting countries. Without speech you could not get much 
 beyond the dog's world. The more you know, the more worlds 
 you may discover and explore. 
 
 Let us look again at some of these worlds of which we have 
 had a glimpse in this book. First, there was what we may call 
 the ever3'day world with children at play or at work, doing and 
 saying the same kind of things that you do and say. Then there 
 was the world of plants and animals, in which we tried to learn 
 something of the lives of flowers and trees and birds and beasts. 
 And there was the great Avorld that stretched far beyond the city 
 or farm of everyday life, the world of mountains and prairies, of 
 cities and states, and of many strange peoples and countries. 
 There was the world of history, the world that no longer is, but 
 ivas; and you have seen something of that, of men and deeds 
 and sayings thousands of years old, and also of great men and 
 deeds of our brief national history. We have had a peep, too, at 
 the world of science, at the wonderful machinery of this universe 
 in which everything from the growth of a bean to the revolution 
 of the stars is so perfectly adjusted and regulated. And there 
 was the world of poetry where language revealed thoughts and 
 feelings in new and beautiful and memorable forms. 
 
 l^ooks are the aeroplanes that bear us quickly to these wonder- 
 ful worlds. The study of language buys us tickets for many 
 voyages.
 
 The Verb Be 227 
 
 What fables in this book do you remember ? What 
 lessons did they teach ? What stories of children do you 
 remember ? Which do you like the best ? What is meant 
 by the world of history ? What lessons led you into that 
 world ? What divisions or periods of history have you 
 studied ? What great men ? What is meant by the world 
 of science ? What lessons dealt with that world ? What 
 lessons had to deal with everyday matters such as you are 
 familiar with? Have you been in the world of fairies ? In 
 what lessons ? In the world of myth and fable ? What 
 kinds of subjects have the poems you have learned told 
 about ? Flowers, birds, nature, fairies ? Moral lessons, per- 
 sons, nonsense ? Which oral lesson has been the most inter- 
 esting ? Which composition have you most enjoyed writing ? 
 
 THE YEARS AT THE SPRING 
 
 The year's at the spring, The lark's on the wing ; 
 
 And day's at the morn ; The snail's on the thorn j 
 
 Morning's at seven ; God's in his heaven — 
 
 The hillside's dew-pearled ; All's right with the world ! 
 
 — EoBERT Browning. 
 
 244. WRITTEN LESSON 
 
 Write a letter to a friend describing your work this year 
 in English, or on some other topic suggested by Lesson 243. 
 
 245. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 THE VERB BE 
 
 The verb he^ with its many forms, is, are, was, were, have 
 been, will be, etc., is a very important and peculiar verb. It is
 
 228 Eveiydaj English 
 
 different from most other verbs because it does not express 
 action. It serves as a connective. It brings together two 
 things that belong together. 
 
 I am George Robinson. Our teacher is a woman. 
 
 The day is pleasant. The dog was black. 
 
 In these sentences the verb is used almost like an arith- 
 metical sign to show that : 
 
 J and George RohinBon refer to the same person. 
 Our teacher and woman refer to the same person. 
 The day and pleasant refer to the same thing. 
 Tlie dog and hlack refer to the same thing. 
 
 The verb be is called a copulative or connecting verb. 
 
 The verb he cannot take an object. 
 
 A copulative verb has a complement that refers to the same 
 thing as its subject. 
 
   A noun used as the complement of a copulative verb is a predi- 
 cate noun. 
 
 An adjective used as the complement of a copulative verb is 
 a predicate adjective. 
 
 Fill ill the blanks wdth an adjective or noun. Does this 
 adjective or noun always refer to the same tiling as the sub- 
 ject of the verb ? 
 
 1 . The common house fly is . 2. Were you after the 
 
 game ? .S. The mosquito was . 4. I am . 5. You will 
 
 be . fi. The elephant is a . 7. A giraffe is . 8. The 
 
 l)i{'tures in this book are . 9. The complement of the verb 
 
 he is . 10. The complement of the verb he is not . 
 
 A few other verbs are used like he as copulas. The most 
 common are : appear^ become, feel, grow, look, seem, sound, 
 tusfe.
 
 Objects and Complements 228 
 
 246. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 OBJECTS AND COMPLEMENTS 
 
 Which of these verbs and verb-groups ai'e transitive ? in- 
 transitive ? copulative ? 
 
 Mary came. She brought her book. She is kind. 
 
 Mary is coming. She will bring her book. Mary will be kind. 
 Mary has come. She brings her book. Was she kind ? 
 
 Note that in the first three sentences we have three forms 
 of the verb come; in the second group of sentences, three 
 forms of the verb bring ; in the third group, three forms of 
 the verb he. 
 
 In the second and third paragraphs of Lesson 231, decide 
 whether the verbs are transitive, intransitive, or copulative. 
 
 What words are used as objects ? as predicate nouns ? as 
 predicate adjectives ? 
 
 Predicate adjectives are found after many verbs; predicate 
 nouns after a few besides he. Can you give examples ? What 
 are these verbs called ? 
 
 A predicate noun is in the nominative case. Why ? 
 
 247. LANGUAGE LESSON 
 
 CASE 
 
 Case (see Lesson 239) is a grammatical term expressing 
 the relationship of nouns (or pronouns) to other words in 
 the sentence. In the following sentences, note the nouns 
 and their relations to other words. 
 
 The dog's tail brushed the cup from the table. 
 The accident was not the dog's fault. 
 
 Which nouns are simple subjects? Wliat is their case? 
 Which noun is a predicate noun? Why is it in the nomi-
 
 230 Everyday English 
 
 native case ? Which noun is the object of a transitive verb? 
 What is its case ? Which noun is in a prepositional phrase ? 
 What is its case ? Which nouns show possession ? What is 
 their case ? Can you think of a prepositional phrase which 
 would have the same meaning as the possessive noun ? 
 
 In the following sentences give the case of each noun and 
 its use in the sentence. 
 
 1. A black object hangs on the bough of an old apple tree. 
 
 2. It is a swarm of bees. 
 
 3. They may find a home in the hollow tree. 
 
 4. Bring a hive. 
 
 5. Hold it under the swarm. 
 
 6. Shake the bough gently. 
 
 7. The bees will fall into the hive. 
 
 8. The working bees are soon busy. 
 0. Some bees fly in search of honey. 
 
 10. Other bees form the queen's guard. 
 
 The nominative case includes subjects of verbs, and predicate 
 nouns or pronouns. 
 
 The objective case includes objects of verbs, indirect objects, 
 and nouns or pronouns in prepositional phrases. 
 
 The possessive case includes all possessive nouns or pronouns. 
 
 248. REVIEW LESSON 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH 
 
 Review Lessons 19G and 197. Lessons 248 and 249 give a 
 summary of what you have learned about grammar in Part IIL 
 
 There are eight parts of speech : nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjec- 
 tives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, interjections. 
 
 Nouns are used as names of persons or things. Define and give 
 e.xamples of common and proper nouns.
 
 / Review Lessons 231 
 
 Pronouns are words used instead of nouns. Name the personal pro- 
 nouus and give examples in the different persons, numbers, and 
 cases. 
 
 Verbs tell or assert something. Most verbs express action. 
 Define and give examples of transitive, intransitive, and copula- 
 tive verbs. What are verb-groups ? 
 
 Adjectives are used to modify nouns. Explain and illustrate the 
 comparison of adjectives. 
 
 Adverbs are used to modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. 
 Give examples of adverbs of time, place, manner. 
 
 Prepositions are used to introduce nouns or pronouns in phrases. 
 Name twelve prepositions. 
 
 Conjunctions are used to connect words, phrases, or clauses. 
 
 Interjections are used to express sudden or strong emotion. 
 
 A word may sometimes be one part of speech and sometimes 
 another, according to its use in the sentence. 
 
 Phrased and clauses are often used like words, as adjectives, or 
 adverbs, or nouns. 
 
 249. REVIEW LESSON 
 
 ANALYSIS OF THE SENTENCE 
 
 Every sentence has a complete subject and a complete predicate 
 
 The complete subject consists of the simple subject and its 
 modifiers. 
 
 The complete predicate consists of the simple predicate and its 
 modifiers. 
 
 The simple subject is a noun or pronoun. 
 
 The simple predicate is a verb or verb-group. 
 
 Modifiers may be words or phrases. Adjectives modify nouns 
 or pronouns. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. 
 
 A transitive verb leaves its action unfinished and requires an 
 object to complete the action.
 
 232 Everyday Enrrlish 
 
 An intransitive verb expresses an action complete without an 
 object. 
 
 Copulative verbs {he and a few others) do not px]iress action, 
 but connect the subject with some other word, a predicate noun, 
 or a predicate adjective. 
 
 The subject of a verb, or a predicate noun or pronoun, is in 
 the nominative case. 
 
 The object of a verb, the indirect object, or the object of a 
 preposition, is in the objective case. 
 
 Give examples to illustrate each of these deiinitions. 
 
 These definitions describe the complete analysis of simple sen- 
 tences. A simple sentence has only one predicate. Later on you 
 will study about other kinds of sentences, called Compound and 
 Complex. 
 
 250. REVIEW LESSON 
 
 CAPITALS. ABBREVIATIONS. PUNCTUATION 
 
 A capital letter should begin: — 1. Every sentence. 2. Every 
 line of poetry. 3. Every direct quotation. 4. All proper 
 nouns, and their abbreviations. 5. Names of the Deity. G. 
 The principal words in the titles of books. 7. Titles of honor 
 and their abbreviations when used with proper names. 8, I 
 and 0. 
 
 Common abbreviations which you should know are: a.m., p.m., 
 ];.<:., A.O., Mr., Mr^., ])r., llev., Jlon., Prof., Col., Supt, Sec, 
 Treas., Sr., Jr., Ave., Co., Dr., Is^.B., P.O., P.S., O.K., R.R., St., 
 p.f/., etc., i.e., Xo. 
 
 A period is used: L At the end of a declarative or imperative 
 sentence. 2. After an abbreviation or an initial. 
 
 A question mark is used at the end of an interrogative sentence. 
 
 An exclamation mark is used at the end of an exclamatory 
 sentence or after words expressing very strong feeling.
 
 Review of Punctuation 
 
 233 
 
 The comma separates words, phrases, or clauses that should be kept 
 apart in thought. It marks oft' frcnn the rest of the sentence : 
 
 1. The name of the person spoken to. 
 
 2. A direct quotation or each part of a divided quotation. 
 
 3. The parts of dates or addresses. 
 
 4. Yes or no when part of an answer. 
 
 5. Each word in a series, where some of the conjunctions are 
 omitted. 
 
 6. Any part of tlie sentence that is distinct from the rest. 
 
 The semicolon marks a greater separation from the rest of the 
 sentence than the comma. 
 
 Tlie hyphen separates parts of a compound word ; and separates 
 the syllables of a word running over from one line to another. 
 
 The apostrophe denotes (1) possession, (2) the omission of 
 letters in contractions. 
 
 Quotation marks inclose every direct quotation or the parts of 
 divided quotations. 
 
 Single marks of quotation inclose a quotation within a quotation.
 
 BOOKS FOR BOYS AND GIRLS IN GRADES FOUR, 
 
 FIVE, AND SIX 
 
 MYTHS AND FAIRY TALES 
 
 ^sop's Fables. 
 
 Arabian Nights. 
 
 Andersen's Fairy Tales. 
 
 Baker's Out of the NoHhland. 
 
 Boyesen's Norseland Tales. 
 
 Brown's Robin Hood; In the Days of Giants; The BooJc of 
 Saints and Friendly Beasts. 
 
 Carroll's Alice in Wonderland; T7) rough the LooMng Glass. 
 
 Collodi's Pinocchio. 
 
 Craik's Adcentures of a Brownie. 
 
 De Musset's Mr. Wind and Madame Rain. 
 
 Grimm's Household Tales. 
 
 Harris's Nights icith Uncle Remus; Uncle Remus and his 
 Friends. 
 
 Hawthorne's Wonder Book; Tangleivood Tales. 
 
 Kingsley's Greelc Heroes; TJie Water Babies. 
 
 Lang's Fairy Books. 
 
 Lanier's The Bofs King Arthur. 
 
 Longfellow's Hiaioatha. 
 
 Macdonald's At the Back of the North Wind. 
 
 Pyle's The Wonder Clock; Robin Hood ; King Arthur. 
 
 Ruskin's The King of the Golden River. 
 
 Stockton's Fanciful Tales. 
 
 STORIES OF CHILD LIFE 
 
 Alfott's Little Women; Little Men ; Jo^s Boys. 
 Aldrich's The Story of a Bad Boy. 
 Boyesen's Boyhood in Norway. 
 
 234
 
 Books for Boys and Girls 235 
 
 Burnett's Editha's Burglar ; Little Lord Fauntleroy. 
 
 Craik's The Little Lame Prince. 
 
 Dodge's Hans Brinker. 
 
 Swing's Jackanapes ; TJie Story of a Short Life. 
 
 Johnston's The Little Colonel. 
 
 Larcom's A Neio England Girlhood. 
 
 Otis's Toby Tyler. 
 
 Ouida's A Dog of Flanders; TJie NUrnberg Stove. 
 
 Spyri's Heidi. 
 
 St. Nicholas's Baby Days; Christmas Book. 
 
 Wiggin's Polly Oliver's Problem; Rebecca of Simnybrook Farm. 
 
 TRAVEL AND ADVENTURE 
 
 Defoe's Robinson Crusoe. 
 Ingersoll's Book of the Ocean. 
 Kipling's Captains Courageoxts. 
 Moffett's Careers of Danger and Daring. 
 Schwatka's Children of the Cold. 
 Stevenson's Treasure Island. 
 St. Nicholas's Lidian Tales. 
 
 HISTORICAL TALES 
 
 Crockett's Red Cap Tales (abridgments of Scott). 
 Hawthorne's Grandfather'' s Chair. 
 Pyle's Meyi of Iron. 
 
 St. Nicholas's War Stories; Colonial St07ies; Revolutionary 
 Stories. 
 
 Tappan's Ainerican Hero Stories. 
 
 BOOKS ABOUT ANIMALS 
 
 Bostock's The Training of Wild Animals. 
 
 Brown's, Dr. John, Rab and his Friends. 
 
 Burroughs's Birds and Bees; Squirrels and Other Fur Bearers.
 
 23 () Everyday Eiiolisli 
 
 C'oin stock's Ways of the Six Fuotcd. 
 .Jackson's Cat Stories; Letters from a Cat. 
 Kipling's Jungle Book; Second Jungle Book. 
 Lang's Animal Story Book. 
 Miller's First Book of Birds; Bird Ways. 
 
 Pierson's Among the Pond People; Among the Meadow People; 
 Among the Forest People. 
 
 Seton's Wild Animals I have Knoim; The Biography of a Grizzly. 
 
 Sewall's Black Beauty. 
 
 St. Nicholas's Animal Stories. 
 
 CLASSIC TALES RETOLD 
 
 Butcher, Leaf and Lang's The Odyssey. 
 
 Church's Stories from Homer; Stories from the Greek Trage- 
 dians; Stories from Lioy. 
 
 Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. 
 Lang, Leaf and Myers's TJie Iliad. 
 Potter's The Children's Bible. 
 
 POETRY 
 
 Bacon's Songs Every Child Should Know (set to music). 
 
 Burt's Poems Every Child Should Know. 
 
 Farnsworth's Songs for Schools (set to music). 
 
 Lang's Blue Poetry Book. 
 
 Montgomery's Heroic Ballads. 
 
 Palgrave's Children'' s Treasury of Poetry and Song. 
 
 Patmore's TJie Children's Garland. 
 
 Penniman's Poetry for CJdldren. 
 
 Repplier's A Book of Famous Verses. 
 
 Sherman's Little Folks' Lyrics. 
 
 Stevenson's A Child's Garden of Verses. 
 
 Wells's The Jingle Book. 
 
 Whittier's Child Life in Poetry. 
 
 Wiggin and Smith's The Posy Ring; Golden Numbers.
 
 INDEX 
 
 Names of authors are in small capitals ; -n-ords and phrases in italics ; titles of lessons inclosed 
 in quotations marks. Selections are usually indexed only under authors or Poems, Stories, 
 etc. The numbers refer to pages. 
 
 com- 
 
 A, an, the, 102, 139. 
 
 Abbreviations, initials, 18; Mr., Mrs., 
 
 Miss, 18 ; in common use, 20 ; 
 
 months, 39 ; review, 232. 
 Address of letters, 74. 
 Adjectives, 1^39, 191, 192, 205. 
 Adverbs, 158, 158, 194, 205; 
 
 parison of, 195. 
 Advertisements, answers to, 153. 
 Ain't, 54. 
 
 Alcott, Louise M., Little Women, 82. 
 And, used too often, 14, 32. 
 Apostrophe, 54^,^2^5. 
 "Apple Picking,'* 175. 
 Applicatioif for position, 153. 
 Articles, 13». 
 "Aurora," 182. 
 
 Baker, Emilie K., Sif's Golden 
 
 Hair, 69. 
 "Balloon Man, The," 18, 19. 
 Be, the verb, 227, 228. 
 "Bees," 184, 185, 18G. 
 Between or among, 98. 
 " Bird Shop, The," 126. 
 BoNHEUE, Rosa, Lion Family, 149. 
 Browning, Robert, 173, 227. 
 Bryant, William Cullen, Marion's 
 
 Men, 103 ; Robert of Lincoln, 
 
 166-169. 
 Burroughs, John, 186. 
 Business Letters, 152, 154, 177, 209. 
 
 Can, 98. 
 
 Capitals, 6, 8, 10, 12, 18, 20, 37, 68 ; 
 review, 88, 178, 232. 
 
 Case, 217, 224, 225, 229, 230 ; review, 
 232. 
 
 Character-study : A Nickel to Spend, 
 33 ; George Wa.shington, 35 ; Turn- 
 ing the Grindstone, 57 ; Abraham 
 Lincoln, 120; Robert E. Lee, 140; 
 Greek Stories, 189 ; Windmills of Hol- 
 land, 193 ; Heroes of the North, 195. 
 
 Child, Lydia Maria, Thanksgiving 
 Day, 24, 25. 
 
 "Circus, The," 48. 
 
 "Coasting," 72. 
 
 Coleridge, S. T., He prayeth well, 109. 
 
 Collins, William, An Ode, 198. 
 
 Colon, 64, 128. 
 
 "Colonists, The," 163. 
 
 Comma, 37, 42, 59, 64, 68, 71; re- 
 view, 88, 128, 133. 
 
 Comparison, of adjectives, 192 ; of 
 adverbs, 195. 
 
 Complement, 228. 
 
 Compositions, directions for writing, 2. 
 
 Compound and Complex Sentences, 
 232. 
 
 Compound words, 40, 128, 233. 
 
 Conjunctions, 202. 
 
 Contractions, 53, 59, 60. 
 
 Conversations, see Dramas and Quo- 
 tations. 
 
 Copula, 227, 228. 
 
 "Corn," 136. 
 
 Cunningham, Allen, 27. 
 
 "Danger of Talking Too Much," a 
 
 fable, 11. 
 "Dangerous House-fly, The," 208, 209. 
 Dates, 42, 63. 
 Days of the week, 39. 
 Declarative sentences, 3. 
 Descriptions, to be written, 5, 19, 
 
 23, 49, 93, 110, 132, 150, 161, 175, 
 
 183, 194. 
 Dictation, 3, 6, 8, 20, 23, 42, 57, 82, 
 
 86, 91, 96, 118, 161. 
 Dictionary, the use of, 24. 
 Do, the verb, 114, 170. 
 Dodge, Mary Mapes, 194. 
 Doesn't and don't, 114. 
 Double negatives, 122, 123. 
 Dramas: The Frog and the Ox, 22; 
 
 Two Dogs, 28 ; Mercury and the 
 
 Woodman, 50 ; Waiting for Mis- 
 
 237
 
 238 
 
 Index 
 
 tress. 104; The Colonists, 163; 
 Midsummer Night's Dream, 218. 
 "Dutch Scene," 193. 
 
 Emerson, R. W., Concord Hymn, 203. 
 "Enunciation," lessons, 157, 172, 179. 
 Exclamations, 11, 203. 
 Exclamatory sentences, 11. 
 Explanations, 102, 133, 136, 157, 
 215, 216. 
 
 Fables : The Danger of Talking Too 
 Much, 11; The Frog and the Ox, 
 22 ; The Larks and the Farmer, 31 ; 
 Story of Jocko, 40. 
 
 "Fire Engine, The," 47. 
 
 Fr.\nklin, Bexja.min, Turning the 
 Grindstone, 57. 
 
 "Frog and the Ox," a fable, 22. 
 
 Games ; questions on picture, 5 ; 
 
 dividing cla.ss into sides, 8, 10, 20 ; 
 
 with word.s, 188. 
 "Game with Words," 188. 
 Garland, Hamlin, A Threshing 
 
 Scene, 161. 
 George and May, sentences and 
 
 stories about, 6, 18, 37, 59, 60, 63, 
 
 68, 71, 72, 74, 86, 87, 96, 118. 
 "Greek Stories," 189-191. 
 "Greenaway, Kate," 43. 
 "Growth of a plant," 94-96. 
 
 Has and have, 44, 45. 
 
 Heading of a letter, 63. 
 
 "Heroes of the North," 195-197. 
 
 "Hoeing and Fishing," 200. 
 
 HoLME.s, O. VY., Old Ironsides, 143, 144. 
 
 Homonyms, 8, 79, 102, 103. 
 
 Hood, Thomas, a letter by, 61. 
 
 "Hurdy-gurdy," 4, 5. 
 
 Hyphen, 15, 40, 128. 
 
 /, 8. 
 
 "Icarus and his Flight," 171. 
 
 Imperative Sentences, 11. 
 
 Indention, 32, 42. 
 
 Indirect object, 225. 
 
 Initials, 18, 19, 20. 
 
 "In Many Worlds," 226. 
 
 Int(TJections, 203. 
 
 Interrogation point, 6, 88. 
 
 Intf'rrogativo .sentences, 3, 0, 11. 
 
 Intransitive verb, 210, 211, 214, 
 
 224, 225. 
 Iiivitation.s, 214. 
 Irregular comparison, 195. 
 Irregular plurals, 27. 
 
 Its and it's, 60. 
 Is and are, 34. 
 
 Jack.son, Helen Hunt, October's 
 Bright Blue Weather, 116. 
 
 Landseer, Sir Edwin, Waiting for 
 Mistress, 104. 
 
 Language, a talk about, 52. 
 
 Lanier, Sidney, Tampa Robins, 103. 
 
 "Larks and the Farmer," fable, 31. 
 
 Learn, teach, 98. 
 
 Leave, let, 98. 
 
 "Lee, Robert E," 140. 
 
 Letters, from Thomas Hood, 61 ; from 
 George to May, 63 ; a Day at School, 
 67 ; to a friend about your town, 
 84 ; requiring an answer, 99 ; a real 
 letter, 111-113; Business Letters, 
 152, 153, 154, 177; of invitation, 
 214; to a friend, 227. 
 
 Letters, directions for : heading, 63 ; 
 salutation, 63, 64 ; address, 74 ; 
 planning and criticising, 111-113; 
 models for business letters, 152; 
 an invitation, 214. 
 
 Lie or lay, 147. 
 
 Like, love, 98. 
 
 "Lincoln, .\brah.\m," 120-121. 
 
 "Lion Family," 149. 
 
 "Little Teacher," 1. 
 
 Longfellow, Henry W., The Chil- 
 dren's Hour, 76. 
 
 Margin, 2, 12. 
 
 May, 98. 
 
 "Mercury and the Woodman," 50, 51. 
 
 "Midsummer Night's Dream, A," 
 
 218-223. 
 Modifiers, 130. 133, 135, 138. 
 Months, 39. 
 Most or almost, 98. 
 "Mute Appeal, A," 92. 
 
 Names : of God, 10 ; of persons, 
 
 places, countries, cities, 10 ; exercises 
 
 on writing, 18, 19, 37, 42. 
 Narrative, 207. See Stories. 
 "Nickel to Spend," 33. 
 Nominative case, 217, 229, 230, 232. 
 Nouns, 97, 100, 105, 109, 126, 165, 
 
 170, 173, 181, reviews 184, 205. 
 
 See Plurals, Case, etc. 
 Number, 111, 170, 187. See Plurals. 
 
 0,8. 
 
 Object, Objective case, 210. 211, 214, 
 215, 217, 224, 225, 229, 230, 232.
 
 Index 
 
 239 
 
 "Old-fashioned School, An," 64. 
 "Old Garden, The," 110. 
 "On Explaining Things," 215, 216. 
 Outlines for compositions, 122, 132, 
 157, 183. 
 
 Paragraphs, 30, 32, 42, 93, 102, 122, 136, 
 186. 
 
 Parts of Speech, 181, 205, 230, 231. 
 See Nou7is, Pronouns, etc. 
 
 Period, 6, 18, 20 ; review, 88, 178, 232. 
 
 Person, 187, 215, 217. 
 
 "Pestilent Mosquito," 211-213. 
 
 Phrases, 199. 
 
 "Picnic, The," 20, 21, 22. 
 
 Pictures for study : Little Teacher, 1 ; 
 The Hurdy-Gurdv, 4 j A Rainy 
 Day, 9; The Balloon Man, 18; 
 The Picnic, 21 ; A Nickel to Spend, 
 33 ; by Kate Greenaway, 43 ; The 
 Fire Engine, 46; The Circus, 48; 
 Coasting, 73 ; Pilgrims Going to 
 Church, 80; A Mute Appeal, 92; 
 Waiting for Mistress, 104; The Old 
 Garden, 110; The Bird Shop, 126; 
 Lion Family, 149 ; Apple Picking, 
 175; Aurora, 182; A Dutch Scene, 
 193 ; Siegfried, 196. 
 
 Plans, see Outlines. 
 
 Plurals, of nouns, 27, 34, 44, 49, 51, 
 75, 83, 85, 87 ; of verbs and pro- 
 nouns, 34, 44, 52, 75, 97, 111, 126, 
 174; review, 86, 87, 170. 
 
 Poems : Singing, 7 ; What the Winds 
 bring, 16 ; Thanksgiving Day, 24 ; 
 The Land of Counterpane, 38 ; Sup- 
 pose, 54 ; The Children's Hour, 76 ; 
 Who has seen the wind, 87 ; The 
 Barefoot Boy, 101 ; stanzas from 
 Song of Marion's Men and Tampa 
 Robins, 103 ; He praveth well, 
 109; October's Bright Blue 
 Weather, 116; Daffodils, 131; Rab- 
 bit in the Cross-ties, 148; Old 
 Ironsides, 144 ; Robert of Lincoln, 
 166 ; Selection from Pied Piper, 173 ; 
 Stanzas from Tennyson, 179 ; Ode to 
 the Brave, 198 ; Concord Hymn, 203 ; 
 Midsummer Night's Dream, 218-222 ; 
 The Year's at the Spring, 227. 
 
 Possessives, 56, 57, 84, 85. 
 
 Predicate, see Subject and Predicate. 
 
 Predicate Nouns and Adjectives, 228, 
 229. 
 
 Prefixes, 118, 119. 
 
 Prepositional phrases, 199. 
 
 Prepositions, 199. 
 
 "Pretty Thief, A," 106. 
 
 Pronouns, 99, 105, 126, 151, 170, 173, 
 174, 187, 215, 217, 231. See Per- 
 son, Case, etc. 
 
 Pronunciation, use of dictionary for, 
 24. See Enunciation. 
 
 Proper nouns, 165, 197. 
 
 Proverbs, 71, 129. 
 
 Punctuation : in letters, 63, 64, 74 ; 
 summary, 88; lesson on, 127, 128; 
 review, 232, 233. See Period, Com- 
 ma, etc. 
 
 Question mark, 6, 88. 
 
 Questions, 3, 6, 11. 
 
 Quotation marks, 68, 71, 72. See 
 
 Quotations. 
 Quotations, 68; divided, 71, 72. 
 
 "Rainy Day, A," 8-10. • 
 
 Rhyme, 17, 56. 
 
 Riley, James W., Rabbit in the 
 
 Cross-ties, 148. 
 RossETTi, Christina G., 17, 87. 
 
 See, saw, seen, 113, 114. 
 
 Semicolon, 128. 
 
 Sentence, defined, 3 ; declarative and 
 interrogative, 3 ; punctuation ,of, 6, 
 1 1 ; imperative and exclamatory, 1 1 ; 
 elements of, 175. See Sentence 
 Building, Subject and Predicate. 
 
 Sentence analysis, 162, 176, 189, 231. 
 
 Sentence building, 15, 37, 44, 86, 90, 
 138, 146, 158, 173, 191, 202, 224. 
 
 Series, words in a, 81. 
 
 Shakespeare, "Midsummer Night's 
 Dream," 218-223. 
 
 Shall and will, 153. 
 
 "Siegfried," picture, 196. 
 
 "Sif's Golden Hair," a northern 
 myth, 69. 
 
 Sit or set, 142, 143. 
 
 Stanza, 17. 
 
 "States, The,", 135. 
 
 Stedman, Edmund C, What the 
 Winds Bring, 16, 17. 
 
 Stevenson, R. L., Singing, 7 ; Travels 
 with a Donkey, 180. 
 
 Stories for study : Alice Asleep, 13 ; 
 A True Story, Jocko, 40 ; Mercury 
 and the Woodman, 50 ; Turning 
 the Grindstone, 57 ; Sif's Golden 
 Hair, 69; A Pretty Thief, 106; 
 A Picture Story, 124 ; An Un- 
 finished Story, 148 ; Icarus and his 
 Flight, 171 ; Hoeing and Fishing, 
 200. See Fables, Dramas, Pictures, 
 Unfinished Stories.
 
 240 
 
 Index 
 
 Stories, to be written, 10, 12, 14, 19, 
 22, 2(), :i2, 34, 42, 48, 59, 109, 126, 
 127, 130. 142, 148, 1G5, 171, 180, 
 183, 198, 207. 
 
 Subject and Predicate, 89, 90 ; com- 
 plete, 91 ; order of, 93 ; exercises on, 
 94, 97, 100, 138. 162; simple, 130, 
 133. 134, 162, 176; compound, 174; 
 re\-icw, 231, 232. 
 
 Suffixes, 118, 119. 
 
 Syllables, 14, 15. 
 
 Synonyms, 78, 79, 8lr''102, 103, 118. 
 
 Teach, learn, 98. 
 
 Telegrams, 155, 177. 
 
 Tennyson, stanzas from, 179. 
 
 Tense, 111, 189. 
 
 Titles, 12, 17, 26. 
 
 To, too, (wo, 8. 
 
 "Town in which vou live," 81, 83, 84. 
 
 Transitive verl)s, 210, 211, 214, 224, 
 
 225. 
 "True Story of Jocko," 40. 
 
 Unfinished Stories, 148, 171, 200. 
 
 Verbs, 105, 109, 111, 126, 1.30, 146, 
 151, 170, 173, 188, 189, 210, 211, 
 214, 224, 225, 227, 228. See Plurals, 
 Tense, is, are, was, were, see, do, 
 he, etc. 
 
 Vocabulary, see Words. 
 
 "Waiting for Mistress," 104. 
 
 Was or wei-e, 44. 
 
 Washington, George, lessons and 
 pictures, 35, 36. 
 
 Wheat, 158-160. 
 
 Whittier, .1. G., Barefoot Boy, 
 101 ; Corn Song, 138. 
 
 Will, 153. 
 
 "Windmills of Holland, The," 193. 
 
 Words, meaning and choice, 23, 24, 
 38, 53, 56, 58, 77. 81, 98, 102, 103, 
 115, lis, 119, 131, 132,-146, 158, 
 168, 172, 188, 194, 205, 223. 
 
 Wordsworth, William, Dafifodils, 
 131. 
 
 Yes and no, 59. 
 "Your State," 133.
 
 .»♦- 
 
 'T^HE following pages contain advertisements 
 of Macmillan books on kindred subjects
 
 BAKER AND CARPENTER 
 
 r' 
 
 LANGUAGE READER SERIES 
 
 Baker and Carpenter Primer 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, Professor of the English Language and Literature 
 in Teachers College; George R. Carpenter, Late Professor of Rhetoric 
 and English Composition in Columbia University; and Miss JulieT. Dui.ON, 
 Teacher of Public School 141, New York City. 123 pages, 25 cents net. 
 
 First Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. B.aker, Professor of the English Language and Literature 
 in Teachers College; Cjeorge R. Carpenter, Late Professor of Rhetoric 
 and English Composition in Columbia University; and Miss Katherine B. 
 Owen, Instructor in the Charlton School, New York City, 152 pages, 
 25 cents net. 
 
 Second Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, George R. Carpenter, and Miss Katherine B. 
 Owen. 165 pages, 30 cents net. 
 
 Third Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, George R. Carpenter, and Miss Mary E. Brooks, 
 Supervisor of Primary Work in Brooklyn. 300 pages, 40 cents net. 
 
 Fourth Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, George R. Carpenter, and Miss Ida E. Robbins, 
 Instructor in Horace Mann School, New York City. 359 pages, 40 cents 
 net. 
 
 Fifth Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, George R. Carpenter, and Miss Mary F. 
 KiRCHWEY, Instructor in Horace Mann School, New York City. 492 pages, 
 45 cents net. 
 
 Sixth Year Language Reader 
 
 By Franklin T. Baker, George R. Carpenter, and Miss Jennie F. 
 Owens, Instructor in Jersey City Training School. 505 pages, 50 cents net. 
 
 Each volume 12mo, cloth. 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue. New York 
 BOSTON CHICAGO SAN FRANCISCO DALLAS
 
 TARR AND McMURRY 
 
 NEW GEOGRAPHIES 
 
 TWO BOOK SERIES 
 
 First Book, $.6$ Second Book, $i.io 
 
 THE SAME IN PARTS 
 
 First Book, Part One, $.40 Second Book, Part One, $.65 
 
 FiRsr Book, Part Two, .50 • Second Book, Part Two. .65 
 
 MODERN PEDAGOGICAL INTERESTING 
 
 Improved size and shape, 7^ by 9^ inches. Easily handled and more 
 
 ilurable. 
 
 Home Geography is made prominent, thus proceeding from the 
 '•known to the unl<nown." Actual experience forms the final 
 basis for all study of Geography. 
 
 Casual Sequence instead of a bare recital of unrelated facts. 
 Sufficient detail for narrative style and vivid picturing, making a 
 strong appeal to pupils' interest. 
 
 Marginal headings help the pupils to study clearly by points. Facts 
 are kept in proper perspective. Tarr and McMurry's NEW 
 GEOGRAPHIES are by far the most teachable. 
 
 New maps and illustrations. The First Book has twenty-three 
 colored maps ; the Second Book forty. The numerous illustra- 
 tions are artistic, every one is properly related to the text and 
 scientifically placed. The line of text is unbroken. 
 
 The books are strongly and attractively bound. 
 
 CORRESPONDENCE SOLICITED 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 BOSTON CHICAGO SAN FRANCISCO DALLAS
 
 THE PUPILS' ARITHMETIC 
 
 A SERIES OF ARITHMETICS BY GRADES 
 
 BY 
 
 JAMES C. BYRNES. Member Board of Examiners. New York 
 
 JULIA RICHMOND, District Superintendent of Schools, New York 
 
 JOHN S. ROBERTS, Principal P. S. 62, Manhattan, New York 
 
 Primary Book, Part One, ^.26 Book Three, $.35 
 Primary Book, Part Two, ^.30 Book Four, ^.35 
 Book Five (in preparation) 
 
 This graded series is well adapted for use in all graded schools. 
 The form appeals especially to the pupils and teachers on the ground 
 of convenience. It appeals to parents and school-boards on the 
 ground of economy. 
 
 THE GILBERT ARITHMETICS 
 
 By C. H. GLEASON and C. B. GILBERT 
 
 Book I, $.36 Book II, $.40 Book III, $.45 
 
 These books, are the latest product of recent careful studies on the 
 subject of teaching mathematics to children. They are unique in 
 that they recognize both the scientific claims of the subject and the 
 psychological claims of the student. 
 
 PRESTON-STEVENS ARITHMETICS 
 
 By DeFOREST A. PRESTON and EDWARD L. STEVENS 
 Elementary Arithmetic, $.35 Standard Arithmetic, $.50 
 
 The Elementary Arithmetic is intended for use by pupils of the third, fourth, 
 and fifth years. The Standard Arithmetic is complete in itself and may be used 
 in many schools throughout all the grades. 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 BOSTON CHICAGO SAN FRANCISCO DALLAS
 
 THE CONTINENTS AND 
 THEIR PEOPLE .... 
 
 By James Franklin, Ed.B., S.B., and Arthur Henry Ch.^mberlain 
 B.S., A.M. Each vulume, i2mo cloth. 
 
 The Continents and Their People will consist of six 
 books, one for each continent. Two volumes, North 
 America and Europe, liave been published. Others 
 will follow shortly. Each volume will treat important 
 geographical units instead of attempting to cove: 
 every subject. 
 
 All the books will be illustrated by pictures having 
 actual teaching value and by maps. 
 
 The Everychild's Series 
 
 A new and unique series of supplementary readers for all school 
 grades. The books will cover as nearly as may be the entire 
 field of suitable literature, classified somewhat as follows : — 
 
 FOLKLORE AND FA TRY STORIES 
 
 STORIES OF THE INDUSTRIES 
 
 GEOGRAPHIC STORIES 
 
 ORIGINAL STORIES RELATING TO CHILD LIFE 
 
 STANDARD AND CLASSICAL LITERATURE 
 
 ALREADY ISSUED 
 
 Old Time Tales 
 
 Folklore stories for third or fourth grade, by Kate F. Oswell, 
 author of the American School Readers. 
 
 Nature Stories for First or Second Grades, by Mary Gardner. 
 
 In Those Days 
 
 A true story of child life a hundred years ago, for fifth or sixth 
 grade, by Mrs. E. B. Hai.i.ock, illustrated in color. 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 64-66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK 
 BOSTON CHICAGO SAN FRANCISCO DALLAS
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below 
 
 M' *' i I « 
 
 -c - Ida 
 
 MAR 2 5 1942 
 SEP :i 3 19^ 
 
 P'crm L-9-35m-8,'28
 
 % 
 
 3 1158 01262 4457 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 AA 000 352 066 5
 
 \